~ , ey eer ar —=s oe ——— a a a Or we renee FR RET SA Taee Tel Pal a etl oa Ay EN I ty A SENET al al NTT A lt ‘sn rticas hada eetanstty Win tienda takai eipadied nayph*baiiod aidiphaedieliak oie hch Ardler red enaiente nals veaieah icin Nahe, ned clretiolie wwinatiamatceddtytelibeianth.ciabemant Soctaedll bplictutbabetohedatsiieon ont Badpnoret td ao ete Leveriedi-Anty peaptedeictettnh wde%-teavae vind ant at ff beim ped iomte Rs > fea -nliadrabeiveret eee eo tin chek othniiriladteedoteetineh vinctrvhs cote coe ome wha bedhecdtelend ait othaaetunageta~tet aia tetaba teeta ellwietincn aetien cy Cee ae ee ee Le ares iein habats pat a eeaiyrobeisneRuisereny in Se te taneperane a he et oxy; Hetnieittrbubytuietthtintndinbellelinds bdintatiniadiameien, deeded k dentaied Pee cu ARt eh fre Heda EN Ea OE A RE AP NM ED ab Nh Peli AMS ONS TELM SE PLAT ATO A PAA Nt OE AA ANTE EAE ALANA KANE MER ARAN Dale tay AP hc 6 hsb Net Sct ESA PRN PN rg eta at tet Lines 95 nnog APSA BE SHS ima tuae gene CoeeNm Hie PL Og ot ms pod od | in iardeledetetetietinteitetbdeh dah beh bhideh on abe ne ROAD PP LL AMAA LOD LADLE IDI I LOPES ELA LOSERS EE ANOLE OE LA MELO LOLA CAR it dg HEAP Di IK te ihe iA at BEA OE Be Nt A eR ot i Aalto Acie ce ow STD aN at Pee tad, (Ole Altman. athe Do bubvediede Bakaaedned heciienin pepetediaettll iertini a ae hte A eit 4 0 apne RL leh et NA ARE CREA IDNs POD AP SO A LO AP hte a ld ly Shpall dented Pebhin ogee a POEL WON Ee re ety tg grey i ne it dase tang ha a Fed bey tebe cd berry. + Dadogn de i Dolave thet, en - Aa ode Se I pape wuricaentol eT Ore ae ~ ‘ 14 + el Nay PPP eNeN, a Ae ep us " PENI Rh PERE TY EI pb GN oN Hh clade Hp ee GAT el i A NAN A te et fpr de ip ade raped TOT saatind wh pda er adh \dvety ade ibetgnindiate balan: F Adbedi ed on thats ode inky “dct haedaee ine Ine atniindtataieaaiinlniadeiheiiae Ritalin ole dole teh deh a dae oe Lee A ee De heehee he Moke Bnihadeieedtawed p> poeta, fds, Pie. Gerkigtettir wd od ' ae A Oy lr rma S dedaatiies Renitan all tebe aat nthe Tanner nat ma hae ree ater merstrlaser ss OE Johre FEHR P ee Cie! nal hig yin « Pele tye pecade = A a: ae af ke Tetape res aiste SO Be Syibebr emesis FPL!» na rey colllaplede ” TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS REPORT ROYAL SOCIETY of SOUTH AUSTRALIA VG ESO EE [Wire TWELVE PLATES AND TWELVE FIGURES IN THE TEXT. EDITED BY WALTER HOWCHIN, FG. Adelaide : W. C. RIGBY, 74, KING WILLIAM STREET. DECEMBER, 1906. Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Australia from Europe and America should be addressed ‘‘per W. C Rigby, care Messrs. Thos. Meadows & Co., 34, Milk Street Cheapside, London.” Royal Socrety ot South Australia (INCORPORATED). Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY SIR GEORGE R. LE HUNTE, K.C.M.G. — a ip— = OFFICERS FOR 1406-7. Prestdent : JOSEPH C. VERCO, M.D., F.R.C.S. Vice=Presidents: PROF. FE. H. RENNIE, M.A., D.Se REV. THOMAS BLACKBURN, B.A. fbon. Treasurer: WALTER RUTT, C.E. thon. Secretary and Sealbolder: G. G. MAYO, C.E. Members of Council: W. L. CLELAND, M.B. SAMUEL DIXON. W. H. SELWAY. W. B. POOLE. K. ASHBY. W. HOWCHIN, F.G.S. (Editor and Representative Governor) Auditor : J. S; LLOYDS We Arsen COMP ine NTS: Braae, Prot. W. H.: On the lonisation of Various Gases by the a Particles of Radium bs a oe et Braga, Prof. W. H.: The a Particles of Uranium and Thorium se se Meyrick, LK.: Descriptions. of Austr alian Tineina ... Mawson, D.: Mineralogical Notes—letid Il elspar and Quartz from Umberatana. Atacamite trom Bim- bowrie See aati Ss $a aie ee ve Lea, ArrHuR M.: Descriptions of Australian Curculionida, with Notes on Previously Described Species. Part iv. Baker, W. H.: Notes on South Australian Decapod Crus- tacea. Part iv: Plates i. to ii. .. Turner, Dr. A. JEFFERIS: New Australian ‘Lepidoptera, with Synonymic and other Notes ... Verco, Dr. J. C.: Notes on South Australian Marine Mol- lusca, with Descriptions of New Species. Part iii. Plate iv. DENNANT, JOHN: Madreporaria from. ‘the Australian and New Zealand Coasts. Plates v. and vi. Braec, Prof. W. H.: On the Ionisation of Various Gases by the a Particles of Radium. No. 2. Plate vii. Mawson, D.: On Certain New Mineral Species Associated ae Carnotite in the Radio-active Ore Body near ary ee: ots he oe: ie sy ip ve Renniz, Dr. EH. H., and Dr. W. T. Cooke: Preliminary Analytical Notes on the Minerals Described in the Pre- ceding Paper : ee Hs a me ate Ee Turner, Dr. A. Jerrerts: A Note on the Localities Attri- buted to Australian Lepidoptera by Mr. Oswald Lower, Rapcutrr, S. (eommmuriicated! by Prof. Ww. HT, Bragg, M. ne: Radium at Moonta Mines, South Australia a Verco, Dr. J. C.: Notes on South Australian Marine Mol- lusca, with Descriptions of New Species. Part iv. Plates viii. to x. x5 Roeers, Dr. R. S.: Description of a New Caladenia. Plate xe : Howcuin, Water: The Geology of the Mount Lofty Ranges. Part ii. Plate xii. Brackspurn, Rev. T.: Further Notes on . Australian Coleop- tera, with Per pans of New Genera and Species. ROEXVI. ZieTz, A.: A Note on Some Modifications in the Morpho- logical Structure of the Mammalian Vertebree ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS - e ae PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS ANNUAL ReEPoRT BaLance SHEET : Donattons to THE LIBRARY. List oF FELLows, ETC. APPENDICES. Proceedings, Annual Report, ete., of the Field Naturalists’ Section... Eighteenth Annual Report ‘of the Native Fauna and Flora Protection Committee of the Field Naturalists’ Section Annual Report, etc., of the Malacological Section see ae Peper, ete., of the Microscopical Section ndex re ie . Cu eat ee 210 1°16 Ag i fs bis 2°74 1-16 Sn Ree cue 2°88 i el digit ee eee 3°68 Vas Au a. 4°45 a, CU 1°20 Pb sap tilaasl LARI AT 3°78 ts The fifth column in Table A shows the application of the formula a/wt+bw. Its close agreement with the second column is remarkable, considering that only two constants are employed. The formula does not seem to apply to the metals, which rather follow a simple square root law. This is certainly a difficulty. 5 As regards pressure and temperature, I have not yet found any effect produced by variation of these conditions. The quantity RP/T appear to be a constant, P being the pressure and T the absolute temperature. This implies that the stopping power of an atom or molecule is independent of P and T. Examples of the fact that RP is constant while T is constant are given in the paper “On the Recombination of Ions in Air and other Gases.’ The following experimen- tal result will serve as an illustration of the fact that R is proportional to T when P is constant. The ionisation vessel filled with air was raised to a temperature of 90° C., the pressure being 763 mm. R was then found to be 5°98. Now, when © — 760) mm:.,.and\T—=20°7;/C. R=4783. 4°83 x 363 x 760 _ 4.905. 5-98 x 293 x 763 It has, of course, been pointed out by several observers that the ionisation effects of radium are largely independent of pressure and temperature and of physical and chemical condi- tions generally. This, however, does not cover the present statement, which refers to the stopping power of the atom, a quantity which has not previously been the subject of measurement, so far as I am aware. To sum up, the range of the a particle in a given gas 1s in the first place easily measured, and in the second place simply related to the constitution of the gas and independent of its state. It is a delightful contrast to some other radio- active quantities, and often gives a welcome foothold in diff- cult places. The quantity I is in quite a different class. It is much more difficult to measure accurately, as I have already des- cribed. But there appears to be a more important difference in that the total ionisation of a gas is not simply dependent on the weights of the atoms of which it is composed. Mole- cular structure counts for something. Perhaps also the vari- ous atoms do not yield ions in simple proportion to the energy spent on them, but this point is not yet sufficiently clear. An example of this want of uniformity has already been given in the paper to which reference has been made. It was shown that RI in ethyl chloride is much greater than RI in air. The difference must be yet a little greater than that shown, as no allowance was made for the small quantity of air mixed with the heavy gas. Again, RI in standard pentane (mostly C;H,.) is nearly half as much again as in air, and the same is almost certainly true of benzene (C,H,) ; but this vapour is harder to treat than pentane, since a high temperature is necessary. Generally speaking, the more oO And 6 complex gases yield the greater number of ions. But the yield does not depend only on the number of atoms in the molecule. Acetylene (C,H,) yields 25// more than air ; yet CO,, with only one atom less, yields but 57/ more ; and ethylene (C,H,) yields the same as acetylene, though it has two atoms more. Of course, In the last case, the atoms added are very light ; and H, itself has, according to my experiments, a slightly lower value (for RI) than air. Rutherford also found this to be the case. On the other hand, the influence of complexity can be illustrated by the cases of acetylene and ethylene, as com- pared to benzene and pentane. In order to bring out the significance of these compari- sons, it shoula be pointed out that the a particle spends exactly the same amount of energy in every gas (Bragg, “Phil. Mag.,” November, 1905). Thus, in different gases different numbers of ions are produced for the same expenditure of energy. It is quite clear, however, that this does not imply that the a particle finds it easier to produce ions in some gases than others. For if so there would be some influence on the stopping power of atoms dependent on the number of ions produced. But the stopping power is connected to the atomic weight by a simple law, and the number of ions pro- duced is not. Plainly, the energy spent by an a particle in an atom, and the resulting ionisation are not directly con- nected ; there is an intervening link. Either the ions made by the a particle produce others in some cases, or some of the ions made never emerge from the atoms. There is something which prevents the simplicity of the law governing the expenditure of energy by the a particle from repeating itself in the amount of ionisation pro- duced. I think it is increasingly clear from our experiments that there is a secondary ionisation within the molecule itself. The tons first. made, or possibly X-ray pulses accompanying ionisation, have in some cases enough energy to make fresh ions before leaving the molecule. Thus, for example, one molecule of C;H, is found to rob the a particle of just as much energy as three molecules of C,H,. But more ions are made out of the one C,H; than out of the group of three acetylene molecules. This may be explained on the grounds that the 12 atoms are crowded together, so that an ion projected under ionisation from one of the atoms strikes one of the others with an energy undiminished by motion through the field of the posi- tive from which it was originally separated, and therefore sufficient to make a new ion. In further consequence the ions emerging from a C,H, molecule move more slowly than those 7 from a C,H.,, and are more liable to initial recombination, This is in agreement with experiment: it is far harder to saturate benzene than acetylene. The secondary ionisation would appear to take place within rather than without the molecule, because the amount of it does not depend upon the distance of the moiecules from one another. The total ionisation is independent of the pres- sure. It is certainly not due to the electric field, for if it were there would be no saturation value of the current. I subjoin the details of one or two of the many experi- ments which Mr. Madsen and I have made. We hope to give a fuller description at some future time. DETERMINATION OF STOPPING POWER AND OF RI IN PENTANE. Electrodes, 3 mm. apart Gees Volts apphed = 300. Temperature of apparatus = 35° Apparatus charged with vapour oe standard pentane. Distance from Ra to Middle Leak in Pressure inside of Ionisation Chamber. 10 secs. Apparatus. 2°8 1982 29 1431 Alb em. a0) 1192 . Dali ii byéal Se 1193 ane 1227 A115, cm. Thin Cu foil over Ra 108 These being plotted, it is found that R=2°95, 1[=1044, the copper leak having been deducted. Thus, R=2°95 in this mixture of pentane and air, at a pressure of 41°15 cm., and a temperature (observed) of 308° (absolute). But at a pressure of 760 cm. and 293° absolute, R in air is 4°83. Hence the mixture stops— Peo TOD ide 2-95 4115 293 = 3:14 times as much as air. A special set of readings at 3°2 cm. is now taken, three for ten seconds and three for twenty seconds. The means are 1196 and 2325 respectively. Comparing these, it is found that the ten-second reading should be multiphed by 1°03 in order to allow for leakage by the insulators. Again, a set is taken with 600 volts between the plates, and it is found that the mean reading, when the copper leak is deducted, is 1134. At the same time the reading for 300 volts, copper leak being deducted, is 1088. Thus saturation is nearly complete. 8 A quantity of the gas is now drawn over into an ex- hausted bulb, whose temperature (that of the oven) is 311 (absolute) ; the pressure is observed to be 34:5. The weight of this gas is ‘2536 gr. It is then calculated from a know- ledge of the capacity of the bulb that the mixture weighs 2°22 times as much as air. From this it is found that to every molecule of pentane there are °23 molecules of air, assuming the pentane molecule to weigh 2°5 times as much as the average air molecule. If s=stopping power of pentane, we have, therefore— 723 “Ss 1-25 Te g=3'59. Again— Rh? oops = 308, uncorrected. Correcting for want of saturation— RI=308 x L134 1088 or On the same day and under the same conditions RI for air=231. The leakage correction is found to be the same for both, and need not be applied. Now, as far as consumption of energy is concerned, °23 molecules of air are equivalent to '23/3°59 molecules of pentane='065. Hence, if all the energy had been spent on pentane molecules, the value for RI would have been— 1:065-x 321 —-065 x 231 =" 342'—15 4 = 327. Finally— Total ionisation in pentane _ 327 _ wae Total ionisation in air 231 DETERMINATION OF STOPPING PowER AND RI IN ACETYLENE (C,H,). Same conditions as previous experiment. Apparatus charged to atmospheric pressure with gas; when tested gas was found to contain less than 2% of impurities. 'Tempera- ture of apparatus=37°5° C. Barometer=763 mm. ee Distance from Ra to Middle of Leak in Ionisation Chamber. 10 secs. A? 1430 4°38 1276 , 4°4 1024 4°5 818 4°6 698 4°7 688 4°8 701 4-9 698 Cu over Ra 46 At 5°2 for 300 volts nett leak = 688 ne e OuOe, Nee = 706 Plotting these values it is found that R=4°57, I (less copper leak)=635. Hence, RI, corrected for want of satu- ration = 298. Hence— Total ionisation for C,H, 298 2 Total ionisation for air Also stopping power— eo oaed G0: He Mb aataaah 457 763 2930 In the paper by Mr. Kleeman and myself, to which I have already referred, it was pointed out that Rutherford had found it more easy to obtain the saturation current from a gas when it was removed from the influence of the ionising agent. We observed that this could be easily explained by supposing initial recombination to be completed before the gas was subjected to the electric field. Nevertheless, as I now see, it 1s otherwise no essential feature of the initial re- combination hypothesis that the act of recombination should take place within any set time. The one important point is that the recombination takes place between two ions origi- nally forming parts of one molecule. It is quite conceiv- able that for a certain time the positive and negative may remain “semi-detached,” their recombination in suspense un- til precipitated by some change of conditions. It is curious that Mr. Madsen, working in this laboratory, has not been able to confirm Professor Rutherford’s experiment, and his results point to a prolonged existence of these pairs. He finds it hard to saturate a mixture of air and ether vapour which has been ionised by radium and then drawn away into a separate ionisation chamber. It is not easy to reconcile this result with that of Professor Rutherford; and it will be necessary to repeat the experiment under varying conditions. 10 The point is of considerable interest, for the existence of these pairs would help to explain much of the mechanism of phosphorescence. They would appear to be connected with the clusters of J. B. B. Burke, which were produced by ioni- sation, gave rise to phosphorescent glow, contained energy, yet were not electrified. It is of interest in this connection that the photograph which Sir William and Lady Huggins made of the phosphorescent glow of radium showed the bands of the gas in which the salt was embedded. Rutherford also has shown that the a particle can no longer cause phos- phorescence when ié has lost its power of ionisation. THe MaGnetic DEFLECTION OF THE a PARTICLE. In the “Physikalische Zeitschrift” for October 15 is a paper by M. Becquerel, “Uber einige Eigenschaften der a Strahlen des Radiums.” The author discusses the theory that the « rays gradually lose their velocity as they spend their energy on the ionisation of the media through which they pass, a theory which I put forward about two years ago,* and which has the support of much experimental evi- dence accumulated by Professor Rutherford,; and by Mr. Kleeman and myself.{ He maintains that the theory is unsuccessful in explain- ing the experiments which he has himself performed, and in particular he describes one experiment which he has devised as a crucial test, and which he considers to show that the theory is incorrect. It is as follows (loc. cit., p. 688) :— The a rays from a small quantity of radium salt are allowed to stream upwards through a narow slit and fall upon a photographic plate. A powerful magnetic field de- flects them shghtly to one side. The field is reversed when the experiment is halfway through, and as a result two images of the slit appear, slightly separated, upon the plate. Now, M. Becquerel covers half the slit with a thin sheet of aluminium, and, according to the theory which I have ad- vanced, the « rays which pass through the sheet are thereby retarded. Consequently, M. Becquerel argues, these a rays should be more bent to one side than those which have not * Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science, Re- port, Dunedin, January, 1904. + fePhi. Mac..°*souly,/ 1905: { “Phil. Mag.,’?’ December, 1904, and September, 1905. il passed thiough the aluminium, and the images on the plate should show a break, the lines being more widely separated in one half of the picture than in the other. But M. Becquerel is under a misapprehension on this point. Paradoxical as it may appear at first sight, no such break ought to appear, and the photographic result is quite in accordance with the theory that the « particles lose speed as they pass through matter. In order that this may be clear, it is necessary first to consider the order of the deflections of the a rays in the mag- netic field, on the various theories that have been proposed. Suppose that an «a particle is pro- jected from O in the direction O N, with NAA velocity v,, and that the action of a field H causes it to describe the curved path O A. In the first place, let the velocity be constant throughout, and the path be therefore circular, as M. Becquerel sup- poses. Then, since the curvature is small, A N=a’?/2p where A N=a and p is the radius of curvature. He MV, ede . ae 2 In the second place let the velocity a diminish as the distance from O in- Rigel creases ; and let us take the extreme case, where the velocity vanishes at a distance a from O. Let the path in this case be OA’. It does not make very much difference what law of diminution of velocity we adopt: let us suppose, as my experimental results seem to indicate, that the particle spends its energy at a rate which is inversely proportional to the square of its speed. In this case: dv : $m — =kv~™, s being measured from 0, ds and therefore v* oa (a—s) 4 ee. sonthahe a9 = ° v4 ce) a 12 dp Thus p= > (1 is ae He a and we obtain easily that, if p=ds/dy, 4 8\i) He eee ==) i 3 | a} \mvu, Now, provided that [yas is small, this quantity is very nearly equal to A’N, the total deflection of the ray. But this integral ue 3 He a = f1-(1-2)i fa 0 3 a Me, and this quantity is very small, since it is only slightly greater than A N. Finally then we have that A'N/AN=8/7. It is easily found that if we had supposed the a particle to spend its energy uniformly along its path, we should have obtained the result: —A'’N/AN=4/3. It will thus be clear that, on any reasonable hypothesis as to the particular law of diminution of velocity, the actual path of the particle differs very little from a circle. In the extreme case which I have considered, the small deviation therefrom at the end of the path is small compared to the widths of the images in M. Becquerel’s photograph. If the particle ceases to ionise whilst its velocity is still great, as has been shown by Professor Rutherford, the variation is still less. Let us now consider the circumstances of M. Becquerel’s experiment. As a first approximation, suppose the widths of the groove containing the radium salt and of the slit to be negligible. If no magnetic field is acting, all the a particles move in the vertical line O N. The range of the particles from RaC is very nearly 7°0 cm.: from which it follows that the number 13 which pass any given point P is propor- tional to the defect of O P from 7°0 cm., or in other words that the number 7 N A which end their flight on any unit of length of O N isa constant. The other three groups of a particles have, as their furthest distances of penetration, 4°8, 4-2, and 3°5 cm. respectively. Thus, between 4°8 and 4°2 2n a particles end Bi nh Fic their flight on each unit of length, be- tween 4°2 and 3°5 the number is 37”, and from that point up to the radium 47. The radium salt is supposed to be deep enough to supply all these, 7.¢., its depth is taken to be at least (002 cm. Suppose now a powerful magnetic field to be brought into play, the direction of the lines of force being normal to the plane of the paper. The paths of the a par- ticles are curved to one side, and the curvature is greater the nearer the particle is to the end of its course. Let O O A and O Q represent two such paths. Their separation from each other is con- high siderably exaggerated in the figure. If all the paths were drawn the locus of Q would be seen to be a curve, whose curvature in contrast to that of the path of any one particle would be greater the further the distance from A. This is in agreement with M. Becquerel’s experiments, as I have previously pointed out.* The width of the trace upon the paper of all the paths of the a particles is very small, and is almost too fine to be shown on a diagram. It is perhaps well to point out that there is no break in this trace at the critical points 4°8, 4:2, and 3°5. It is quite smooth from end to end. These points mark the extreme distance to which various bundles of « rays penetrate; but the deflection of an a ray which ends its course at a given point is independent of the particular radioactive material from which it has come; the only varying characteristic of an a particle is its velocity. We must now take into account that the widths of the slit and the groove are not negligible, as is clearly to be seen from the ppeecanaen under consideration. There is = “Phil, aes es ee 1904, Dp. 737. eee es u. Elektr., 1905, p. 14, 14 consequently, so to speak, a large penumbra. Thus the trace upon the plane of the paper of all the = rays is such as is represented in Fig. 3, the deflections being all exag- gerated so as to be capable of depiction. Now suppose an aluminium plate is placed, as in M. Bec- querel’s experiment, over the slit, so that the a particles have to pass through it on the way to the photo- graphic plate. M. Becquerel sup- poses that there ought therefore to be an increased displacement of the photographic image. But this is not so. The path of any one a particle is slightly deflected, but the whole trace is not appreciably disturbed. The aluminium dimin- ishes the range of every «a particle by the same amount, but the only result is to cut off all the rays which would have gone past a certain point, say Q, and to cause them to take the places of those rays which Figane fell short of Q; these latter being further shortened. This does not in the least affect the posi- tion of the outer edge of the trace upon the photographic plate; and though there must be a slight movement of the inner edge, so that the trace is somewhat narrower, the change is so small that it could not possibly be detected, as a glance at the photograph will show. Magnetic dispersion of the a rays does exist: it has been directly shown by Rutherford,* and, as I think, indirectly by M. Becquerel’s own experiments, in the peculiarities of the curvature of his photographic traces. But it could not be shown in the man- ner of the experiment which M. Becquerel now describes. That would be analogous to the search for evidence of the motion of the stars in the line of sight in the displacement of the visible spectrum as a whole, whereas the measurement to be made is of the displacement of some Fraunhofer line in the spectrum, 7.¢., of one set of waves which can be isolated for consideration. It is here that Rutherford’s experiment is differentiated from that of M. Becquerel. The former em- ployed as a source of rays a wire coated with a thin layer of RaC emitting « particles of uniform velocity, which is analogous to confining one’s attention in the star problem to * Also quite recently by Mackenzie, ‘Phil. Mag.’? November, 15 waves of one length. Moreover, Rutherford passed his «a particles for some considerable distance through a vacuum whilst yet under the influence of the magnetic field. Thus the evidence of the increase of curvature in their paths, originally caused by the loss of velocity in penetrating matter, was accumulated. But if, as in M. Becquerel’s experiment, the path is in the air, then any appreciable increase of curva- ture closely precedes the cessation of all evidence of motion, and the result must be in any case almost beyond detection. M. Becquerel remarks that there is no evidence in his photographs of the greater precision of the outer line of the trace, which I had anticipated. But the photograph which he now publishes shows that there is too much penumbra for such an effect to be visible. THE POSITIVE CHARGE OF THE @ PARTICLE. Considerable discussion has recently taken place as to the mode in which the « particle acquires its positive charge. It has been pointed out more than once that it may be explained as the result of ionisation by collision (Rutherford, address to St. Louis Congress, 1904; Bragg, “Phil. Mag.,” December, 1904), and that the same hypothesis will explain the deposit of the radium emanation on the negative electrode (Bragg and Kleeman, December, 1904). In the case of the emanation, an explanation, which I understand to be similar, has been carefully worked out by Mackower (Phil. Mag.,”’ November, 1905). Rutherford has shown that the a particle is charged at the moment of leaving the radium salt. But I do not think that this result is in any way prejudicial to the collision theory. He evaporated a very weak solution of radium on a plate, and supposed that as a result he had an excessively thin layer, so that the particle made very few collisions before emergence. But when such deposits are examined under a microscope it is seen that the salt is gathered in little heaps, and there is no true layer at all. The bulk of the a particles pass through hundreds of atoms before emergence, and there is ample opportunity for ionisation by collision. We find that the a particle spends energy in causing the expulsion of electrons from the atoms of any gas which it traverses. The tables of stopping powers given above show that the expenditure of energy follows the same law when the atoms are massed in a solid. We conclude that the solid is ionised in the same way as the gas. We should therefore expect to find slow-moving electrons issuing from radium itself, and from both sides of any solid screen through which the particles pass. Surely these are the effects observed by J. J. Thomson, Rutherford, and others. This has already been suggested by Soddy (“Nature,’ March, 1905). 16 THE a PARTICLES OF URANIUM AND THORIUM. By W. H. Brace, M.A., Elder Professor of Mathematics and Physics in the University of Adelaide. [Read April 3, 1906. | This paper is divided into two parts. The first contains a discussion of the magnitude of the ionisation current due to a layer of radio-active material scattered on the floor of an ionisation chamber, and covered by a uniform sheet of metal foil. The result is expressed in a formula which is somewhat complicated in its general form, but is capable of simplifica- tion under suitable conditions. Account is taken of the varia- tion of ionisation with velocity. The second contains an account of experiments which show : — (a) That the values of the current in various cases, cal- culated from the formula, agree very well with the results of observation. (6) That the ranges of the a particles of uranium and thorium are very nearly, perhaps exactly, equal to the range of the a particle of radium. (c) That the rate at which thorium atoms break down is ‘19 of the similar rate for uranium. Part L. The method which was used by Mr. Kleeman and myself in the determination of the ranges of the a particles emitted by radium and its products does not lend itself to the corres- ponding determinations in the cases of uranium and thorium. It is a necessary feature of the method that all a particles except those moving normally to the horizontal layer of radio- active material should be prevented from reaching the ioni- sation chamber, below which the radium is placed. This is done by the use of a bundle of vertical tubes, which stop all a particles other than those moving in the desired direc- tion. But this limitation diminishes very greatly the num- ber of effective a particles, and in the cases of uranium and thorium the effect is reduced below the limits of convenient measurement. ‘This is the case even when a large surface of radio-active material is employed. In order to determine the ranges of uranium and thorium another method must be devised. I have, therefore, calculated the ionisation due to a radio-active layer over which a screen has been placed. The 17 result is a function of the relation of the stopping power of the screen to the range of the particle; so that if experin ent is made the one can be found in terms of the other. The stopping power of the screen may be made the subject of a direct measurement, and so the range of the a particle can be determined. I find it better, however, to compare the range of the uranium or thorium with that of radium, work- ing the experiment by a substitution method; for the range of radium is known with some accuracy, and the method itself is accurate enough when employed in comparing ranges, but a little uncertain in its application to direct determinations, as will be explained later. Experiments of this kind have already been made by several observers, notably by Professor Rutherford and Miss Brooks (“Phil. Mag.,” July, 1900). But at the time when they were made it was beheved that the a rays were ab- sorbed according to an exponential law; it was not known that each a particle possessed a definite range or penetrating power. Consequently the results were not in all cases ex- pressed in such a way as to render them available for the cal- culation of the range. I have, therefore, found it convenient to repeat them. In the following theoretical treatment of the question the following cases are considered : — (a) When the layer of radio-active material is so thick that the a rays from the bottom of it are unable to reach the air above. Such a thickness is of the order ‘002 cm. (6) When the layer is extremely thin. (c) When the layer is thicker than in (0), but not so thick as in (a). (d) When the radio-active material is in the form of small spheres scattered over the floor of the ionisa- tion chamber. The first and second are really special cases of the third. Uranium and thorium are conveniently treated under (a), in- duced activities under (6), and radium under (c). CASE (a). Tonisation produced in air above a thick layer of radio- active material, on which sheets of absorbing material are laid. Let the surface of the radio-active material be of unit area. Let the full range of the a particle be R, and the 18 range lost by passing normally through the absorbing sheet be D. Let the stopping power of the radio-active material per radio-active atom be s. This means that if an a particle passes parallel to the axis along a cylinder containing only as much matter as goes with one radio-active atom of the radio- active material, the loss of range is on the average s times the loss when an average air molecule is substituted for the radio-active matter. The length of the cylinder is, of course, immaterial. The a particles emerging into the air will penetrate to distances depending on the quantity of matter traversed be- fore emerging. Consider, in the first place, all those whose ranges in air after emergence lie between r ana r+dr. These move at various inclinations to the normal to the sur- face of the layer ; the number depends on the inclination, and may be reckoned as follows : — Consider only those whose inclinations to the normal lie between 6 and 6+66. All these come from a layer of a certain thickness at a certain depth below the surface. The depth does not concern us, but the thickness does, for we need to know the number of radio-active atoms in the layer. Let n be the number of radio-active atoms in a c.c. of the material. Let », be the number of molecules in a c.c. of air. The molecules are not uniform, of course, but are averaged for our purpose. Then an a particle loses the same range in traversing a Mo distance 67 in air as in traversing a distance — .or in the radio- ns active material. Hence, if PP’ is the layer in question, 0 the radio-activeatom, OS the course of thie ea, particle, 0" then OQ= and ns 2,07 ON = - Cos @ Vs This last expression is also the volume of the layer from which the aparticles come, since we are considering unit area of the material ; and therefore the ; : sy ap a. M_ON COLO number of radio-active atoms in it is -° —- 8 Lt Let each molecule emit Na particles per second. JW is a very small fraction. Then the number emitted by each particle between the inclinations 6 and 6 + 66 is 27 sin 666 _ Nsin 606 ; 4a 2 Hence, finally, the number of a particles whose ranges in air after emergence lie between r and r+6r, and which have inclinations to the normal varying from 6 to 6+ 944, is N sin On, cos 66766 a aan Bt The limits of 6 are O, and such a value of 6 that the a particles which come from the very surface of the radio-active material and move at this inclination to the normal have a range 7 in the air after penetrating the absorbing sheet. This value of 6 is given by the equation D sec6+r=R. Integrating between these limits we find that the total number of a particles whose ranges lie between 7 and r+ 6r Each of these moves over a range 7 in air. If, as a first approxi- mation, 1t be supposed that in doing so it makes /r ions, then we find that the whole ionisation (7) is obtained by integrat- ing this expression with respect to r, having inserted the fac- tor /r, between the limits R—D and O. The result is ys ee D) (R—8D) + 2 D' log =| 8s 5 D| If 7=the ionisation when D=O, then Nin, l= W (re 8s soa D ; 3D 2D" R = — — + — eo, — a R R R eT From this formula a curve may be plotted showing the relation between-7/Z and D/R. This result is obtained on the assumption that the ionisation caused by the a particle is proportional to the distance traversed, in other words that the ionisation is independent of the particle’s velocity. This is not actually the case. I have shown (‘“ Phil. Mag.,” Noy., 1905) that the ionisation is inversely proportional to the square of the velocity. Assuming, therefore, that the ionisation Hence 20 produced is proportional to the energy expended, we may say that de=kér/e, where e is the energy possessed by the particle and & is a constant. Hence ¢ is proportional to V (r + d), where d is also a constant. In the paper referred to I have shown that | d =1:33cm. Thus the ionisation produced by the a particle in traversing the last r cm. of its course may be put equal to L(V (r + d) — Vr) * where / is a constant and d=1°33. Hence the whole ionisation due to such particles as have ranges between r and 7 + dr is equal to (1 = ah (r+d) — vr) 6r 48 (&—r)? This must be integrated between the limits of # —D and O. The final result is SR Ds ae a Rd De ee Win 80. on mis pathy eto, al : VR { V(R+a) + ¥(R+d-D)} DDL AG) es Fy Re Me 2 EG ee =e Wah oo VD 1¢ V (Bid) 7 a)} The value of Z, the current when the material is un- covered, is obtained by ais D=O0O. This gives Asl Nin, The value of 7/Z is therefore no longer a function of D/R merely, as in the simpler formula found for the case when the variation of ionisation with speed is neglected. Consequently the curves for various values of £# are not all of the same form. It appears on trial, however, and it might reasonably have been expected, that the form of the curve is altered but little, even when £ is altered considerably. Curve A was plotted for the case &=3, and serves very well in the cases of uran- ium and thorium. It lies very close, as can be found on trial, to the curve obtained from the simpler formula of the case when the variation of ionisation with velocity is neglected. 9 =,(R +d)" aa 7 RWe * Even if there be errors in the theory which leads to this formula, the present argument is not injured, for the formula correctly represents the actual facts. 21 The following co-ordinates have been used in drawing the curve :— D/R -067 -110 -167 :250 -333 -443 568 -667 °833 i/I “773 -657 -532 -378 -262 148 -069 030 -010 Za Ez Ordinatles =+/J ae Absciss CASE (0). Thin layer of radio-active material. The limits for 6 are now 6, and 6, where D sec 6,+7=R, and (D+ D’) sec 6,4 7r=R. D’ being the air equivalent: of the layer of radio-active material. Hence, the total number of particles whose ranges lie between r and r+dr,is Nn, [ D+D"\? D ae Nn, DD or As | (=) ~~ \R-r Sie. (Rr) where D” is neglected. 22 In this case we find that the whole ionisation (7) is given by 281 Win,D’ p vB V(R+a)+y(R+d- Dy} R+d—D)—,/(d) - —=—~log. be ag V(B+d)~ VD WR+a)+ va } and the ionisation due too the uncovered material by Bs —=,/(R+d)—- vd. vom If we had supposed the ionisation to be independent of the velocity, we should have obtained the result yf Mle a Z = i Rin R In this case the effect of neglecting the variation of ionisation with velocity is more serious. For instance, if in the simpler formula we put D/H="25, we find that 7/Z7="40; whereas, if we use the fuller formula, and put D="75, R=3, we find that 7/7=°448. These formule are applicable to measurements of the range due to induced activity, since it is to be supposed that the active deposit is extremely thin. Curve B is plotted from the fuller formula of the two, for the casein which R=7. As usual, d is put equal to 1°33. The following co-ordinates have been used in drawing the curve :— D/R :061 :124 :250 :357 500 -690 -833 je) 80 (“Ol e467 330m Los Onis 02 CASE (c). Moderately thin layer of radio-active material. Let the air equivalent of the thickness of the material be D’. This must be considered in two parts. (i.) Where r is such that D+ D’+~,r is less than R, the 1D + D' rT WwW limits of Oare cos ———— and cos ——-; and the limits of r Rk-r R-r are R— D—D’' and zero. 23 (ii.) Where r is such that D+)'+r is greater than R, the = limits of 6 are cos and zero, and the limits of r are R — D —7 and fp — 1D) — ip. Hence : R=D DS NE Asa -| (1 -( =) | Yorba) vabar Nin, Jr_p—p'l R—r) J t Re DAD a ' ‘| Gy anc (= {Satay vyalar 0 ( aad ne ( ) 2 ae 2 =e TON = B) aah Dies a) 22Diajd ED Rd) Da i Rd =) iD) Vis V(D+D){W(R+d)+V(R+d—D)} —-— log. TAR+a) Di (R+d)+ \R+d—D—D) D?+2DD J Rii(R+4)+-W(R+d—D-D')} ————— og. WR Hd) O10, ( DAID)} R40) te4/a Curve (' is plotted from this formula for the case when R=3'5 and D’'="*5. As usual, d is taken equal to 1°33. The following co-ordinates have been used in drawing the curve :— D/R :057 +143 -200 :257 -380 -500 -714 i/f +833 -642 -539 449 -288 -174 -044 CASE (d). The radio-active material in the forny of small spheres. This case is not realised in any of the experiments des- cribed in this paper, but is introduced in order to show how greatly the effects depend on the mode of arrangement of the radio-active material. Suppose the sphere to be of such a size that its diameter is a few times greater than the range of the a particle in the radio-active material itself. It may then be supposed that the sphere emits equal numbers of a particles in all directions and at all ranges up to the maximum. Neglecting the varia- 24 tion of ionisation with velocity we find that the ionisation is proportional to cos..1 D/R | R—D sec. 6 sin 6. r. dé. dr. O @) D ec, to R?- D+ 2RD log. = TI eM es ie s i1/f=1-—+2— log. —. ue OR OR If D/R="25 then 1/7="'25 nearly. In the case of a thin uniform layer we found above that if D/ #=*25, then 1/Z="40. Thus the effect of a screen in cutting down the ionisation effects depends very much on the mode of disposition of the radio-active material below it. Part II. The apparatus employed was of the usual form, and very similar to that described by Rutherford (“Radio-activity,” 1905, p. 98). As shown in the figure the material was laid on the high potential plate B, at such a distance from the upper plate A that no a particle could reach it. Thus, every a particle ran to its extreme range; and, to make more certain of catching all the ions, the upper plate was extended down- wards at the sides. to Battery 25 Uranium. The uranium was used in the form of the green oxide, U,O,, and was freed for the time from Uranium X. This was not necessary, but convenient, as it diminished the £ ray correction. The uranium was ground to a fine powder, and placed in a shallow depression turned in a metal plate, the diameter of the recess being 3°17 cm. and the depth 1-32 inch, which was far more than enough to make sure that the a rays from the lowest stratum could not get out. The surface of the material was carefully smoothed by the aid of a polished metal plate. A potential of 300 volts was used, which was nearly sufficient to saturate; more was not necessary, as only relative ionisations were in question. Aluminium foil was used as the absorbing layer, the weight and area of each piece being measured so as to obtain the product of the density p and the thickness d. In the following table the first column gives the value of pd of the foil used, and the second the corresponding current, being the mean of five readings of the leak for ten seconds. lik Te III. EN. AG From po of full eee i Ae curve A. range x 10° 0 1044 1-000 a — oi 811 ‘768 ‘O71 448 633 635 Soe) a8) 462 949 494 "456 "205 463 1265 376 "339 a) 460 1620 DATES: 239 roule 458 1930 201 "165 "425 455 2610 oF 062 “580 449 3290 55 O21 ‘718 458 + 2 layers of o4 0 — — tinfoil The last line shows that when two layers of tinfoil were added to the aluminium foil already covering the uranium the leak was reduced to 34. ach layer of foil was equivalent to about 17 mm. of air, and the aluminium to about 21, so that the whole cut off the a rays completely, for their range was known to be not more than 3°5 cm. This leak of 34 was therefore due to £ rays, and the normal leak of the appara- tus. The third column shows the result of subtracting 34 from all the figures of the second column, and reducing to a decimal fraction of I (the maximum current). The num- bers so obtained were then considered as so many ordinates of the thick layer curve A ; and the corresponding abscisse found 26 and placed in the fourth column. It was then possible to obtain from each reading a determination of the pd of that aluminium sheet which the a particles of uranium could just penetrate. For example, the table shows that when pd ='000949, 1/[="456. The abscissa of curve A correspond- ing to this ordinate is ‘205. Consequently the pd of full range is equal to °000949/°205=°00463. The figures in the last column show the result of this calculation in the case of each observation. Their close agreement shows that the ex- perimental results fit accurately a curve derived from the theory given above, and is good evidence of the soundness of the calculation. The mean of the values in the last column is ‘00456. Radium. A very small quantity of radium bromide was dissolved in water and evaporated on a platinum plate. It was then raised to a bright red heat, in order to expel the emanation. Some RaC still remained, but this fell to a negligible value in a few hours, as was shown by the fact that the ionisation current due to the newly prepared layer declined to about half value in that time. It was then re-heated so as to drive off such fresh emanation as had been formed since the pre- vious heating. It has been shown by Kleeman and myself (“Phil. Mag.,” Dec., 1904), that a layer so heated is very nearly free from all the radio-active products of radium. The same aluminium foils were used as in the previous experiment. The results are given in the following table : — I. LL; IIT. INA é From d of full pad x 10 off curve OC pare x 10° 317 "775 O77 412 633 "634 "145 437 949 522 209 453 1265 "430 "270 468 161% "331 "345 468 1933 261 “405 zit 2613 SO) "528 493 3289 "072 "650 507 There is here not quite such good concordance between the figures shown in the last column as there was in the case of uranium. This is not, perhaps, a matter for surprise. As- suming that the theory of Part I. of this paper is correct, then, if the observed results are to fit the calculated curve exactly, the active material under consideration should emit only a particles of one range /7.e., of one velocity on leaving the parent atom, though not, of course, of one velocity on 27 leaving the surface). Although the radium in this case was nearly free from its radio-active descendants, yet a small trace must have remained. The effect would be to make the value of the current a little too large at all times, but especially when the absorbing sheet was so thick as to stop almost en- tirely thea particles from the radium itself; so that the last readings of the last column would be too high, which is the case. A more important explanation of the want of concord- ance of the first and last results with the rest seems to be that for some reason the first layers of aluminium foil which are laid over the material cut down the radiation more than they ought to do. This may in part at least be a consequence of the experimental arrangements. The aluminium foil cannot be made to lie very flat on the surface of the material, on account of its flimsy nature, and must have a little air space underneath it. Now, the air next the material is the seat of a relatively large amount of ionisation. Thus, the first layer may have an exaggerated importance. Another partial cause may arise from the fact that the first layer or two must cut off the easily absorbed radiation from the radio- active surface which has been shown to exist by J. J. Thom- son and by Rutherford. I am not aware of any measure- ment of the amount of ionisation due to this radiation. If in this experiment only 4 per cent. of the whole ionisation current, when the material is uncovered, is supposed due to this cause; and if the foil whose pd ='000317 cuts off three- quarters of it, and the next addition of foil the remainder, then the figures in the last column become, in order, 488, 487, 487, 496, 486, 490, 502,514. Thus the existence of a small quantity of radiation of this kind would explain the present discrepancies in the experiment. It will be seen later that a similar effect occurs with thorium. It is not so notice- able in the uranium experiment, as will be found on turning back to the table of results. Still, the first result is rather smaller than those which follow, and a separate measurement made with a very thin layer for which pd ="000133 gave a value for the full range equal to ‘00426, which is much smaller than the rest. It should be mentioned that the first and last readings are more liable to error than the others, since the ends of the curve are used in obtaining them. On the whole, therefore, the radium measurements are liable to certain small errors whose magnitude can hardly be estimated as yet. But they are small, and they tend to bal- ance each other, so that for our present purpose we may safely assume the mean of the results of the last column, viz., "00466, to be the pd of that sheet of aluminium, which can 28 just be penetrated by the a particle of radium. If there are errors of experiment other than those discussed above they are common to the experiments with uranium and thorium, and disappear when comparison is made. Rad. A smal] piece of copper foil was rendered active by ex- posure at a negative potential to the emanation from one or two mmg. of radium bromide. Tinfoil was used as the ab- sorbing layer. There was a special difficulty in the experi- ment due to the decay of the active matter. This was over- come by taking measurements of the current with the RaC uncovered before and after each measurement when foil was placed over the radiating material. The observations were equally spaced in point of time, so that the geometric mean of the two former measurements could be matched against the latter. The results are shown in the following table: — I. II. ITT. EVE pd in Sn WI From pd of full FOU. SMO" a Curve B range x 10* ATT "518 WATE 220 960 "235 459 209 1440 "072 "700 206 Thus the a particles from RaC can just penetrate a sheet of tinfoil whose pd = ‘0212. A separate experiment by the method employed by Kleeman and myself (“Phil. Mag.,” Sept., 1905), showed that this was equivalent to 7:4 cm. of air. The actual range is 7°1 (loc. cit.), so that the agreement can be considered satisfactory. Thorium. The material was used in the form of thorium oxide, which had been freed as far as possible from other radio-active substances by means of the processes described by Rutherford and Soddy. The _ treatment employed, which included heating to a bright red heat as the final stage, was judged to have been successful for the fol- lowing reasons:—TIn the first place, the recovery of activity was not marked by an initial drop, so far as could be ob- served ; in the second, the ionisation current rose at a rate which showed that it would be halfway to the final value in four days, the final value being about four times the initial. In the third place, no emanation came off the material when first prepared ; even when no draught was employed the read- ings did not alter in 15 minutes; and, in the fourth place, the observed results fitted closely to the calculated curves, showing only a slight variation, as in the case of the radium. 29 The results of one experiment are shown in the following table : — BE. ER PNT; IV. pd of iT From Curve pd of full Al. foit,.x,. 10° ! A range x 10% 244 "813 ‘055 444 474 "670 108 439 780 "b44 "162 480 1061 "412 "227 468 1573 aed "328 480 2073 ohT3 Aly 499 2607 “106 504 517 The mean of the figures in the last column is ‘00477. In another experiment the thorium was precipitated twice at intervals of two days, and then five times at intervals of twelve hours. The results were as follows : — ds, Tf. BEL: IV pd of Ae From Curve pd of full AL fol “x*1:0° A range x 10° 534 "655 114 470 1046 "425 221 473 1633 "248 "347 471 2133 154 "438 486 In this case the mean of the figures in the last column 1s "00475. As in the case of radium, this result is probably a little too high, as it is impossible to get rid of all the radio- active products of thorium, and all these have ranges higher than thorium itself. For Rutherford has shown that the a particle of the induced activity of thorium has the same pene- trating power as the a particle of the induced activity of radium, and some rough experiments which I have made with Th.X. go to show that, as in the case of Ra, the second and third active products have ranges intermediate between the first and fourth. *It may also be calculated from an experi- ment of Rutherford’s (‘‘Radio-activity,” 2nd Ed., p. 263), that the range of the emanation a particle is about 6 cm. ; but it is uncertain how much should be allowed for the stop- ping power of the mica sheet which he used. * Norr.—An experiment by Schmidt (Phys. Zeit. No. 25, p. 897) has shown that RaA has two-thirds of the penetrating power of RaC. Hence its range must be the longer of the two intermediate ranges, determined by Kleeman and myself, viz., 4°83; and the range of the emanation must be 4:23. Thus in the radio-active sequence each explosion is more violent than the last. 30 The general conclusion is, therefore, that uranium, thorium, and radium eject a particles of nearly, if not ex- actly, the same speed. Considering the many parallelisms already known to exist between the processes of disintegration of these substances and their products, this new fact is cer- tainly suggestive. It would be very interesting to know the ranges of Th.X. and Th. emanation.* Relative Activities of Uranium and Thorium. An expression is found in Part I. of this paper for the total ionisation over an uncovered deep layer of active ma- terial. By its aid we may find the relative numbers of a particles emitted by uranium and thorium when the ionisa- tion currents due to known areas of the layers have been measured. Since the ranges are so nearly alike, it is sufficient to use the simpler formula :-— Nin, = 8s I= R* If, now, the suffixes U and T refer to uranium and thorium, we have vhs We Tes.. fee eee and therefore Ny Nod eS Weak LeReect Each time that a thorium experiment was completed a compari- T son was made of the currents J, and /,. In the first case — U was found to be :234 ; in the second -234. ee RZ) a8 may be seen from the results given above can Ay 9 456\° be taken as equal to (—) = 916. 47 * Experiments just completed go to show that the particle from Th.B. is rather more penetrating than that from RaC; and that the particle from Th Em. has a range of about three fourths of that from Th.B. It is already known that the range of the particle from RaA is ‘68 of that from RaC. (April 4, 1906.) Si Vv 23242 /16 23°2 Also —= =-—— Ss; “(239 +4 /16 26:2 assuming the square root law (Bragg & Kleeman, ‘“ Phil. Mag., September, 1905) to hold for uranium and thorium. ”» Hence, finally, bo 3° ='234 x°916 x — - 26°: This result may be a little toc small, since the range of the a particle of thorium may be slightly over-estimated. The square of the range enters into the formula of compari- son, but on the other hand any a rays of long range which have not been removed from the thorium would make I, too large. On the whole, therefore, the actual value cannot be far from °20, 7.e., the uranium atoms break down very nearly five times as fast as the thorium. I have preferred to make the method one of comparison of ranges rather than of absolute determination. For there are two or three difficulties in using it for the latter purpose. In the first place, as already said, it is not easy to make the thin aluminium leaf lie very close to the radiating surface, and the layers of air close to the surface contribute a rela- tively large number of ions. To make this error uniform I have used a net of very fine wires, with a mesh of 2 of an inch, to keep the foils down. The net was, of course, placed over the bare surface also, when I was measured. Again, there is a disturbing effect due to the secondary ionisation of the absorbing sheet. Mme. Curie has called attention to effects of this kind (Rutherford, “Radio-activity,” 1905, p. 189). I find that there is slightly more ionisation when, of the two layers of foil, Al. and Sn., the latter is on top. Using tin- foil, the range always comes out rather larger than when aluminium foil is employed: e.g., the range of RaC when tinfoil was used was found to be 7°4 em., and when aluminium foil was used 6°5 cm. The range of Ra, as found by the aid of aluminium foil, was 3°26, which is half the range of RaC, as it should be. I had no tinfoil thin enough to give an accurate measurement of the range of the a particle of Ra. Both measurements with aluminium foil are too low, and the one with tinfoil is too high. The tinfoil lies flatter on the surface than the aluminium, which may help to explain the difference, but it seems more probable that it is mainly due to the secondary ionisation. One other difficulty lies in the way of an accurate deter- mination of the range in air by this method. As has already been mentioned by Kleeman and mvself (“Phil. Mag.,” Sept., bo — pou: | = bk 32 1905), the loss of range of the a particle of RaC in going through a given sheet of material appears to be slightly greater than the loss of range of an a particle of RaA, and it is not yet quite clear whether this difference is real or appa- rent. The difficulties which have just been mentioned occur only in the absolute determination of air ranges, and do not affect the accuracy of the comparison of the ranges of radium, uranium, and thorium. I owe my grateful thanks to Dr. W. T. Cooke for his have thought it better to allow it to stand without alteration. Notrr.—Since the above was written I have received the February number of “The Philosophical Magazine,” contain- ing an article by Mr. N. F. Campbell on “The Radiation from Ordinary Materials.” In finding the formule necessary to his investigation, Mr. Campbell has covered part of the ground gone over in Part I. of this paper. As the fuller treatment which I have given is required in my own work I have thought it better to allow it to stand without alteration. In a footnote Mr. Campbell expresses his inability to see why I introduced an obliquity factor cos @ into the prelimi- nary calculations of my first paper on the a rays (‘‘Phil. Mag,” Dec., 1904), The mistake is mine. I did not discover it until I had occasion to consider the matter again in con- nection with this present investigation. By omitting the fac- tor, Mr. Campbell has obtained the correct formula for the case which he has investigated. 33 DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN TINEINA. By E. Meyaick, B.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S. [Read April 3, 1906.| Whilst preparing my material for the classification of the Plutellidw, 1 have had occasion to turn out several dark cor- ners of the Tineina, and have investigated the affinities of some neglected or misunderstood genera, besides discovering a few species accidentally overlooked hitherto. The results of this research are embodied in the following paper. XYLORYCTIDA. CHEREUTA, N.g. Head smooth ; tongue developed. Antenne 2-!, in male simple or minutely ciliated, basal joint moderate, without pecten. Labial palpi very long, recurved, second joint thick- ened with appressed scales, terminal joint as long as or longer than second, slender, acute. Maxillary palpi obsolete. Pos- terior tibia smooth, with expansible whorls of rough scales at origin of spurs. Forewings with lb furcate, 2 from ¢. 7 to costa or apex, 8 absent, 11 from middle. Hindwings some- what over 1, trapezoidal, apex obtuse, termen sinuate, cilia -* ; 3 and 4 connate, 5 parallel, 6 and 7 connate or stalked, 8 anastomosing with upper margin of cell towards base. Type C. tenthalea. Allied to Catoryctis, from which it differs especially by the structure of vein 8 of hindwings. The species are relatively small dark insects, with a tendency to metallic colouring. Chereuta tinthalea, n. sp. Male, female, 12-13 mm. Head and thorax blackish, with a few white scales. Palpi black, basal joint white, second joint white except base and apex, terminal joint sprinkled with white. Antennz blackish. Abdomen dark fuscous, segmental margins white. Forewings elongate-oblong, costa gently arched, apex obtuse, termen slightly sinuate or nearly straight, somewhat oblique; dark fuscous, coarsely irrorated with black, and more _ irregularly with white; the white scales appear to form an irregular line from costa beyond 3 to tornus, and a terminal series of dots, but no other defined markings: cilia metallic purplish-bronze. Hindwings with 6 and 7 connate: dark bronzy-fuscous; cilia fuscous, with dark fuscous basal line. © 34 Sydney and Shoalhaven, New South Wales, in October and January; two specimens. Characterized by the strong white irroration and metallic cilia. Chereuta anthracistis, n. sp. Male, 10 mm. Head and thorax dark metallic purplish- leaden-grey. Palpi dark bronzy-fuscous, towards base whit- ish. Antennz dark fuscous, simple. Abdomen dark bronzy- fuscous, lateral margins spotted with white. Forewings elon- gate, costa gently arched, apex obtuse, termen rather obliquely rounded ; dark bronzy-fuscous with coppery reflections, with a few scattered white scales: cilia dark fuscous. Hindwings with 6 and 7 connate ; dark bronzy-fuscous ; cilia dark fuscous, basal third blackish-fuscous. York, West Australia, in November ; one specimen. Chereuta chalcistis, n. sp. Male, female, 13-16 mm. Head and thorax metallic bronzy-grey, side-tufts yellowish. Palpi bronzy-grey, towards base whitish. Antenne dark fuscous, in male minutely ciliated. Abdomen bronzy-fuscous, segmental margins broadly whitish. Forewings elongate, costa gently arched, apex ob- tuse, termen hardly rounded, oblique; fuscous, irrorated with dark fuscous and mixed with yellowish-brown ; stigmata very obscurely indicated with dark fuscous scales, plical somewhat beyond first discal: cilia fuscous. Hindwings with 6 and 7 stalked; dark fuscous, darkest towards apex; cilia fuscous, with dark fuscous basal shade. Albany, West Australia, in December ; two specimens. GCOPHORID Zi. IT now divide this family into two main groups, viz., (A) having antenne of male moderately or strongly ciliated (1 or more); and (Bj having antenne of male simple, or at most minutely ciliated (not over 4). This second group is that which I formerly separated as a distinct family (Depres- sariade); it is rather numerously represented in the Indian region, and I am now better acquainted with its extent. It is a natural assemblage, and I find some genera are referable to it, which I had placed elsewhere, notably Hwpselia and Thudaca. The three genera, Hupselia, Thudaca, and Dolero- mima, though by no means very closely related together, agree in the possession of a very singular form of pupa—naked, angular, and seated erect upon the truncate tail, imitating a leaf—and it is therefore probable that some other genera of the group will be found to show the same character, which will be of interest as an indication of affinity. 35 A general classification of the family may be expressed by the following table, but the characters are not in all cases absolute : — A. Gcophorine. Antenne of male ciliated (1 or more). 1. Geophorides. Vein 7 of forewings to costa. 2. Hulechriades. i * ” apex. 3. Philobotides. 3 hs af termen. B. Depressariane. Antenne of male simple or minutely ciliated (4). 1. Depressariades. Antennze shorter than forewings. 2. Carcinides. Antenne: as long as forewings. The following is an ordered list of the Australian genera referable to the Depressariane : 1. Depressariades. Enchocrates, Meyr. Machetis, Meyr. Pedois, Turn. Sphyrelata, Meyr. Doleromima, Meyr. Kupselia, Meyr. Binsitta, Walk. Kutorna, Meyr. Ceratophysetis, Meyr. Heterobathra, Low. Ethmia, Hb. Heterochyta, Meyr. > areas. Acolasta, Mevr. Leptosaces, Meyr. Bida, Walk. Thudaca, Walk. Pholeutis, Meyr. Octasphales, Meyr. Peritorneuta, Turn. Scorplopsis, Turn. MacrosBaTHra, Meyr. Macrobathra hexadyas, n. sp. Male, 12 mm. Head white, with three dark fuscous dots on forehead, and one on each side of crown. Palpi white, second joint with base and a subapical ring dark fuscous, ter- minal joint dark fuscous, with apex and a subbasal ring white. Antenne ochreous-whitish ringed with dark fuscous. Thorax white, irregularly irrorated with dark fuscous. Abdomen fuscous. Forewings dark fuscous irrorated with white; mark- ings ochreous-whitish ; a moderate fascia from + of costa to 4 of dorsum, angulated and partially interrupted in middle; an oblique spot from middle of costa, and a triangular spot on dorsum before tornus, separated by cloudy, round, dark fus- cous spot ; a spot on costa at $, and a similar one opposite it on termen: cilia fuscous, ochreous-whitish opposite costal spot, and on a large terminal patch. Hindwings grey, darker towards apex; cilia light ochreous-grey. Rosewood, Queensland, in September; one specimen. Quite distinct from any other; the form of the first fascia is a marked character. BorKHAUSENIA, Hb. Borkhausema capnodyta, un. sp. Female, 12-13 mm. Head whitish-ochreous, crown irro- rated with dark fuscous. Palpi whitish-ochreous, terminal c2 36 joint and lower half of second irrorated with blackish. An- tennz fuscous. Thorax fuscous, irrorated with blackish, api- cal half of patagia whitish-ochreous. Abdomen pale greyish- ochreous, sprinkled with fuscous. Forewings elongate, nar- row, costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen extremely obliquely rounded ; fuscous, irrorated with blackish ; extreme base whitish-ochreous; stigmata large, round, cloudy, black- ish, plical shghtly beyond first discal, an additional similar spot on tornus; a suffused whitish-ochreous spot on costa at %, followed by some blackish suffusion: cilia pale fuscous, irro- rated with blackish towards base. Hindwings grey, paler towards base; cilia whitish-fuscous. Duaringa and Brisbane, Queensland, in September : two specimens. Not very near any other ; might perhaps be placed next B. epimicta. Borkhausenia asparta, a. sp. Male, 11-13 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax white, sprinkled with pale fuscous. Antenne white, ringed with dark fuscous. Abdomen pale fuscous. Forewings elongate, rather narrow, costa moderately arched, apex acute, termen slightly sinuate, extremely oblique; white, costal and dorsal areas irrorated with fuscous, leaving an irregular, broad, clear, central streak ; two blackish dots beneath costa towards base, two transversely placed beneath costa before 4, one beneath middle of disc, one towards costa at 5, and one in disc at #: cilia whitish. Hindwings pale grey; cilia ochreous-whitish. Sydney, New South Wales: Albany, West Australia: in September and October, two specimens. Alled to B. lagara. KuLecHrRia, Meyr. Hulechria textilis, n. sp. Male, female, 13-17 mm. Head and thorax white, irro- rated with dark fuscous. Palpi white, second joint with lower half and a subapical ring irrorated with dark fuscous, termi- nal joint more or less widely irrorated with dark fuscous towards base and apex. Antennz white, more or less suffusedly ringed with dark fuscous. Abdomen grey. Forewings elongate, narrow, costa gently arched, apex obtuse, termen very obliquely rounded; white, irrorated with dark fuscous, tending to form longitudinal streaks; a blackish subcostal dash from base of costa, stig- mata blackish, linear, plical obliquely beyond first discal, usually discal stigmata connected or absorbed by a fine black- ish line, and a similar line along fold from base to plical stigma: some undefined dark fuscous marks before termen and apical portion of costa: cilia whitish, with two distinct 37 lines of dark fuscous irroration. Hindwings with 3 and 4 often stalked or even sometimes coincident, 5 approximated at base to 4 or even connate; grey, hghter towards base; cilia light grey. Sydney, Bathurst, Murrurundi, and Glen Innes (4,500 feet), New South Wales; Campbelltown, Tasmania; in No- vember and December, ten specimens. This obscure, narrow- winged species of the s¢ece//a group 1s curious on account of the variable neuration of hindwings: but since some specimens are quite normal, it cannot be generically separated, and the resulting enlargement of characters does not affect my tabula- tion or render the genus less distinct. PTocHoSaRIS, 0. g. Head with loosely appressed hairs; tongue developed. Antenne #, in male moderately ciliated (1), basal joint mode- rate, without pecten. Labial palpi moderately long, slightly curved, subascending, second joint with loose, rough, project- ing tuft of scales towards apex beneath, terminal joint less than half second, slender, acute. Posterior tibize clothed with long hairs above. Forewings with 2 from angle, abruptly curved, 3 absent, 4 approximated, 7 and 8 stalked, 7 to ter- men, 11 from middle. Hindwings 3, ovate-lanceolate, cilia 2 ; 4 absent, 5 somewhat approximated to 3, 6 and 7 parallel. Allied to Saropla, of which it is a degraded development, with similar palpi, but differing in the reduced neuration, and absence of basal pecten of antenne. Ptochosaris horrenda, un. sp. Male, 10-11 mm. Head, palpi, antennz, thorax, and abdomen fuscous, mixed with whitish. | Forewings broad- lanceolate, acute; fuscous mixed with whitish. Hindwings erey. Blackheath, New South Wales; Mount Lofty, South Aus- tralia ; in October, two specimens. This is a most obscure and insignificant-looking insect. A#oLocosma, Meyr. This genus must certainly be transferred to the Wcopho- ridw, and will equally certainly be placed amongst the Philo- botides, but its exact position in that group is not so obvious. On a strict interpretation of structure, it appears to be nearest to Oxythecta, and it may be placed in the neighbourhood of that genus until more profound research or the discovery of new material discloses its true affinity. To the two species originally described I now add a third, but as it is closely related to one of them it does not help the situation. 38 MHolocosma cyclorantha, n. sp Male, 8-9 mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous more or less mixed with ochreous-whitish. Palpi dark fuscous, second joint mixed with white. Antennz blackish, obscurely spot- ted with white. Abdomen dark grey. Forewings elongate, costa moderately arched, apex round-pointed, termen ex- tremely obliquely rounded; whitish, closely irrorated with dark fuscous, veins posteriorly lined with white; two light orange, dark-edged fascize enclosing a slender, direct, silvery- white median fascia, first narrow, even, second narrow on dor- sum, widened throughout to costa, enclosing silvery-white dis- cal and costal spots; a light orange line along lower part of termen: cilia fuscous, on termen with a strong black basal band, narrowed upwards, enclosing about five silvery-white dots. Hindwings rather dark grey; cilia grey. Albany, West Australia, from September to December ; five specimens. Very similar to A. zridozona, but the pos- terior simple V-shaped fascia of that species is replaced by a more complex marking. KupseELia, Meyr. This genus is distinguished from all others in this group known to me by the unusually short and weak labial palpi; the absence of vein 8 in the forewings is a frequent character in this group, whilst in the other section of the Hcophoride it is exceedingly rare, the single species of Atelosticha being the only known example. Hupselia leweaspis, n. sp. Male, female, 13-16 mm. Head ochreous-yellow, cen- trally whitish-tinged. Palpi whitish-yellow, second joint slightly sprinkled with fuscous. Antenne dark fuscous. Thorax dark fuscous, apical half of patagia and posterior mar- gin ochreous-white. Abdomen fuscous. Forewings elongate, slightly dilated posteriorly, costa moderately arched, apex ob- tuse, termen obliquely rounded; dark fuscous; an ochreous- white patch occupying basal 2 except a costal streak; an ochreous-white fascia beyond middle, on lower half narrowed and bisected by a dark fuscous line or partially obscured with purplish ; on each side of this fascia an obscure deep purple line, becoming obsolete towards costa; terminal area divided into two patches, very finely strigulated with whitish, anterior longitudinally, posterior transversely; a small whitish costal spot before apex, from which a dark fuscous line runs obliquely to termen beneath apex: cilia dark fuscous, round apex with a coppery-purple basal line, beneath apex with a coppery- purple sometimes black-centred basal dot, on lower half of 39 termen with three small round black spots edged anteriorly with whitish and posteriorly with deep purple, separated by black interspaces. Hindwings ochreous-yellow; an irregular dorsal fascia of dark fuscous suffusion ; a variable dark fuscous terminal fascia, sometimes broad at apex, sometimes very nar- row, not reaching tornus; cilia fuscous, with dark fuscous basal line. ; Quorn, South Australia: York, West Australia; in Octo- ber and November; ten specimens. JF. philomorpha, Low., must be near this, but I think distinct if the description 13 accurate; I have not seen a specimen. Hupselia trithrona, n. sp. Female, 15 mm. Head pale ochreous-yellowish. Palpi whitish-yellowish, towards base sprinkled with fuscous. An- tennze dark fuscous. Thorax dark purplish-fuscous, with an- terior and posterior ochreous-whitish spots. | Abdomen fus- cous, mixed with whitish-ochreous. Forewings rather broad, costa rather strongly and unevenly arched, apex obtuse, ter- men nearly straight, rather strongly oblique ; dark purple- Bee use Us | a broad ochreous-white fascia from dorsum about 4, rather narrowed upwards and not reaching costa; a moderate ochreous-white fascia beyond middle, narrowed and rather broadly interrupted in disc: cilia ochreous- whitish, mixed with dark fuscous, with dark fuscous subbasal line (im- perfect). Hindwings light ochreous-yellow; large apical and small tornal patches of dark fuscous suffusion ; cilia fuscous. Sydney, New South Wales, in November: one specimen. In the species of this genus with yellow hindwings the extent of the dark fuscous margin is found to be extremely variable (apparently without reference to sex or locality) wherever sufficient material has been obtained, and it will therefore be reasonable to anticipate similar variability in such species as the present. Hupsehia hypsichora, vn. sp. Male, female, 12-13 mm. JHead and antenne dark fus- cous. Palpi ochreous-whitish, mixed with blackish-fuscous. Thorax dark fuscous, with large ochreous-yellow patches on shoulders. Abdomen dark fuscous at base or sometimes more or less wholly suffused with ochreous-yellow. Forewings rather broad, costa rather strongly and unevenly arched, apex obtuse, termen obliquely rounded; dark fuscous, slightly purplish-tinged ; a broad ochreous-yellow fascia from middle of costa, where it includes a dark fuscous dot, to dorsum, where it extends from 4 to near tornus, narrowed upwards, edges slightly curved inwards: cilia dark fuscous. Hind- wings dark fuscous, basal half sometimes more or less wholly 40 suffused with ochreous-yellow; cilia fuscous, with dark fus- cous basal line. York, West Australia, in November; nine specimens, flying high around HLucalyptus in the afternoon sunshine. A specimen from Victoria, similar but larger (15 mm.), has basal area of forewings suffusedly mixed with yellow-whitish, and a whitish costal mark before apex; I am uncertain whe. ther it 1s a distinct species or only a geographical form, but probably it will prove to be the latter. HBupselia carpocapsella, Walk. Dr. A. J. Turner has satisfactorily ascertained that bea- tella, Walk., is only a synonym of this, the species being vari- able. Bupselia holorantha, Low. I have this species, which is a good and distinct one, from Mount Lofty, South Austraha (Guest), and also from Vic- toria (Raynor). EKvutorna, Meyr. Head with appressed scales, sidetufts projecting over fore- head ; tongue developed. Antenne +, in male serrate, mi- nutely ciliated (4-4), basal joit moderately long, without pecten. Labial palpi long, curved, ascending, second joint thickened with dense appressed scales, sometimes roughly ex- panded towards apex above or with spreading apical tuft be- neath, terminal joint as iong as second or shorter, slender, acute. Forewings with lb simple at base (upper fork obso- lete), 2 from near angle, 6 to apex, 7 and 8 stalked, 7 to costa, 11 from before middle. Hindwings | or almost 1, elon- gate- ovate or br roadly- lanceolate, cilia 134- "2: : 3 and 4 connate or approximated, 5 bent, 6 and 7 parallel, 6 to apex. The variation in the scaling of the palpi of this genus is singular ; I have no doubt that the various forms are all rightly included in the genus, which is well characterised by other structure, and has a peculiar and easily recognised facies; the species are, 1n fact, often so similar that the structure of the palpi affords the readiest: specific distinction. There are two New Zealand species (on which the genus was founded) very similar and closely allied to the INGE but not identical ; and I now add ten Australian species : — 1. Second joint of palpi tufted beneath 2. Second joint of palpi not tufted be- TO AGE. wey aisieroctnu tees RE Pass cere eee 3 2. Forewings with median white streak CONUINUEA: LO APE essere oc cnt ete leptographa. Forewings with median white streak Obs PASS Goss Clowseiy. dh! Ae vdeeeRehes intonsa. 4] 3. Forewings with one or more oblique Streaks. PEOURPCOSUA S50 scan tetamce seen. 4, Forewings without oblique _ costal clack) fos Supow <> OC aE.” ee tas eee anes ape Vinee he 4. Palpi with scales of second joint roughly expanded above ............ 5. Palpi with scales of second joint PUT ERSe tla a toe teny ;\/aper ture, 2°8 mm.; body-whorl, 4°38 mm. Locality of type, St. Wane Gulf, 22 fathoms with 6 other examples, 100 fathoms off Beachport, one broken, 110 fathoms 6, 130 fathoms off Cape Jaffa, 2 broken. Ornament.—The type is white, but a co-type shows a brown tinting of the two carine and of that part of the axial cost connecting them, most marked at the tubercles of junc- tion. This shell is 10°71 mm. long, and shows fifteen spiral liree at the base. Observations._-The living mollusc has not been taken, so the radula and the operculum (if any) are not known. Its generic position is very doubtful, and even its family is ques- tionable. Some conchologists who have seen it refer it with doubt to the Terebridw, and propose the creation of a new genus for its reception. Its infra-sutural_ sulcus, barely thickened at the margin, suggests Plewrotomide, but it is diffi- cult to find a genus for it here. EXPLANATION OF Puate IV. Fig. 1, 2, Operculum of Scala morchi, Angas, » 9 4, 5, ? Terebra dyscritos. » 6, Scala platypleura, n. sp., Verco. vac Vat te. VOW. ND sy ELGG. x pele acanthopleura, n. sp., Verco. jp SOLO envalida, a. “Sp., Verco. » Ll, Cingulina diaphana, n. sp., Verco. 151 MADREPORARIA FROM THE AUSTRALIAN AND NEW ZEALAND COASTS. By Joun Dewnnant, F.G.S. [Read October 2, 1906. ] Prats: V. ann) Vi. The following corals have been submitted to me for de- scription: —From South Australia, by Dr. Jos. Verco and the late Professor Tate; from New South Wales, by Messrs. Hed- ley and Petterd; and from New Zealand by Mr. Henry Suter. They are arranged in 15 species and as many genera. Nine species prove to be new, three were described by Moseley from the “Challenger” dredgings, two are corals described by Ten. Woods from the coast of New South Wales, and one is a varietal form of a tertiary fossil. TURBINOLID A. GENUS FLABELLUM, Lesson. Flabellum australe, Moseley, Report on Corals, 1881, pp. 173-4, pl. vii, figs. 4, 5. This coral was dredged at 120 fathoms off Twofold Bay by the “Challenger” Expedition, when eleven specimens were obtained. Lately it has been dredged in very large numbers 20 miles north-east of Port Jackson, by Messrs. Hedley and Petterd, at a depth of 250 fathoms. It has also been dredged by Dr. Verco at 90, 120, and 130 fathoms off Cape Jaffa, and at 110, 150, and 200 fathoms off Beachport. The specimens are generally of large size, but none reach the dimensions of Moseley’s largest example, viz., 57 mm. high and 65 mm. broad. The largest sent to me is 38 mm. high and 44 mm. broad. Genus SpHENoTRocHUS, Milne-Edwards and Haime. Sphenotrochus emarciatus, Duncan; var. perexigua, ov. A fossil coral from the Australian tertiaries was describ- ed by Duncan in 1865 under the name of Sphenotrochus emar- ciatus.* Two years later this author re-described the same coral, and in exactly the same words, but with a new specific t name, viz., S. ercisus.t As he gave no reason for the change, and L know of none, the older name is here restored. The * Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. xvi., p. 2, pl. viii., fig. 2. + Q.J.G.S., vol. xxvi., p. 298, pl. xix., fig. 86. 152 fossil coral is very abundant in the eocene beds of almost all localities, and is also sparingly found in the Gippsland mio- cene. mm. The three examples from which the description of this species is written were dredged by Messrs. Hedley and Pet- terd at 250 fathoms 20 miles N.E. of Port Jackson. Two much-worn corals, one of which is double the size of those quoted, may possibly represent the same species; these were obtained by Dr. Verco off Cape Jaffa at a depth of 130 fathoms. The present coral differs in many important points from NV. gracilis, its nearest fossil congener. The latter is larger and has a distinctly different columella, while its septa vary more in Size, and are arranged in six well-marked systems. GENUS DENDROPHYLLIA, Milne-Edwards and Haime. Dendrophyllia atrata, spec. nov. Pl. vi., figs. 5a, /. Numerous specimens of this coral have been dredged, and from various stations in St. Vincent’s Gulf, etc., but all at shallow depths. There are a few bush-shaped colonies like the one figured, but several examples are solitary and adher- ent to shells or polyzoal fragments. That the species in- creases by budding is, however, demonstrated by the compo- site clumps, the gemmation being both lateral and subbasal. As a rule, the solitary individuals are small, and they pro- bably represent buds which have become detached from the a2 164 parent corallum or clump. In the latter the separate cor- rallites rise at various angles from the base or parent coral- lum, and are short and cylindrical. A much-worn corallum bears several lateral buds which arise at right angles to its side, and in the case of one of them quite close to the calicular mar- gin. Another specimen consists of two low corallites placed at an angle of 45°, and arising from a common basal expan- sion. A third interesting example is formed of a _ large individual adherent to a shell fragment with a smaller one growing from it close to its base, and at a similar angle to the last. A distinctly porous ccenenchyma is. visible at the base of many of the specimens. Broad, equal coste stand out prominently on the wall of the corallites, especially close to the calices, but the basal expansion and also the lower part of the corallites become covered with a fine but granular epitheca. The costz them- selves are markedly granular; in the narrow spaces between them the wall is very thin and porous. Exteriorly the corallites are light-coloured, but the in- terior of the calices is almost invariably dark-brown or almost black. On the type mass all the calices are dark-coloured, and, being very deep, are somewhat difficult to read, but a drawing is given of the calice of a perfect but solitary speci- men which happens to be light in colour. The septa are in six systems with four cycles. The primaries are free, the secondaries are joined by the tertiaries not far from the columella, and the quaternaries again unite with the tertiaries nearer the wall; there are thus six well- marked deltoid combinations in the calice. Adult specimens usually have the systems complete, but in younger calices the quaternaries are not fully developed. Thus the figured calice, which is perhaps not quite adult, has three systems complete and three incomplete ; in the latter the quarternaries are want- ing in one half of each system. The primaries are stout and the remaining septa diminish slightly in size according to or- der. All the septa are strongly spined, and so deeply den- tated as to be superficially divided into a series of longitudin- al segments. At the bottom of the fossa a considerable space is occupied by the columella, which consists of many papilli resembling in shape the inner ends of the dentate septa. The bush-shaped colony figured, which is the finest speci- men in the collection, has a height of 17 mm. from base to summit; it is 24 mm. long and 15 mm. broad. Its separate corallites have a diameter of 7 mm. and are about 5 mm. high. The calice chosen for illustration has a diameter of 5°5 mm.; its corallum is 3 mm. high. 165 The specimens were dredged in St. Vincent’s Gulf, Inves- tigator Straits, and Backstairs Passage, at depths ranging from 14 to 22 fathoms. Tv EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Plate! We Trematotrochus Hedleyi—a, eorallum, magnified 6 diam. ; b, ealice of another example, magnified 8 diam. Trochocyathus Petterdi—a, corallum, magnified 6 diam. ; b, calice of same, magnified 10 diam. Paracyathus vittatus—a, corallum with portion of shell to which it is attached, magnified 4 diam. ; b, calice of same, magnified 10 diam. Notophyllia recta—a, corallum, magnified 4 diam.; }, calice of another example, magnified 6 diam. 5. Kionotrochus Suteri—a, ecorallum, magnified 6 diam.; 5, calice of same, magnified 8 diam. Plate VI. Ceratotrochus recidivus—a, corallum of a large example attached by its base to a wall fragment, magnified 2 diam. , h, calice of another example of equal size, magnified 4 diam. Ceratotrochus recidivus—Three examples showing develop- ment of coralla, all magnified 2 diam.; a, with base 1m- mersed in the remains of an earlier corallum; 6, with corallum split into 4 portions and calice elongated ; c, two young coralla, joined by their sides, and attached at the base to the same wall fragment. . Homophyllia incrustans—a, calice and portion of shell which it incrusts, magnified 4 diam. : b, portion of calice showing one system of septa, magnified 12 diam. . Caryophyllia planilamellata—a, corallum, magnified 1; diam. ; b, calice of same, magnified 23 diam. . Dendrophyllia atrata—a, corallum, magnified 14 diam.; 5, calice of separate individual, magnified 6 diam. 166 ON THE IONISATION OF VARIOUS GASES BY THE a PARTICLES OF RADIUM.—No. 2. By W. H. Brace, M.A., Elder Professor of Mathematics and Physics ir the University of Adelaide. | Read October 2, 1906.] Prats) V IT. Lntroduction. In a paper with a similar title (Proc. Roy. Soc. of South Australia, vol. xxx., p. 1) I have given a preliminary account of an attempt to determine the relative amounts of ionisation produced in various gases and vapours by the a particle of RaC. The present paper contains an account of the further progress of this work. In the first place I have here discussed the validity and the experimental details of the method used, and have brought forward evidence in favour of the hypothesis that 6, the lonisation produced in consequence of the expenditure of a small quantity of energy de by the a particle, is related to the latter quantity by the equation du=* f(v) de, where f/(v) is a function of the velocity of the particle only, and # a con- stant for each gas. Secondly, I have given the result of the attempts to deter- mine for several gases the constant /, which may be called the specific ionisation of a gas for a radiation, air being taken as the standard. In conclusion I have discussed very briefly the form of the function f/v), and such conclusions as it seems legitimate to draw from the results so far obtained. Amongst these is the following: —The ionisation per molecule (ks, where s is the stopping power) is closely connected to the molecular volume. Sd. The method of this research has already been described briefly in the preliminary paper (/oc cit.). For the sake of clearness, however, and in order to facilitate a discussion of the validity and the experimental details of the method, it will be well to insert a short description here also. A small platinum plate is coated with a very thin layer of radium bromide, and placed below a horizontal ionisation chamber of 3 mm. width, at a distance which can be altered at will. (See pl. vii.) A set of narrow vertical tubes is 167 placed over the radium, and stops all a particles which move in any direction which is not almost vertical. Thus the par- ticles cross the narrow chamber at right angles to its greater dimensions, and all spend 3 mm. of their paths in the air within it. The resulting ionisation being plotted against the distance from the radium to the middle of the chamber, we obtain an “ionisation curve,” as in Fig. 1, where ordinates represent dis- tances and abscisse represent lonisa- tion currents. Each reading of cur- rent is the difference between two others, one measured when a very thin copper screen is placed over the ra- dium, and one when it is not. In this curve the portion 4 / is due to the # rays only, and repre- sents the effect of such f radiation as is intercepted by the screen: the chamber is out of range of a rays. Let HA be produced to meet the axis : of gin D. The portion ABP repre- P EpORD ae tc sents part of the effect of the a Pig. 1. particles from RaC. If no other radio-active substances were present, the curve would show a continuation of the portion BP down to the axis of 7, in some such manner as PC. If the ionisation curve were completed in this way, the area ABPCD would represent the total ionisation due to the a radiation from RaC. If now the air were removed, another gas substituted for it, and the area re-measured, a comparison of the values obtained would give the result which this re- search aims at. We may call it the specific ionisation of the gas. But the complete determination of the boundaries of the area is so long and complicated a process as to render this procedure impracticable. It can, however, be shown that the product of the co-ordinates of a certain point on the curve may be taken as a measure of the area of the curve, provided certain assumptions are made. The point is at the intersec- tion of the top portion of the curve representing the effects of RaA with the side of that showing the effects of RaC. The co-ordinates of this point are comparatively easy to obtain. Now, 1t might appear that it would be better to measure at one time the whole of the ionisation produced by the particle, rather than to determine the ionisation point by point along its path; since, if this were done, it would no longer be necessary either to find the exact form of the ionisa- tion curve, or to depend upon the validity of assumptions. 168 We might spread a layer of radio-active material on the floor of an ionisation chamber, and so arrange the temperature and pressure of the gas in relation to the dimensions of the cham- ber that all the a particles completed their paths within the gas. But the potential gradient required to separate and collect the ions made by the a particle is generally very great. For example, in ethyl chioride at 30 cm. pressure and ordinary temperatures, about 1,000 volts per cm. is desir- able, if saturation is to be certain. With such gas it would be necessary to make the height of the chamber about 4 cm., in order to allow all the a particles to complete their ranges ; even if the radio-active material were uranium or polonium. Thus, a total potential of 4,000 volts would be required, and such large electro-motive forces are out of the question. If the pressure of the gas were lowered, less electric force would be sufficient ; but the paths of the a particles would be longer, the chamber would need to be higher, and the total potential as great as ever. It is absolutely necessary to use a narrow ionisation cham- ber if sufficient electric force is to be obtained without the use of enormous battery power. Clearly it would be no gain to use such a chamber if the radio-active material were spread on one of its walls. For in this case some of the particles would complete their full ranges within it, others only part, and an estimate of the ionisation to be expected would ren- der it necessary to take into account the amount of the range completed by each particle as determined by the nature and physical conditions of the gas and the dimensions of the cham- ber, the reckoning being further complicated by the fact that the ionisation produced by the particle is not constant along its path. It is possible that an experiment might be arranged in which a thin sheet of a radiation entered the chamber through a slit at the side, and spent itself within the cham- ber without touching the walls. It would be necessary to make sure that the same portion of the range was completed within the chamber by the particle, no matter with what gas the chamber was filled. I have not yet tried this plan. It will now be clear, J think, that the method actually * used is not without its advantages. It avoids the use of very high potentials, and does not require lengthy and uncertain calculations. It has also this in its favour, that it gives the range of the particle in the gas, so that it is possible to make a sufficiently accurate estimate of the amount of any air that may be present. The presence of this air can then be allowed for. Let us, therefore, proceed to consider the assumptions and approximations which the method requires. 169 In the first place it is necessary to consider whether any disadvantages are likely to arise from the use of a sheet of gauze as the lower wall of the ionisation chamber. The elec- tric field must be distorted in the neighbourhood of the gauze ; some very small portions of the chamber which are just over the openings in the gauze must be under feeble forces, and the ions made there be separated only when the potential is high. It is easy, however, to show that this effect is negligible by a consideration of the ionisations due to B rays. This ionisation does not show initial recombination, as in the case of the a rays; a fact first demonstrated by R. Kleeman, for- merly of this University. In Fig. 2 are drawn the upper parts of the ionisation curves of ethyl chloride under different potentials. It will be seen that in the portion which repre- CAHEGh Pirre gas 50 vol{fs|to 3mm sents the effects of 6 rays only, saturation is complete when 50 volts are applied to the 3 mm. chamber ; but the ionisation due to a rays is far from being collected completely by ten times that potential. Now, if the field distortion due to the gauze were appreciably effective we should find the @ rays also producing an ionisation which appeared to increase at higher potentials; and there is no trace of any such effect. The same result shows that, although ions are very apt to be drawn through a gauze by a strong field on one side, yet in this case nothing of the sort takes place. To prevent it, a second gauze has keen placed 3 mm. below the first, and earthed, so that there are strong, equally-balanced fields on both sides of the latter. A thin, uniform metal sheet might replace the gauze, but unless it were very thin it would cut off more of the range than can generally be spared; and if it were thin it would be liable to flexure by the powerful electric forces, so that the 170 depth of the ionisation chamber might become indetermi- nate. We must now consider the assumption that the area of the ionisation curve may be represented by the product of the co-ordinates /?/ as already defined. This is really equivalent to the supposition that the ionisation resulting from the ex- penditure of a quantity of energy de by the a particle is equal to kh f(v) de, where f/v) is a function of the velocity of the particle and / is a constant, depending on the nature of the gas molecule. it implies in the first place that the area of the ionisation curve in any gas is not dependent on pres- sure and temperature, and that, if the form of the curve is altered by a variation of these conditions, it is only in so far that all the ordinates are multiplied by some factor, and all the abscisse divided by the same factor. It implies, in the second place, that the ionisation curve of one gas can be made to coincide with the curve of any other gas, by multiplying all the ordinates by some factor, and all the abscisse by some other factor. Let us examine the evidence in favour of these statements. If the hypothesis is true J must be independent of pres- sure and temperature. As regards pressure, some results were quoted in a paper “On the Recombination of [ons in Air and Other Gases,”* which showed this to be correct in the cases of air and ethyl chloride; and further evidence will be found in the results given at the end of this paper. For, without hav- ing made any exhaustive comparison of the values of /?/ at different pressures in each gas, J have often used various pres- sures in the determination of the specific ionisation of a gas; and the general agreement between the results obtained is good evidence that pressure is without effect. In the same way, since many determinations in the case of the same gas have been made at different temperatures, the close agreement shows also that temperature has no influence on the ionisation. More direct confirmation can be obtained from the following results. During a number of the deter- minations of FZ, the ionisation chamber was connected in parallel with a second chamber containing a uranium layer. The ionisation currents acted against each other. Thus the values of the currents in the radium apparatus could be de- termined by balancing against the uranium; the latter was always at the temperature of the room and therefore formied a fixed standard. The extent of the surface of the uranium could be varied by means of a semaphore, having a graduated * Trans, Roy. Soc. 8.A., 1905, p. 187. 171 circle on the same axis. It was then found that although the eI in air appeared to decrease as the temperature of the ra- dium apparatus was raised, yet when the readings were ex- pressed in terms of the uranium scale, the value of RZ was constant. The decline was merely apparent, and due to leak- age through the heated glass insulators. The actual values of RI, were: —- Five determinations, 20° to 60° C.: 320, 326, 318, 314, 314; mean, 319. Five determinations, 60° to 80° C.: 296, 314, 311, 334, 327; mean, 316. The experiments were made at various times, and some of the irregularities are probably due to slight alterations in the amount of RaC present. Furthermore, it has already been shown with respect to ionisation in general that pressure and temperature have no effect (Patterson, Proc. Roy. Soc., 69, p. 277, 1901, and “Phil. Mag.,”’ Aug., 1903). I have thought it well. however, to re- consider the point with special reference to the circumstances of this experiment. It is convenient at this stage to state that temperature does not seem to have much effect on initial recombination. The latter decreases rapidly as pressure is lowered. This has been shown by Kleeman and myself (“On the Recombination of Ions, etc.”). But when the alteration in density occa- sioned by a rise of temperature has been allowed for, there appears to remain only a slight diminution in initial recombi- nation, which can be ascribed to the direct result of the in- crease In temperature. This is shown with some clearness in some experiments which I have made with CO,. They may be tabulated as follows, the ionisation at an electric force of 1,000 volts per cm. being taken as 100: — Ionisation lIonisation Ionisation at at at CO: 1,000 volts 333 volts 166 volts 4 per cm. per cm. per cm. (a) Pressure, 651 mm., 20° C. 100°0 95°0 90°2 (6) Pressure, 760 mm., 72° C. 100°0 96°8 94°0 A repetition of the experiment gave practically the same result. The pressures and temperatures were so arranged that the density was the same in each experiment. I also tried the experiment with ethyl chloride, but the results were not so definite; that is to say, change of tem- perature produced no very obvious effect. 172 It is further assumed that the curves for different gases are of the same form; in other words, that the function /(v) is the same for all gases. A complete test of this hypothesis would require an accu- rate delineation of the ionisation curve in the case of each gas. As has already been said, this would be a difficult task, inclu- sive, indeed, of our present purpose. But a comparison of the curves in different gases, so far as they have been obtained, shows that the principle is at least approximately true. For example, the ratio of the range of RaC to that of RaA is the same in all gases within errors of experiment, and again the ratio of the maximum abscissa of the RaC curve to the abscissa I is also constant, so far as | have measured it. As examples of the constancy of the first of these two ratios, I have at different times found it to be 1°46 in air, 1°47 in pentane, 1°47 in ethyl chloride, 1°44 in carbon dioxide, 1°48 in ethyl alco- hol, and 1°49 in ethylene. The differences here are probably experimental only. As regards the second ratio, I have found it to be 1°36 im air, 1°37 in ether, 1°44 in ethylene, 1°35 and again 1°41 in ethyl chloride. This ratio is much more liable to error than the former; for all ionisations are harder to measure correctly than ranges, and the peak of the ionisation curve is an especially uncertain point. Also there is a special difficulty due to the existence of a peculiar phenomenon, which must now be considered. It is to be observed that the 1onisation curves in different gases will not correspond unless the potential employed is enough to saturate at all points of the path of the a particle. More electric force is required as the particle slows down. This may be deduced from figures given in the paper “On the Recombination of Ions, etc.,” p. 196. It is there stated that the ratio of the saturated ionisation current to that at 25 volts per cm. in the case of the ions made by the a particle of RaC at a distance of 6°25 cm. from its origin was found to be 1°29; whereas, when the distance was reduced to 5°05 cm., it was found to be 1°19. Each of these ratios is the mean of four determinations. (By an arithmetical error, one of the latter is incorrectly given in the paper quoted: 1°23 should be 1°20.) Again, the effect is clearly shown by the curves of Fig. 3, which represent the results of experiments on a mixture of ethyl chloride and air. It will be seen that the curve does not show the characteristic increase of ionisation with distance when the electric force is small, the reason being that it is so much more difficult to collect the ions made by the a particle at the end of its path. A 50 volts to 3mm B 100 " - * € 200 ~ D500 ~ E7oo «= Fig. 3. It is necessary to refer to one more assumption which is made in calculating the results, viz., that the AZ of a mix- ture can be determined from a knowledge of the /Z of each component. For example, it is supposed that, the #/ of air being 100 and of ethyl chloride 132, then the AJ of a mix- ture in such proportions that the a particle spends half its energy 1n each is 116. For I have not been able to prevent the leakage of air into the apparatus when raised above ordinary tempera- tures, and it is necessary to measure and allow for the air present in each experiment. The apparatus holds very well when not heated; but it is sometimes necessary to raise the temperature to 60° or 70° C. in order to obtain a sufficient density of the vapour under treatment. Fortunately, how- ever, the air present may be a considerable fraction of the gas when measured by pressure, and yet be of little 1mport- ance when measured in terms of the energy spent init. Thus the correction for air present is usually quite small, as will be seen from a consideration of the numerical results in § 2. The assumption is by no means an obvious one. If any part of the ionisation in a gas is secondary, and is due to rad1- ation originating in one molecule and acting on a neighbour- ing molecule, it might well be that complications would arise in a mixture of gases. I have made several direct attempts to find whether any such effects existed: the results of some of them are shown in the following tables. Each table refers to a set of experiments carried out consecutively. The per- centage of gas in each mixture is determined from the stop- ping power, and the percentage of energy spent in the gas is then calculated. The value of RZ for the gas is calculated by multiplying the observed value for air by the specific ioni- sation of the gas, as taken from the final tables given at the end of the paper. For example, in the first set, RZ for air is 198°5, and RZ for ethyl chloride is taken to be 189°5 x 1°32 174 =262. The RJ for each mixture is then calculated. In the table the calculated and observed values are put side by side, and it will be seen that there is a good agreement : — 8 & ey Be Ee i Se Ed Cr ee ea Be bie 8S Loe 1 O 100 0) 760 ot 19855 — 2 88°5 1555 .e9A 421 od DO pabe 259 5) 39°77 G0taie Ok 437 38 235 AW his 4 L383 er Oe Bo 433 38 220 220 5 8:5 Gils aati 44] Donia lee 21055 6. 0) 100 0 760 39 198°5 — (Uae ba Gi ke 1 0 100 0 760 oD 200°5 — 2 91°5 So 96 294 a4°5 2S 260 3 Sas) O45, Asoo or LO BOLO. son, 205 4 0) 100 0 760 ah 19855 _ Cars Hit 0 100 0 760 4] 202 — ys 8a5 1625895 Syl 43 262 264 3 193 S078 94515 4 351 45 239, 229°5 4. 0 100 0 760 AS G9 195 — Nevertheless, in a number of cases in which I have at- tempted to calculate the value of AZ of one gas from a know- ledge of the values of ?2Z for air, and for a mixture in known proportions, I have obtained an unexpectedly high result, and when [I began some direct experiments on the question 1 was quite prepared to find that the ionisation of a mixture of air and gas was more than the sum of the ionisation of air and gas separately. Further experiment will, no doubt, make everything quite clear. In the meantime it is sufficiently evi- dent that the principle is at least nearly true. For the pur- pose of this investigation it may be taken as quite true, since the correction to be made for the presence of air is, at the most, only small. The quantity Z, as measured, includes a small propor- tion of £ ray ionisation. It must be shown that this does not harm the result. . In the form of apparatus which I use the ionisation in the portion A # of the curve (see Fig. 1) is nearly 6 per cent. of the ionisation at P, and I have not found enough variation from gas to gas to justify an attempt at correcting for it. Of course, the quantity is only small. The curve shows only this 8 ionisation above 4; that 175 below is hidden. But I have found by experiment that it varies very little throughout the whole distance from the axis of z This I did by placing over the radium just enough tinfoil to cut off all the a rays. In the foregoing will be found, I think, sufficient justifi- cation for the choice of the method of this paper, and for the assumptions made during the calculation of the results. In the previous paper I have already given a brief de- scription ot the process of an experiment. Some points, however, deserve reconsideration in the light of further ex- perience, and some changes have been found convenient. These are best discussed in relation to an actual experiment; I will take a determination of /?/ in carbon bisulphide. I have found it best to separate experiments whose object is to determine RZ from those whose object is to find the stop- ping power of the gas. In the former the chief difficulty lies in overcoming initial recombination. This requires the pres- sure of the gas to be low, and the applied potential to be high. A little leakage of air into the apparatus, which can hardly be avoided under these circumstances, is no serious dis- advantage, since the proportion of air can be found from a knowledge of /, and of the pressure and temperature at the time when / is measured ; and these data are easily obtained. In the latter, any moderate voltage will do, since the range does not depend on potential; but it is desirable to have as much gas as possible, and no leakage of air during the ex- periment, so that when the bulb containing a sample of the gas is taken away and weighed in order to find the proportion of the mixture, it may truly represent the condition of things during the earlier part of the experiment. It is best to work at a high temperature, if such is required to fill the chamber with gas which is nearly at atmospheric pressure. Carbon bisulphide vapour is well superheated at a tem- perature of 30° and a pressure of 25 cm. The apparatus is, therefore, heated to that temperature; and RZ for air is first measured. 176 Fig. 4 shows the readings obtained, and the curve which is drawn to find # and J. These are determined to be 4°95 and 42°8 respectively, so that AZJ=212, the temperature being 30° C., and the pressure being 751 cm. The appara- tus is then exhausted and filled with CS vapour to a pres- sure of about 24 cm. It is known from a separate experi- ment that 1,000 volts per cm. is a saturating potential gra- dient, and a battery of 300 volts is therefore put on to the 3 mm. chamber. ICS, 88% +| Gir 127 | 233.5mm | | 297 R=7'7h Ve d7.3, | RI = 289 | cat Fig. 5. The readings then taken, and the curve drawn are shown in Fig. 5. It appears from these that H=7 74, [=373, 30 that 2Z=289. The pressure has altered about 1 cm. during the determination of the curve, but was found to be 23°35 at the moment when the corner (/?,J) was passed. The tempera- ture at the same time was 29°. Now, the stopping power of CS, is 2°20, and the stopping power of the mixture is (com- paring with the previous experiment)— 495 751 re 174 = -233°5 Hence— If x be the percentage of gas, we must have ox2247—27=27°06 7 e885, The vapour is then cleared out of the apparatus, and dry air admitted. The value of AZ for air is again determined, as shown in Fig. 6, and found to be 214. PTT Fig. 6. In the second experiment the proportion of gas to air, by pressure, is as 88°5 to 11°5 ; but, according to the energy spent by? theva, particle, jasi88/5) ‘to 115)/.2;2,, 7-2., -as,,94:5) 101.559. Hence the true value of Z is found from the equation "945 WI +°055 x 213 =289 whence (J =294 Hence specific ionisation of CS, =294/213 =1°38. The results of this particular experiment are recorded _ in the second line of the results for carbon bisulphide in § 2. It seems probable that the determination of the ionisa- tion in various cases due to the a rays may be of consider- able importance, and I therefore attach a drawing of the apparatus which I have used (pl. vii.) in the hope that it may save the time of any other workers in this direction. In the figure, P is cne of three glass pillars which sup- port the high potential plate. I have also used a glass plate, as shown by the dotted surface, to insulate the upper plate of the ionisation chamber. Sulphur and ebonite do not stand the heat. The upper gauze, gg, is the lower wall of the chamber, g’g’ is the lower gauze and is earthed ; it is sup- ported by three brass pillars, only one of which is shown. The vertical tubes are shown at 77, and the radium plate at RR. The semaphore, ss, is made of thin sheet copper, and can be turned round so as to uncover the radium. It may be worth while mentioning that I have found it better to keep the plate, YQ, “out of sight” of any insulating material connected with the high potential plate; if this is not done, then the creep of electricity over the insulators which is apt to occur when the potential is changed exerts a troublesome electro- static effect. DHFG is the outline of the electric oven. The tube 4 goes to the manometer, B to a bulb used in the deter- minations of stopping power, and C to a bulb which contains the liquid whose vapour is being treated. 178 § 2. The following tables contain the results of the determina- tion of the constant of specific ionisation due to a rays. These have all been made recently, except when the contrary is stated. JI have rejected a large number of earlier measure- ments. In the case of each experiment with a gas, the value of AZ for air was found immediately before and im- mediately afterwards. It varies somewhat from day to day, and_ generally increases during any long series of experiments, since the warmth and _ dry- ness are conducive to the better retention of the emanation. The radium plate is not quite in so good a condition as it used to be, being covered with a very thin film of dirt and grease (mainly from the taps). This could, no doubt, be removed by a red heat, but I am unwilling to handle the radium film so roughly just now. The presence of the film slightly lowers the ranges, about ‘5 to 1 mm. in air; and rather blurs the cor- ners of the ionisation curves : — Per her centage centage Volts Pressure Temper- of Gas of Gas RI RI percm. incm. ature. RI. by y (corrd.). (air). Ratio, Pres- Energy. sure. Pentane. 1670 25 449 .83°5- 95 262. 265 198 1°34 " ye fen we) 9° 5 .93:5. p20 265 198. 1:34 uF ZO Dig od 915) 9720 268 263 LS7 a3 a 29. eidOl) CoO. 90.0, 2O0.. 2604 TO ere “ss 385. . 40 81 O45 2d 219d 200 9, DBT * Soon, malta Cae OT oth tat 2tOs).. 20 Soper OOO" a 32h aetioo 88'5. 965, 281 284. 2085 136 Ps 25:6. 440 StoRD) PP ORR Eto ee ee otayme Wemee2 | ()) 1°36 Mean, 1°36 Carbon Bisulphide. 1670 25°38 40 O1 896 \ * 2822854 8 20S ae ae 1000" °23°35°"29 88°5 94°5 289 294 2137;eniSe A 30°11 40 91° § 96284" » 287 % 209i team Mean, 1°37 Ether (C,H,,0). 1000 DA ck Pie CS ap ON by elie wah ot 1°29 1670 24°7 >, 30 S60. 900 oan 280 |. 214 acid fe AGre. Hope Oli told {Own hey ae Gold ae 132 Mean, 1°31 Volts per cm. 1670 Per- 179 Per- centage centage Pressure Temper- of Gas of Gas in cm. ature. by by Pres- Enerey. Chloroform. 26°1 a0 86 oe Zo oO 86 95 f(A 54 83 94 Ethyl Chloride. DES) 14 89 95 38 16 93 97 58 26 Ot 5. 96s DAG (O 81 91 Sills) 60 85 95 32°8 60 85 93 2a) 34°5 91596 4271 Sy(aa etomoye EMG Carbon Tetrachloride. SAG, 60°7 69 97 D278 61 (OP OT Pallas) 61 83 95 PAT 54 81 94°5 Aor 85355 90 O75 Ethyl Todide. 2 ey 65 Tobe 7 Or Yay GS.) JO 97 Ethyl Alcohol. 34°8 72 85 98 go 0%, bit 73 85 Methyl Alcohol. ea) 65 92 94 Methyl Iodide. S000 20 785 95 Benzene. 20a 762 71 89°5 22 Oa Ero. G2k2 25:6" FO 89 96°5 DIS = OF 88 96 2h O- § 6? 83 94 226 235 251 248 252 Rl (corrd.) Caw, Ratio. 20t ) Loo 20%” 128 202 1°31 Mean, 1:29 1S SS 204, 1°33 7A 0s ae ba L664 W27 186 =61°30 186 ~ 1°30 199-5 ao! £985 129 Mean, 1'30 Aen elec 499) . 2533 199. fes5 204. LS 202%) Ae32 Mean, 1°31 ii er 29 20R L2T Mean, 1'28 174 =1°24 184 1°22 Mean, 1:23 E(9 SAE 22 160). 33 tsi w1-28 #85 30 194. 1°30 £96 ~ "E26 1987S b29 Mean, 1°29 180 Volts percm. Pressureincm. Temperature. RI. RI (air). Ratio. Acetylene. 1000 Atmo. 54 274 223 1°23 ote 298 232 1°28 3) Oye) 294 229 1°28 70 252 201 1°25 Mean, 1:26 Ethylene. 1000 Atmo. 345 290 227 1:28 Carbon Dioxide. 1000 Atmo. 20 23D 215 1:09 is a 1 192 176 1°09 om Dei 225 1°05 3) 99 Mean, 1'08 Nitrous Oxide. 1000 Atmo. 29 240 229 1°05 Oxygen. 1000 Atmo. 20 247 226 1:09 Of the measurements recorded in the above tables, those for acetylene, ethylene, carbon dioxide, and nitrous oxide were made some time ago. But they are probably quite correct enough to rank with the rest, which have for the most part been made recently, since they are not affected by tempera- ture and initial recombination difficulties. The measurements most likely to contain error are those of the alcohols and methyl iodide, the latter because I have been unable from lack of material to repeat the one somewhat ancient determi- nation, the former because for some reason the alcohols are very difficult to manage in my apparatus. They are apt to cause—particularly methyl alecohol—very large normal leaks, though other vapours, such as benzene, have no such effect. I believe the cause to be connected with the presence of min- ute particles of fluff, which bridge across the walls of the ionisation chamber, being stretched along the lines of force. Although the apparatus is guarded with plugs of glass wool, yet things of this sort seem to find their way into the cham- ber at times, and it is possible that the methyl alcohol sets them free from the sides or base of the apparatus to which they are fastened by traces of grease. I have only once had the apparatus in perfect working order with methyl alcohol ; at that time I had gone over the working parts with a magni- 18] fying glass to find and remove every foreign particle, and had washed the whole apparatus out with methyl alcohol itself. These good conditions Jasted only a short time, and unfortu- nately a second cleansing process was not equally effective. I must point out that the results for benzene and acety- lene are now close together. In the preliminary paper I be- lieved them to differ considerably, and used them as an illus- tration of the want of direct connection between the energy spent and the ionisation produced. It will be seen later that this effect is now clearly shown, but I was unfortunate in using a comparison of benzene with acetylene as an illustra- tion. § 3. Though our knowledge of the process of ionisation by the a particle is as yet only small and imperfect, it does not seem out of place to draw together what facts we do know, and to endeavour to connect them by some thread of argument, which may be useful for a time. In the first place there is the fact that the ionisation produced by the a particle increases as its velocity diminish- es. Now, Rutherford has recently shown (Phil. Mag., Aug., 1906) that the particle spends energy at a uniform rate along its path. It follows, therefore, that the ionisation produced is not proportional to the energ gy spent. In my preliminary paper I have already given a reason for supposing that the energy spent and the ionisation produced are not direstly connected, viz., that the former is related to the atomic weight by a simple law and the latter is not. As a temporary hypothesis let us suppose that there is an intervening link; that the a particle produces a primary effect A, which in turn produces a secondary effect B. The latter Corin of ionisation, the former may or may not do so. It is in the production of the primary effect that the energy of the particle is spent. Since the energy spent is related to the atomic weight by a simple law, since it is independent of velocity, and since there is a critical speed at which all ionisation ceases, which speed is the same for all atoms, it appears clear that A is a sub-atomic effect. It consists in the performance of some act which always involves the expenditure of the same amount of energy; and the stopping power of an atom is proportional to the number of times that the act is performed within it. The effect might consist, for example, in some operation upon a common constituent of all atoms, such as an a particle. The critical speed might be that at which the moving a particle failed to penetrate, or, more generally, act upon the a particle of the atom. 182 In the next place consider the effect B. The proportion of ionisation to energy spent varies from molecule to molecule, aud is dependent on the velocity of the a particle. The re- sults described in this paper show that, as already said, di=k f(v)de. The nature of the function f/v) is of great interest. In two previous papers I have made attempts to find it. In the first (Phil. Mag., Sept., 1905) I showed that if we assumed the ionisation produced to be proportional to the energy spent, and both to v”, and also assumed all che energy to be spent on ionisation, then the form of the curve was most readily explained by taking n= —+4. Later Ruther- ford showed that the energy of the a particle was not all spent on ionisation, but that much still remained when ionisa- tion ceased. Using his figures, I then pointed out that with this modification of the hypothesis it seemed probable that n= —2 (Phil. Mag., Nov., 1905). But Rutherford’s recent work shows that the hypothesis is still fundamentally wrong, because the ionisation is not proportional to the energy spent. His results settle the whole question. If v= the velocity of the particle, r the range yet to he run, d a constant, which Rutherford estimates at 1°25 cm., then his conclusion is that v is proportional to W(r+d). Now I have shown (Phil. Mag., Nov., 1905) that the ionisa- tion produced by the particle during the last r cm. of its path is proportional to V/(r+d)—/d where d=1°33. The two values of d may be taken to be the same. Hence di/dr is pro- portional to 1/V(r+ 7), a2, to 1/v; which means_ that }(v)=1/v, or that the ionisation produced at different points of the path in any gas is proportional to the time spent by the a particle in crossing the atom. The formula which I have used here for the ionisation was calculated on the hypothesis that the a particle lost its ionising power abruptly, and that the slope of the top of the ionisation curve was due to the effects of the thickness of the Ra film. Bronson’s results (Phil. Mag., June, 1906) seem to show that the loss of ionising power is not quite so sudden as I supposed it to be. But I find that this does not affect the calculation of the form of f/v). For we may take an extreme view and suppose the whole of the top slope to be due to a gradual decay of the a_ particle’s powers, and none to the thickness of the radium layer. In that case the form of the ionisation curve represents the effects of one particle. Now, the ionisation at 6°5 cm. (in air) for RaC is nearly 4/3 of the ionisation at 5 cm. At the former distance r+d="5+ 1:25=1°75, and at the latter 2+1°:25=3°25. But /3:25/ /1°75=1°36: which is very nearly 4/3. Thus the ionisation on this hypothesis also is inversely proportional to W/(r+d), 183 and the true explanation of the top slope must he between the two extremes. It seems clear, then, that the ionisation in the molecule is proportional to the energy spent in it (/.e., to the stopping power, or the amount of the effect A), to the velocity of the a particle inversely, and to a quantity */, constant for any one gas, but varying from gas to gas. It is this quantity which is given in the last column of the tables above. The velocity of the a particle might enter into the for- mula because A is effective in producing B in proportion to the derangement of the atom or molecule consequent on the presence of the particle within it, and therefore to the time during which the intrusion lasts. There is something odd about this conclusion, which suggests a reconsideration of the position. At this stage, therefore, it is natural to raise the question whether the effect A really is the cause of the effect B, whe- ther, that is to say, the energy spent by the a particle goes to the production of ions, or the ionisation energy comes from. some other source and the a particle merely pulls the trigger in its passage through the molecule. The fact that the ionisa- tion produced varies as the time of passage is certainly indi- cative of the truth of the latter hypothesis; whilst the occur- ence of the stopping power in the expression for the ionisation is not necessarily evidence against it, because the factor & might be taken in conjunction with s, and ks might be found to represent not some derivative of the energy spent by the particle within the molecule, but some inherent property of the molecule which determined the ionisation produced in consequence of the pulling of the trigger. The quantity is represents in the first place the specific ionisation of the molecule; that is a relative measure of the ionisation produced in a molecule when an a particle passes through it at a given speed. Now, it is an extraordinary thing that the values of ks which I have obtained for different molecules prove to be nearly related to already well-known molecular constants, such as the molecular volumes, molecular refraction constants, and so on. In the following table the values of k, s, and ks of a number of substances are given in the first three columns ; the fourth contains the volumes of the molecular volume 7, and the fifth the ratio v/ks. The values of the volumes were for the most part taken from the tables in Ostwald’s Lehrbuch der Allgemeinen Chemie, 2nd edition, p. 356, etc., but those of C,H, and C,H, were calculated from the general equation for obtaining the molecular volumes of organic compounds, and the values for CO,, O., and H, were adopted on _ the 184 assumption that they fell into line with the same equation. This is justifiable, since my immediate object is to show a re- lationship between /s and the atomic volume in combination. As a matter of fact, the molecular volume of O, per se has been found by Dewar to be 27°4 (Chem. News, June, 1898). This is close to the value in the table, viz., 24°4. But Dewar also finds H, to be 28, which is much larger than the value used in the ordinary formula. Bx 107. sx R02. ks 10]. © a. Coke Os Be eres eee Cen ot I9 sod 2430. 960) «225 al Dee CoAier, -2,000 p08. Oo ol GU . 242.5 Oi amie COM igs VS © ABD TTS Ade 4 hs aa eres pee ny deo TET 2 AO | 300. 250 “e SO A) amas Git ,O %.. Lae 303" 440% 100-0. S24) 5° 830s CHICO} 5.123" 200 "2460. 6. 62°O. Ob2 ATO ees CTO le PES An Ar --- = CCl, oe, Foe 400, D228 “104-0 TOT 5 SO meee CHC... 129. SiG. 408. 85°0. 208 —-) (7 aa CeEOl los 200 «old TIO, p21 2 eae GET... 190 4.208 3437) 66°0h, 193" 4 2-0 sates Cai... 128° 312, .400° . 8670. Ze ) O8°3 aes CS, wae (EO ees 299) O-Oh gOk. Oris ae CO, wo LOS oO TAT SPOOL aoa 22.” ee ees N,O ep hOD JAG Ly sds —— — 2970 5:3 Di ez LOD.» 20D NS 1 2as 22s OO) eee isk Speed) 24 24 11:0 460 86 28 The value of & for H, is set down as 100. This is only approximate, and is probably too high. Its accurate deter- mination will require the construction of special apparatus. The agreement between the ratios v/ks in the fifth column is not such as to show that v and fs are directly pro- portional; but it is good enough to suggest strongly that they both rest immediately on some more fundamental pro- perty. The case is even a little stronger than appears at first sight, since it is clear that H, contributes an abnormal amount to the molecular volumes; the ratio v//s is high whenever H preponderates in the molecule. Moreover, the ‘molecular refractions also run closely parallel, as is well known, with the molecular volumes, and in general the con- nection between the various physical properties of the mole- cule and its volume is more obvious than any connection with its molecular weight. Consequently the quantity hs is closely related to most of the physical properties of the molecule. As a second instance, I have put in the sixth column of the above table the respective values of Sutherland’s molecular volume B (Phil. Mag., Jan., 1895), and shown in the last 185 column that this also is closely connected to ’s. According to Sutherland, & tends to be proportional to the electric mo- ment of the molecule. In this case also the variations in the ratios (see the last column) seem to be due to abnormalities in B rather than in /s; ¢.g., C,H, and C,H, would fall into line of the values of B for these substances were more in keep- ing with those for C,H, and C,H,,. Since / is nearly the same for a number of gases, v/s is also nearly the same. Thus the molecular volume is con- nected, not very distantly, with the sum of the square roots of the weights of the atoms which make up the molecule. Each of these physical properties which are so nearly related is partly additive, partly constitutive. For example, the molecular volume of an organic molecule depends in part on the sum of the volumes of the constituent atoms, and in part on the mode of constitution. This suggests that there is some fundamental and purely additive property of the atom itself, on which various semi-additive properties are based. For this reason it appears to be of great interest that the stopping power of the atom has shown itself to be simply additive, so far as experiment has tried it; and at the same time to be closely connected with the atomic volume, the atomic refraction, and the rest. The additive nature of the constant may be seen from the following table, in which the observed stopping powers of a number of gases are set alongside those calculated from assumed values for H, C, O, and Cl. Assume H,=-24, C,=°85, O,=1-03, Cl],=1-78 (air mole- cule = 1) :— GABE Os Et pertina Clr Bere) AG FiO @alewlaced’<24 1-09, 1:33, 3:2 3o6 1-41 2-08 Observed#) ..5 lke A393) 23259 1:43 2-00 C,H Ono COs CCl, CHCl, C,H,Cl Oalculated’ <<. (‘3:41 1:47 3°98 3:2] 2-34 Observed... 3:33 1°48 4-00 3:16 +36 It is of course too early to say that the stopping power has been proved to be a perfectly additive property of the atom, yet if is clear enough that it is more so than any other known property, except one. The more nearly experiment shows it to be strictly adaitive, the greater will be its title to rank with mass itself. I hope to begin soon a fresh and more accurate set of experiments in the endeavour to find to what extent the additive law holds. The near proportionality of the stopping-power to the atomic square root is an effect which is quite apart from its 186 additive nature. Its existence is a connecting link between the atomic weight on the one hand and the atomic volume, refractive power, etc., on the other. The preliminary paper on this subject contained a table of stopping powers as found up to that time. I have made several new measurements of these constants, which are, I beleve, an improvement on the old. This is particularly the case with the metals Au, Pt, Sn, Ag, Cu, and AI, since the specimens used were obtained as pure from Messrs. Johnson, Matthey, & Co. I find that if the stopping powers of 8, Cl, and I are calculated from those of molecules containing them, on the assumption that the additive law holds, then these fit in very well with the metals. So also does Br fit in fairly well; itis quite possible that the divergence is due to experimental error, since the only measurement on a molecule containing Br was made at a very early stage of this enquiry. The divergence from the exact- ness of the square-root law, which I have previously pointed out, seems to occur only in the atoms whose weights are below 30; these have an abnormally low value, as may be seen from the table below (in which s for the air atom=1). It is curious that a similar effect should occur in the case of the atomic heats : — ee’ Oe Nie Cpe AT. S. ‘Cle “Fe. ae a ee a 24 - BO “94 61:05 1-495. 1:76.06 See Vw ...100 3°47 3°74 4:00 5:20 5:65 5:96 7:48 7:65 s/r/o X 107... 240 246 251 262 287 312 299 SOR Ie Cus) bre Ae SS: Sete: 1 2A6 (2:60. S280 3'DOm, 3 2 AD on 96. 8°95 10°37 109 AA” 13:90.9) 420 eee éx/ox 0... 209 291) 3164826 yed07), 29h oe One other point invites some consideration. Whilst the saturated lonisation curve seems to be the same for all gases, yet the effects of initial recombination vary from gas to gas and from point to point on the curve. This fact can be ex- plained by the consideration that the amount of the ionisa- tion produced is an intramolecular effect, and is therefore independent of the physical conditions of the molecule and of the relations of one molecule to another, whilst the amount of initial recombination depends on extramolecular relations, on pressure, perhaps on temperature, and so on. The in- crease of initial recombination towards the end of the path of the particle may be due in part to the existence of a greater number of molecules that have lost more than one ion, since in such cases recombination would be harder to pre- vent. This raises the question as to how the ionisation is 187 distributed between the molecules which the «a _ particle traverses. There does not appear to be any evidence, as yet, that the chance of an ion being formed from a molecule is dependent on whether the molecule has already lost one or more ions; rather the contrary. If this is the case, occa- sional molecules must lose several ions. Nor is it yet clear in what mode ionisation occurs. Does the a particle simply cause the removal from the molecule of one or more electrons 4 May there not possibly be a more complete disruption of the molecule, or even the atom? There is one curious parallelism in numbers which may have a bearing on this question. Ram- say and Soddy (Proc. Roy. Soc., 72, p. 204, 1903) found that 50 mmg. of radium bromide in solution evolved gases at the rate of °5 cc. per day—.e., 2 x 10" molecules per day. Now, Rutherford has shown that one gram of radium bro- mide, without its radio-active descendants, produces 3°6 x 10” a particles per second. Each a _ particle makes 86,000 pairs of ions. Hence the number of ions made in one day by 50 mmg. is ion OO x 0Dyx 16006 CO ng 24 se 172,000; = 2-7, x LO”. This number is an inferior limit. A superior limit is found by considering all the radio-active products of radium to be present in full, in which case the number will be be- tween five and six times greater. The close agreement of these numbers certainly fits in with the hypothesis that an actual disruption of the water molecule takes place in con- sequence of the passage of the a particle through it. I owe my thanks to my assistant, Mr. A. L. Rogers, for the great care and skill with which he has made the apparatus used in this work, and drawn the plate illustrating this paper. Note: October 22.—The greater part of § 3 of this paper ha; been written since the remainder was read. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE VII. Insulators shown by dotted surfaces. QQ, upper plate of ionisation chamber. P, one of three glass pillars supporting gg. gg, upper gauze, forming lower plate of ionisation chamber, connected to battery. _g'g', lower gauze, supported by three metal pillars, one of which is shown, earthed through pillars and metal of case. ? . . SS, semaphore of thin sheet metal, worked from without by turning the long rod on which it is mounted. TT, set of vertical tubes. RR, radium plate. DEFG, outline of electric oven. ON CERTAIN NEW MINERAL SPECIES ASSOCIATED WITH CARNOTITE IN THE RAD!IO-ACTIVE ORE BODY NEAR OLARY. By D. Mawson, B.E., B.Sc. [Read September 4, 1906.] INTRODUCTION. The occurrence of carnotite, a vanadate of uranium and potassium, was reported by Mr. Chapman, the Government Analyst, as a filmy coating in the crevices of a sample of ore sent to him for analysis. As the yellow powder was scarce his determination rested on qualitative investigation only, but was substantiated by physical tests made by Professor Bragg, who demonstrated its high radio-activity. This information was made public in the daily press of May 3 last. The same day Mr. H. Y. L. Brown, the Government Geologist, visited the locality of the find, Radium Hill,* situ- ated 24 miles in a direct line east-south-east of Olary, and 14 miles south-south-west of Teesdale’s Dam. In the Adelaide press of May 5 appeared a short report made by him on re- turn to the city. Mr. H. G. Stokes, after a visit to the field, made com- ments through the press of May 9, doubting the correctness of the mineral determinations. Extracts from the final official report appeared in the Advertiser of May 16, in which announcements were made by the Government Geologist and Government Analyst, and. by . Mr... G.., As» Goyder;, Public, Analyst. .) duuatiins report the Government Geologist, | suspecting that the carnotite originated as a decomposition pro- duct, states:—“It appears most probable that it has been derived from the solution and redeposition of other uranium compounds below, and that, therefore, such ores, in addition, will be found by exploitation in depth.” Both analysts reported the yellow compound to be probably carno- tite. Magnetite and magnetic titanic iron were reported; also oummite. Only within the last month have representative samples been obtained at the University. Extreine variation in physical characters, exhibited by different portions of the black mineral, at once attracted attention. It was evident that instead of a single black constituent previously described as * As this = Lich so fakin rem: ere Ahan ga) “Radium Hil” seems appropriate, 189 ilmenite or magnetic iron, five distinct varieties could be iso- lated. The high economic value of many such heavy black minerals attached additional interest to further investigation. However, though iron and titanium could readily be de- tected by simple means, yet this was far from satisfying, as the variety of types could not be reconciled with known species. Added to this, the nature of the occurrence and the ore itself were suggestive of the presence of minerals of a rare type. At this stage it was highly desirable that careful chemi- cal analyses be made. The laborious work, rendered specially difficult by the presence of an excessively high percentage of titania, was undertaken by Professor Rennie and Dr. Cooke, with results as stated in the succeeding paper. MINERALOGICAL NOTES. The locality of the find was visited a fortnight ago, and the following observations made : — On the original claim,* pegged out by Mr. A. J. Smith, there are several parallel veins, averaging a full two feet in width, and continuing in a direction N. 30° E. for a distance of several hundred yards. Altogether the ore has been traced for at least a quarter of a mile. The veins are nearly verti- cal, shghtly underlying to the east, and run in the direction of the country; the latter is possibly Pre-Cambrian in age, and where best exposed is a metamorphic sandstone, in which mica flakes have been largely developed. In proximity to the lode, on either side, the mineralizing waters forming the vein- filling have metamorphosed the country, developing a selvage of solid black mica. Basic dyke-like intrusions, many yards in width, have cut perpendicularly across the lode country in two places, re- spectively north and south of Smith’s claim. These may have been introduced subsequently to the lode formation, though possibly contemporaneous and genetically connected with the ore bodies. The outcrops of the lodes stand a few inches above the level ground, and are typically composed of heavy black mine- rals of somewhat varying types, and notable amounts of coarse black mica and highly-coloured vanadiferous decomposition products. In the case of the main lode a considerable bulk of quartz, usually tinted pinkish, occupies the central vein- filling. In it are occasional bunches of mica and sporadic masses of the heavy black minerals. The shoading of these latter minerals on the surface renders prospecting easy. edbing atid Ge was Ao eay taken up, Ee Aaaae btw the black mineral so abundant would prove to be wolfram or tin oxide. 190 The veins are all of the pegmatite class, and no doubt have their origin in some intrusive mass below. The most western reef is somewhat different from the others, being chiefly composed of micaceous hematite and quartz, with occa- sional copper stains, and no radio-active minerals have so far been detected in the outcrop. The miain reef is about 60 yards further east, and has been epened to a depth of 15 feet. The vein matter is distributed in a roughly symmetrical arrangement. A massive mineral (1) with an uneven iron- black fracture and specific gravity, about 6, composes laminat- ed zones some four inches wide next the walls. On analysis this proved to be chiefly composed of iron and titanium, though, as evidenced in the thin slice prepared for microsco- pic examinations, it is not homogeneous. The central portion of the reef is occupied by a more compact body of a brighter black mineral (2), with shghtly less specific gravity; also ac- companied by quartz and a varying quantity of black mica. Occasionally streaks, scattered grains, and cuboid crystals of a rarer black mineral (3), with specific gravity in the vicinity of 4, are observable, which, on account of its very brilliant lustre and glassy fracture, is readily distinguishable. These latter two minerals have been shown by Professor Rennie and Dr. Cooke to contain over 50 per cent. of titania, a large quantity of iron, and a notable amount of rare earths, uranium, vanadium, and chromium. So far as can be judged at present, the brilliancy of lustre indicates increased percentage of titania chiefly, and to some extent rare earths. Several degrees of brilliance are shown by primary heavy black minerals of the general type of (2), and it 1s inferred that analysis will reveal a considerable diver- sity in chemical composition. The mineral (1) is likely to be to some extent an alteration of (2), the heterogeneity exhibited by it aiding in this conclusion. Type (3) is best developed in the main vein, at the contact with the siliceous central filling, and has all the appearance of having formed at a period after the reception of the main bulk of the ore body. In such situations it is also frequently met with crystallized, embedded in the quartz, or presenting idiomorphic faces in its direc- tion. The quartzose gangue in the central portions of this lode contrasts noticeably with the titanium-rich iron minerals and micas forming the general filling, and indicates, at least an alteration in character of the contributing circu- lation. The inception of the new chemical and physical conditions accompanying this change in circulation has been to partially alter the mineral (2) near the contact, leaving two additional minerals in its place, one resembling micaceous iron (4), the other a dull brownish-black ferriferous mineral 191 (5); from the extracted matter, the bright black mineral (3) appears to have had its origin. Another reef 10 yards to the east is characterized by con- sisting chiefly of the heavy black minerals and abundant mica. It has been opened to a depth of 18 feet. Still further east is another reef, chiefly composed of the heavy black minerals and quartz. The portions of the lodes exposed by development show ample stains of the lemon-yellow powdery substance deter- mined by the Government Analyst to be carnotite. It is found coating the black minerals and insinuated into micro- scopic cracks. Undoubtedly this substance is of secondary origin, the field occurrence indicating a derivation by decom- position of some primary constituent of the ore body; no doubt the black minerals referred to above. In one part of the main lode a secondary micaceous mine- ral of a bright green colour is rather abundant, and, as it re-acts strongly for vanadium, is no doubt roscoelite. Just as recorded in the cases of the Colorado and Utah occurrences, a large variety of yellowish and greenish mine- rals in various shades, both amorphous and crystalline, are also met with in this material. Their very sparse develop- ment has, so far, not allowed of sufficient quantities being collected for analytical purposes. The bright black mineral (3) is an entirely new type, though details are not yet available for complete description. We propose to name it davidite, after Professor T. W. E. David, of Sydney University, whose personal ability, wise counsel, and enthusiasm have done so much to further the interests of the science and economic application of geology in Australasia. CoNCLUSIONS. Carnotite is known from one other locality only, namely, as scattered occurrences in a Mesozoic sandstone for- mation, distributed through an _ arid district com- prising western Colorado and _ south-eastern Utah, in the United States of America. Roscoelite has been reported from three other localities only—Placerville, in Colorado, and neighbouring locality, and Placerville, in Cali- fornia, both in the United States of America,* and at the Boulder Mine, eastern Coolgardie, Western Australia.t+ *“On Carnotite and Associated Vanadiferous Minerals in Western Colorado,”’ by W. F. Hillebrand and F. L. Ransome, p. 9, Bull: No. 262, U.S.G.S. “Vanadium and Uranium in South-Eastern Utah,”’ by J. M. Boutwell, p. 200, Bull. No. 260, U.S.G.S. + See W.A. Geol. Survey Reports. 192 The further association of these rare minerals at Radium Hill is of special interest. The only known occurrences of carno- tite are with roscoelite and other vanadium minerals. The existence of mineral vanadates of uranium, such as carno- tite, on theoretical grounds, should not be unexpected, as these elements have a powerful mutual precipitating action. In the case of the American deposits, deposition has taken place in fissures, and as a replacement in a Mesozoic sandstone formation, evidently from percolating waters. The ore bodies are wholly of aqueous or secondary origin. The South Aus- tralian occurrence is the result of weathering of certain rare and new minerals in pegmatite veins traversing Pre-Cam- brian strata. This latter occurrence is specially interesting, for the fact that the primary source of the uranium and vanadium can be ascertained. A further and most notable fact is that the element vanadium was first discovered by Seffstrom in the titanic iron ore deposit of Taberg, south-west of Lake Wet- ter, in Sweden. The Taberg ore is characterized by the pre- sence of 0°12 per cent. to 0°40 per cent. ot vanadic acid. The ore stock has also in its field relations much in common with the Radium Hill lodes.* No trace of gummite, as recorded in the official report, was noted in any of the lodes, and its occurrence is extremely doubtful. ) Pegmatite lodes, of the character of those at Radium Hill, often carry tin and wolfram, though so far these sub- stances have not been reported from the locality, and the absence of even traces of them in the analyses suggests that, likely, the ore body is a pegmatite of a basic rock, and that. in all probability, such minerals will be found entirely absent. It may be mentioned that this type of ore deposit does not usually develop pitchblende, but uraniferous titanates, niobates, and tantatates, and thorium minerals may be ex- pected. Monazite is found in the same district. in the lode at the King’s Bluff gold-mine, 28 miles north-west, which fact should stimulate local interest in quest of thorium minerals, and re- inforce the possibilities of the thorium content of the Radium Hill ore. This body of radio-active ore is, in the matter of quan- tity, much the most important yet discovered in Australasia. Its low grade, however, introduces serious difficulties to com- mercial enterprise in this direction. The high value of vana- dium for hardening steel, and the fact that the titanium, — ne See ‘The Nature of Ore Deposits,” by Dr. R. Beck, trans. by W. H. Weed, p. 21, vol. 1. 193 chromium, and uranium contents are utilized for the same purpose should induce a demand for the heavy black mine- rals for the manufacture of special steels. Mineralogical Laboratory, University of Adelaide. PRELIMINARY ANALYTICAL NOTES ON THE MINERALS DESCRIBED IN THE PRECEDING PAPER. By E. H. Renniz, M.A., D.Sc., and W. T. Cooxsz, D.Sc. [Read September 4, 1906.] At Mr. Mawson’s suggestion, we have examined two of the minerals referred to by him in the previous paper. As regards the carnotite, we are so far able to confirm Mr. Chap- man’s results as to the presence in it of potassium, uranium, and vanadium, and we hope later to furnish quantitative de- tails. As regards the dark-coloured mineral (No. 2 in pre- vious paper), of which the carnotite appears to be a decompo- sition product, we have examined it qualitatively up to a cer- tain point; but the difficulties of analysis are considerable, owing to the complex nature of the mineral. We have, how- ever, ascertained that, in addition to titanic and ferric oxides, which are the chief constituents, there are present uranium, vanadium, cerium, and almost certainly thorium and other rare earths, traces of lime, and, we believe, also chromium and traces of manganese. The quantities of vanadium and chro- mium, however, if present, are very small, and in presence of uranium difficult to detect with certainty. As a result of this, and by reason of other matters which have occupied our time, we send these imperfect preliminary notes in the hope of being able at a future date to offer to the Society a more complete analysis. 194 A NOTE ON THE LOCALITIES ATTRIBUTED TO AUSTRA- LIAN LEPIDOPTERA BY MR. OSWALD LOWER,-F.E.S. By A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.E.S. [Read October 2, 1906. ] It is hardly necessary for an entomologist to msist on the vital importance of strict accuracy in the record of locali- ties. A definite locality is often of great assistance to the systematist in determining a species. Further, when the description of an obscure species is insufficient for its deter- mination, and the type has been lost or destroyed, it may be possible by the examination of specimens, corresponding to the description and taken in the exact locality of the type (such specimens have been styled topotypes by Lord Walsingham), to determine the species with sufficient exact- ness. These are incidental advantages. The main points are:—(1) That the natural history of a species must be con- sidered imperfectly known until its range has been ascer- tained (if possible both geologically as well as geographically, though entomologists have to be content with the latter) ; and (2) that the study of geographical distribution is recog- nized as an important branch of science. If accuracy in re- cording localities 1s of importance, it 1s equally a scientific duty to correct mistaken localities, or even to indicate what localities are doubtful, since doubtful localities as a basis for scientific generalizations are far worse than no localities at all. When such errors have been perpetrated on a con- siderable scale, the obligation becomes imperative. In the present state of Australian entomology it is very difficult to detect errors in locality. So many new species are constantly being discovered, that an author may for years continue to assign to them incorrect localities, without sus- picion being aroused. Even when suspicion is aroused, any- thing hke positive proof is in the nature of the case difficult. But in the present instance IT am able to adduce evidence which, I consider, amounts to demonstration. In 1903 I had an opportunity of examining some of Mr. Lower’s types of Pyralide. On inspection I had _ no 195 doubt that in eleven instances (of which I give a list below), these types were obtained from Mr. F. P. Dodd, and that in every instance the locality label attached to the specimen, which was the same as the published locality, did not cor- respond to the locality from which the specimen was obtain- ed.* My reasons for coming to this conclusion were : — (1) These specimens were mostly obscure species of Phycitine not likely to be obtained from the ordi- nary collector, but all of them had been sent to me by Mr. Dodd, and most of them were, so far as T knew, not obtainable from any other source. Mr. Lower had obtained to my knowledge many moths from Mr. Dodd. (2) The specimens were mostly bred specimens in perfect condition. No other collector in Australia has done much work in breeding Phyecztine. (3) The condition of the specimens, their method of pinning and setting, and in some instances’ the peculiar kind of pin employed, exactly corres- ponded to Mr. Dodd’s specimens. Though this evidence was sufficiently cogent for my own mind, I thought it advisable to submit the specimens to Mr. Dodd, who recognized them as having been obtained from himself. Mr. Dodd usually attaches locality labels to his specimens, giving the locality, date, and collector’s name. On being questioned by me as to this point, he replied that many of the specimens received by Mr. Lower from him (shortly before the publication of the descriptions) were so _ labelled. Some he had not labelled, but Mr. Lower, in taking them, undertook to affix the labels himself. The first specimen in the following list was sent to me as the type of Anerastria xiphimela, Low., but, as I have already mentioned (P.R.S.Q., 1903, p. 119), I was unable to consider it the real type, as it did not correspond exactly to the description, and did not belong to the same genus as that in which Sir George Hampson, who had examined all these types, had placed the original. It seems to me more likely that Mr. Lower substituted another insect, which he believed to be the same species, than that Sir George Hampson should have made a mistake in the genus : — *I have already referred to this discovery (P.R.S.Q., 1903, pp. 110, 126, 132). H2 Wikie ENCE, Tr. PUBLISHED TRUE hase R.S.8.A., LocatLity. LOcALItTy. 1903. Anerastria xiphimela (re- Page | puted type of) ... te 52 | ** Cooktown ” Townsville Anerastria minoralis bel 52 | ** Mackay ” Ae Phycita deltophora ae 53 | 7 f Nephopteryx orthozona ... aes ** Cooktown ” Pr Nephopteryx hades 54 | “Brisbane, Mackay” e Nephopteryx thermalopha... 55 ‘ ef +5 Nephopteryx metasarca ... 56 | ‘* Brisbane ” > Tephris glaucobasis a0 56 ** Mackay ” 3% Homeeosoma (?) melanosticta 58 “‘Derby, W.A.” Brisbane Jocara thermoptera Bh 59 | ** Broken Hill ” LS Stericta aleuropa ia 59 | ** Mackay ” Townsville Crambus photoleuca Rah 51 Fe 3 It was hardly to be expected that Mr. Lower’s errors should have been confined to the comparatively few species, of which I examined the types; and I have been able to col- lect some further instances. Here, of course, demonstrative proof is not possible, but I have been careful to include only examples in which the circumstantial evidence is strong; in some of them it appears particularly strong. Of course, I may possibly be in error in one or two instances. Sy ¥ PusiisHep |8& NAME. REFERENCE. agar Ee aR = Nephopteryx chryserythra P.L.8.N.S.W., 1901, p. 662) ‘* Cooktown ” Nephopteryx monospila... aS ss ‘* Broken Hill” Cryptophaga hyalinopa...| Tr.R.S.S.A., 1901, p. 82 | ‘‘ Duaringa ” | Cryptophaga panleuca ... rn », p- 83 | ‘* Cooktown” Xylorycta pentachroa ... e 45 p- 83°) Broken Hall Onychodes (?) ee aa ag cs 1902, p. 228) ‘‘ Derby, W.A.”| | © Phycita leucomilta ; a 1903, p. 53 | ‘‘ Mackay ” re Heterographis molybdo- re phora : 5, ~ 93 p O7 | ** Derby, Weseuy ae Endotricha desmotona, ee oa 3 psG0 4 & Noorda metalloma -: ee ep? GD e Xylorycta philonympha.. “s »» p- 229) ‘‘ Broken Hill” Huzopherodes poliocrana “i 1905, p. 104 A * Hypographa cyanorrhea a 1903, p. 191) ‘* Alice Springs” Clupeosoma rhodea ie = 1905, p. 107| ‘‘ Mackay” J *If I am right in this identification, Mr. Lower’s description is inaccurate in some particulars. The very peculiar bidentate frontal process does not leave much room for doubt. Ron This list might, by a reasonable use of conjecture, be con- siderably enlarged. It is, of course, impossible to prove that the published locality in each or any instance in this list is erroneous. There is no inherent improbability that a Townsville insect may be taken in Mackay. Though it may be improbable that any given Townsville insect may be taken in Broken Hill, it can- not be claimed to be an impossibility. A few widely ranging species may be found in both localities. But these species would probably be known from many intermediate localities. The improbability in any case in the preceding lst may not of itself be sufficient to sustain a charge of inaccuracy, but the cumulative weight of a series of such improbabilities may be sufficient. The evidential value of this list must be taken to be supported by that of the preceding list. In both in- stances the locality (“Townsville”) is not recorded by Mr. Lower. Some of the insects in this second list I know to have been received by Mr. Lower from Townsville before the pub- lication of his descriptions. All cf them have been received from Townsville by myself. The following is an additional list :— b | = NAME, REFERENCE. | PUBLISHED Py LocaLiry. a ea eS) } = (none xenopis .. ...| Pr. R.S8.8.A., 1902, p. 227) “‘ Broken Hill ” |) Cryptophaga isoneura ...| b pp: Zao) <° Vietoria, 7 Taxeotis xanthogramma ...| a 1903, p. 186) ‘‘ Broken Hill; Melbourne” | a, Darantasia perichroa... >, p- 187) ‘‘ Stawell ” 8 Procometis periscia Be ke »» p- 200) ‘“‘ Melbourne” | { & Heliocausta episarca.... Sh ope 220 a = Pedois anthracias a, be 1902, p. 246) ‘‘ Stawell ” Lepidoscia melanogramma rr, 1903; py 7l:) na Procometis tetraspora .. | aA >, p- 199) ‘‘ Melbourne ” | J | oa This list, taken by itself, is of less value than the pre- ceding. It can only be regarded as corroborative. Some of the published localities may be correct. But I _ believe these species were received by Mr. Lower from Birchip before description, and the omission of this locality has the same sig- nificance as the omission of the ‘Townsville’ locality in the preceding lists. 198 NAME. | REFERENCE. |PUBLISHED Locatiry.!| True Locaniry. | =< Syntomis crem- | P.L.S.N.S.W.,| ‘ Irrapatana, South | North-western notherma vo 1900, p. 29 Australia” Australia This is a synonym of S. xanthosoma, Turn. (Tr. RS. S.A., 1898, p. 93) a species which is locally abundant in North-western Australia, from which it has been received from several collectors. I received my type from Mr. George Mas- ters, the Curator of the Macleay Museum, and if I am not mistaken Mr. Lower received an example from the same source before he published his description. I think the evidence T have given is sufficient to show that Mr. Lower’s localties are not always accurate, and that the scientific worker will be acting with commendable caution if he refuse to base any conclusions on such data except in so far as they have been corroborated by other observers. 199 RADIUM AT MOONTA MINES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. By S. Rapciirr (communicated by Prof. W. H. Bragg, M.A.). [Read September 4, 1906. | The ore deposits of Wallaroo and Moonta mines present many features of interest. Occurring as they do in rocks of extreme antiquity, and containing a very wide range of mineral species, as well as traces of many of the rare ele- ments, it seemed just possible that one of the radioactive ele- ments might be present in them. The present investigation was commenced in June, 1905, to see if this were the case, and as the results so far obtained are of considerable interest, it seemed desirable to give some preliminary account of them. In testing for radioactivity, I used a gold leaf electro- scope sufficiently sensitive to detect anything possessing an activity approaching one-hundredth of that of uranium oxide GUZO,). After a good deal of preliminary work, giving negative results, faint signs of activity were detected in one of the smelting work’s bye-products, and this activity was subse- quently traced back to some “concentrates” from Moonta. The fact that the bulk of the ore from Moonta mines passes through the crushing and concentrating plant before being forwarded to the smelting works rendered the identification of the active mineral a matter of some difficulty. Experi- ments on the concentrates indicated that the active mineral was probably of rather low specific gravity, and of such a character that it powdered readily when crushed. On put- ting the concentrates through a series of sieves of different degrees of fineness, the activity was found to concentrate to some extent in the finest product. Elutriation tests gave some indications as to the specific gravity. Further search resulted in a few specimens of activity, about one-twelfth of that of U,O;,, being found in a _ heap of rough ore from Moonta, and following up the clue afforded by their general physical character a small deposit of active ore was ulti- mately located in the upper workings of a shaft at Moonta Mines, known as Treuer’s’ Shaft. Shortly afterwards a sec- ond deposit was found in the workings connected with Tay- lor’s Shaft, also at Moonta Mines. The specimens from these two deposits are about equally active, but differ considerably in appearance and composition ; 200 the deposits, however, have this feature in common, that they both occur in the vicinity of cross-courses. The active mate- rial is apparently of secondary origin. So far, only a few pounds of ore showing any marked activity have been found. The Treuer’s Shaft ore is of moderately high specific gravity, is nearly black in colour, and as a general rule con- siderably decomposed. The copper contents are high, as will be seen from the analyses given subsequently, and most specimens are characterized by the presence of small crystals of smoky quartz. The active ore from Taylor’s Shaft resembles brown coal as much as anything else, it breaks readily with a lustrous conchoidal fracture; some specimens are of very low specific gravity (1°55), and are remarkable for the large amount of carbon they contain. Some considerable progress was made in the direction of isolating the active material before any detailed chemical analyses were made, and this preliminary work, done on a few grammes of ore, is of interest in that it determined the method for extracting and concentrating the activity from larger quantities of material. On decomposing the finely-ground roasted ore with aqua regia, the insoluble residue was found to be nearly inactive. The metals of the copper group were precipitated with sulphuretted hydrogen. With regard to this precipitate, on the only occasion when a measurement was made it showed distinct activity when first separated, but this diminished rapidly, and in twenty-four hours had practically disappeared. The bulk of the activity appeared to concentrate in the hydrate precipitate, thrown down on the addition of ammo- nia to the filtrate from the copper group, after the sulphur- etted hydrogen had been expelled and the iron in the solu- tion oxidized. The filtrate from this on being evaporated down yielded a residue, which showed very little activity. One lot of hydrate precipitate dissolved in nitric acid yielded a small amount of precipitate of high activity on the addition of ammonium oxalate, but this result requires confirmation. Further work having shown that the active constituent was not readily soluble in sulphuric acid, ten grammes of ore were treated as follows : — The ore was decomposed as before with aqua regia, the insoluble residue filtered off, and the solution evaporated to a small bulk; a few c.c. of sulphuric acid were added, and the evaporation continued on an air-bath until white fumes were freely evolved. The mass after cooling was taken up with water and heated for some time; a small amount of white precipitate 20] remained insoluble. This was washed repeatedly by decan- tation, dried, and weighed. Its weight was ‘O07 gramme. I determined its activity to be a little over twenty times that of uranium nitrate, but the measurement was necessarily only approximate. The sample was forwarded to Professor Bragg in March last, and he made its activity to be about nine times that of U,O,, so the two measurements agreed fairly well. The activity of this sample gradually increased to 12. I would hke to take this opportunity of expressing my thanks to Professor Bragg for the interest he has taken in this research throughout, and for the time and trouble he has expended in making measurements on active products. On receipt of Professor Bragg’s confirmation of the result that a radio-active element of higher activity than either thorium or uranium was present, more attention was given to the chemical composition of the ore. Mr. G. J. Rogers, A.R.C.S., the work’s chemist, found uranium in both Treuer’s and Taylor’s Shafts material to the extent of several per cent., his highest result being 4°74 per cent. U,O,. I under- stand that Dr. Cooke has also detected uranium in a sample of ore in his possession. Mr. Rogers also found that the Treuer’s ore contained a little carbon, and made an approxi- mate quantitive determination of its amount in a typical specimen from Taylor’s Shaft. Subjoined are his results on material from both shafts :— TREUER’S ORE. TAYLOR’S ORE. Cu HOO 7 Cu de: 20-07 Al,O.,Fe,O, Sos} Eixed Carbon, “2 10-0" ; GEO; me Be) ae i H Carbon... eel ac0) S - aelo-4 H,O ee: 5 Os0 Insoluble... ee a0) Insoluble ... er es Undet. (C H,O Zn lei) ree EMILE (The carbon includes some volatile hydro-carbon. ) All active specimens so far examined have been found to contain a little lead, but the amount is very small, much less than 1 per cent. A uranium determination was made on a very interesting specimen from Treuer’s Shaft. It is apparently ordinary copper pyrites on quartz, and on one side there is a mustard-yellow incrustation which closely re- sembles carnotite. A piece of the pyrites was broken off, and gave on analysis 1°91 of U,O;. The preliminary work on the concentration of the activity having given satisfactory re- sults, a kilogramme of ore from Treuer’s Shaft (activity 06) was worked up, the original scheme of treatment being only 202 slightly modified. The powdered ore, after being roasted at a dull red heat for some time, was treated with hot dilute sulphuric acid to remove the bulk of the copper and some of the iron. This sulphuric acid solution was filtered off from the insoluble residue, and most of the copper electrolyzed out of it, using a platinum anode. As the copper contents of the solution decreased, a small amount of precipitate separat- ed out. At the conclusion of the operation this was washed by decantation, and heated with dilute nitric acid to remove some metallic copper which had fallen from the cathode. After being again washed, this was dried, ignited at a low temperature, and tested. Its activity was about 5. Mean- time the residue insoluble in sulphuric acid was treated with nitric acid, and the portion remaining insoluble after this treatment was filtered off, washed, and tested. Its activity was very low, much less than that of the original ore. The solution was evaporated down, and as evaporation proceeded a light-coloured rather bulky precipitate separated out. This was filtered off from the solution before the concentration was sufficiently great for crystallization to take place on the solu- tion being allowed to cool. The evaporation of the solution was then continued to dryness on an air-bath. The mass was re-dissolved in water and allowed to stand for some time; a small amount of precipitate settled down from this. The solution was finally evaporated down again, a few c.c. of sul- phuric acid added, and the heating continued until fumes were freely given off. This treatment yielded a third lot of precipitate, but its activity was low, and the amount obtained negligible. Practically all the activity comes out with the first crop from the nitric acid solution. About °6 gramme of sulphate was obtained in this way from the kilogramme of ore, its activity being about 9. This sulphate is practically insoluble in hot or cold hydrochloric acid, and only very slowly soluble in nitric acid or aqua regia. It goes readily into solution, however, in warm nitric acid on the addition of a little chlorate of potash. The crude sulphate was therefore dissolved in this way, and freed from a little silica that had gone into solution on treating the ore with nitric acid; the sulphate was then re-precipitated. The washed sulphate was digested for some hours with warm ammonium acetate solution, and the greater part of it dissolved readily. The insoluble portion was thoroughly wash- ed, dried, and tested. Its activity was determined to be about 200; 02 gramme of this was forwarded to Professor Bragg for examination, and his measurements of the rate of decay of the induced activity from this indicated that the major part of the activity was due to radium. This purified sulphate is of low specific gravity, and is bluish-white in colour when 203 dry. On heating over a spirit-lamp the colour changes abruptly to pink, the change taking place below a red heat. The composition of this sulphate is a matter of great interest, as it obviously does not contain a great deal of barium. The amount available for experiment, so far, has been too small to admit of much detailed work being done on it, but a few experiments of a qualitative character have been made. Neither the weight nor the activity of this sulphate is much altered on treating it with a hot concentrated solution of caustic soda, but the washed product from this treatment is soluble in hydrochloric acid, giving a bright yellow solution. Part of this colour is due to iron, as a small amount of this is precipitated on the addition of ammonia. The addition of ammonium oxalate to the acid solution also results in a small amount of precipitate coming down after long standing. However, until enough of this sulphate has been collected to allow of quantitive work being done, it is impossible to say definitely how the activity will distribute itself, though I have good reason to believe that a product considerably more active than I have isolated so far can be got without much difficulty. In reviewing the results of this preliminary work two points call for special comment. The first of these is the invariable occurrence of carbon in the active ores. So far, every specimen showing any marked activity has been found to contain it, usually to the extent of several per cent. Enough work has not yet been done to settle the question definitely as to whether the carbon is present in the active ores only, or whether it is also distributed through the in- active material in the neighbourhood of the active deposit. The distribution of the activity in the ore is very sharply defined in some cases. A small hand specimen may show very marked activity on one side, and be almost inactive on the other. The carbon contents do not appear to bear any quantitive relation to the activity. Some of the most active specimens contain very little carbon, and, on the other hand, some of the carbonaceous ore from Taylor’s Shaft is only slightly active. Mr. Rogers has suggested, in view of these results, that, 1f it has not been done already, it might be well to try the Mansfield copper deposits for activity, as these also contain carbon. Burton’s observation, that the petroleum from a deep well in Ontario not only contained a large amount of radium emanation, but left a solid deposit on evaporation, which possessed permanent activity, is also of interest in this con- nection. The second feature to which attention may be drawn in the ease of the Moonta ores is the facility with which the 204 radium may be extracted from them, and the extent to which the activity can be concentrated without having to resort to fractional crystallization. The best specimens of ore possess an activity about one-twelfth of that of U,O,. The first active product which I obtain from them has an activity of about 10, or one hundred and twenty times that of the origi- nal ore. My second product has an activity of 200, over two thousand times that of the original ore. Pitchblende residues, possessing an activity of four or five, after a great deal of expensive chemical work, yield a radium barium chloride of activity 60, or only fifteen times that of the resi- dues, and fractional methods have then to be employed for further concentration. In considering this question of concentration of activity, the extremely small amount of radium present in the ore— roughly, one part in twenty million—must be taken into ac- count. This amount is so minute that it is improbable that it would be precipitated at all, even from solutions contain- ing sulphuric acid, in the absence of other insoluble sulphates. In working up the kilogramme of ore the volume of the solu- tion from which the active sulphate was finally separated out was not less than two litres, or forty million parts of so- lution to one of radium. The fact that the insoluble sulphate, which carries the radium down with it, consists principally of lead and not of barium sulphate, accounts for the readiness with which the activity can be further concentrated, as the removal of the lead sulphate, by means of ammonium acetate, appears to leave practically the whole of the activity in the small in- soluble residue. In the event of active ores being found in quantity at Moonta, this readiness with which the radium can be ex- tracted from them would, of course, be of economic import- ance, as it is questionable if the usual methods of separation could be applied with any prospect of profit to such low-grade material. In conclusion, I desire to express my indebtedness to the General Manager of the Company, Mr. H. Lipson Hancock, for his readiness to facilitate the research in every possible way, and to the Manager of the Smelting Works, Mr. G. C. McMurtry, for suggestions as to the practical treatment of the ore, and also for checking a number of measurements on active products. 205 NOTES ON SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MARINE MOLLUSCA, WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES.— PART IV. By Jos. C. Verco, M.D., Lond., F.R.C.8., Eng. [Read October 2, 1906. | Pirates OVS oro: 2s; Family PATELLIDA, Carpenter. Genus PaTEe.Lia, Linné. Helcioniscus tramoserica, Martyn. Patella tramoserica, Martyn, Univ. Conch., t. 16; Reeve, Conch. icon., Mon. Patella, 1854, pl. xiii. f. 27; Adcock, Hand- list of Aquatic Moll., S. Aust., 1893, No. 392; Pritchard and Gatliff, Proc. Roy. Soc., Vict., 1903, xv. (n. s.), p. 191; Helcion- iscus tramosericus, Martyn, Pilsbry., Tryon’s Man. Conch., 1891, xiii., p. 142, pl. Ixx., figs. 49, 50, 51, 52; Tate and May, Proc. iim soe., NiS-W., 1901, p., 4il: Patella diemenensis, Philippi, Zeit. f. Malak, 1848, p. 162; type locality, Hobart; Pilsbry., ''ryon’s Man. Conch., Xlll., p. 15d. Patelia variegata, Reeve, Conch. Icon., 1854, Mon. Patella, plidowt. 36,.a, 6, and ¢: Patella antipodum, K. A. Smith, Voy. Erebus and Terror, Moll., p. 4, t. 1, f. 25, 1874, teste Pilsbry., op. cit., p. 142. Pritchard and Gatliff, loc. cit., give Helcioniscus melanosto- mus, Pilsbry., Tryon’s Man. Conch., xiii., 1891, p. 151, pl. xxxu.., figs. 67 and 69 as a synonym. This is a very variable shell. The large yellowish or rose- tinged shell figured by Reeve is comparatively rare in South Australia. Some are wholly salmon-coloured without any rays, others have dark chestnut rays. There is a horn-coloured variety with yellow-brown rays, and fine black lines, mostly in pairs in some of the interspaces. The black lines may be quite wide, and be in all the interspaces, and they may be interrupted or reticulate. The variety variegata of Reeve is more common; of a yellowish tint, rather translucent, with more or less interrupted dark purplish rays and very irides- cent interior. These merge into a larger, more hemispherical form of stouter build, recalling Philippi’s description of P. diemenensis, which seems to be our usual variety, and these into one with very broad, dark, liver-coloured rays separated by narrow bands of white. Helcioniscus illibrata, spec. nov. Pl. x., figs. 6 to 14. Shell minute, rather solid, conical; apex blunt, scarcely anterior; posterior slope scarcely convex, anterior scarcely concave; no radial sculpture; some irregular growth lines. 206 Base not flat, sides concave; so that the shell rests on its ends; subcircular; margin simple. Apex pinkish, ground colour faint brownish pink. From just below the pink apex radiate four broad opaque white bands, which increase to eight. Dim.—Height, 26 mm.; major diam., 2°7 mm.; minor diam., 2°25 mm. Hab.—Spencer Gulf, dredged alive, depth unknown, 7 individuals. The radula contains about 36 consecutive segments, each consisting of two marginals, two outer laterals, and one inner lateral. 2(2°1°0°1:2)2. The marginals are thin and colour- less, with a long stem (fig. 8), the extremity expanded later- ally in a central direction (fig. 11), and reflected (fig. 10) ; the outer one the larger and including the inner (fig. 11). The outer laterals are short, stout, very closely approximated, hooked at the end, and brown (figs. 8, 11, 14). The inner laterals are less approximate, much longer (figs. 8, 11, 13), articulate at their base with the outer laterals (figs. 9, 12), but are separable from them. Obs.—I have called it a Helcioniscus. The dentition does not correspond with that of any of the Patellide, which seem all to have three marginals, whereas this appears to have only two. But for this its dentition is that of Helcioniscus, 3(2°1-:0°1'2°)3, and Patellina; but its branchial cordon is in- complete, and this would place it in Helceioniscus. The figures are not all drawn from the same radula, but from three radule obtained from three individuals of appar- ently the same species. Patella ustulata, Reeve. Patella ustulata, Rve., Conch. Icon., 1855, vol. viui., pl. xxx1i., f. 88, a, b; Ten.-Woods, P.R.S., Tasm., 1877 for 1876, p. 49; also 1878 for 1877, p. 45; Tate and May, Proc. Linn. Soc, N-S.W., 1901, vol. 26, pt. 3, p. 411; Pritchard and Gatliff, Proc. Roy. Soc., Vict., 1903, vol. xv. (nm. s.), p. 198; P. (scutellastra) ustulata, Rve., Pilsbry., in Tryon’s Man. Conch., vol. xiii., p. 101, pl. xxil., figs. I], 12. | Patella tasmanica, Ten.-Woods, Proc. Royal Soc., Tasm., 1876 for 1875, p. 157; also 1877 for 1876, p. 49; 1878 for 1877, p. 45; Tate and May, op. cit., p. 411; Pritchard and Gatliff, op. cit., p. 193. This species is not found in Adcock’s Handlist, and was only represented by a few poor specimens among our col- lectors until recognized by me at Port MacDonnell in Janu- ary of this year, when very many somewhat beach-worn specimens were found. 207 Patella aculeata, eeve. Patella uculeata, Rve., Conch. Icon., 1855, vol. viil., pl. xxxul., f. 90; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 221, No. 224 ; Ten.- Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc., Tasm., 1878 for 1877, p. 45; Brazier, Proc. Linn. Soc., N. S.W. 1883, p. 224; ‘Tate and May, Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W. _ 1901, vol. *xXV1., pt. 3, p. 410; ps and Gatliff, Proc. Roy. Soc., Vict., 1903, xv. (n. s.), pti. 2, 193; P. (scutellastra) aculeata, Rve., Pilsbry., Man, Conch., BoE xiil., p. 100, pl. 25, figs. 20, 31, pl. ixii, , USS. 7 ton de: Ip squamifera, Reeve, Conch. Icon., ‘pl. xxxll., f. 94; Angas, loc. ctt., No. 225; Pritchard and Gatliff, loc. cit, p 3. Found in numbers on the rocks at Port MacDonnell. As Tenison-Woods says of P. ustulata, Reeve, it lives “below low water” on the rocks on the ocean shore; it is commonly covered with nullipore, is very liable to erosion when old, and then is almost indistinguishable during life from Acmea alticostata, Angas. It may, if uneroded and not hidden, be almost black over the ribs and interspaces, or in the inter- spaces only, or in broken concentric rings, or of a wholly yellowish-brown tint. Internally some are uniformly white, but for a few brown smears at the apex; others have the spatula (which is never very distinct) tinged with deep chest- nut, or blotched with black, or with a bluish reflex. The in- terior may be horn-coloured, with an indistinct ring of white or greenish-blue between it and the spatula, or bluish with smears of brown. The margin may be light brown or dark brown or black or purple, with white sulci at the ribs. There may be bluish radii from summit to border. The ribs may be very prickly, with erect scales, or only rugose. The interstitial riblets may vary in the same shell from one to six, and in different individuals there may be only one or as many as six in each. Patella hepatica, Pritchard and Gatlif. Patella hepatica, Pritchard and Gatliff, Proc. Roy. Soc., Vict., 0S) velaxy. (5 s:)? Dpto, p.LoA: Acmea striata, Pilsbry., (non Quoy and Gaimard), Man. Conch., vol. xiii., p. 47, pl. xxxv. . figs. 27, 282,29; Taken deat on beach at ae MacDonnell. Obs.— the last three species resemble one another, and differ from the P. tramoserica series in being crenulated along the inner margin. I found all three at Port Mac- Donnell; P. aculeata ‘alive on the rocks, P. ustulata and P. harris: on the beach. But I found forms intermediate be- tween them, so that it became impossible to say whether they should ‘be placed in one species or the other. In fact, I had grouped all together as P. ustulata, and made two varie- ties—at the one extreme with marked ridges, which were 208 prickly, and at the other with only small uniform crowded ribs. Later, these were found to be on the one hand more prickly and costate than specimens of P. aculeata, from New South Wales, and on the other to be identical with P. hepa- tica, from Victoria. I feel confident that a larger series will unite these three as conspecific, and they will be called P ustulata, Reeve. Patella chapmani, Ten.-Woods. Patella chapmani, Ten.-Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc., Tasm., 1875 for 1875,, Po lod > -Pisbry. in Tryon, Man. Conch., 1891, vol. xili., p. 101; Pritchard and Gatliff, Proc. Roy. Soc., Vict., 1903 vol. a (n. s.), p. 193; Tate and May, Proc. Linn. Soc. , 1901, vol. RVs, 410: Acmoa alba, Ten.-Woods, Froc. Roy. Soc., Tasm., 1877 for 1876, pp. loos 1a6= Paulsbry., 1891, op. cit., p. 5A 5 pk xlii., figs. 76-78: Tate and May, loc city; Pritchard and Gatliff, loc. cit. Tate and May, loc. cit., ‘identify, it with P. stellaeformis, Rve., Conch. Icon., f. 48. It is rare in S. Aust., but has been faken at Port MacDonnell (W. T. Bednall) and at Roy ston Head, Yorke Peninsula. Genus Nacretua, Schumacher. Nacella parva, Angas. Nacella parva, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1878, pl. liv., f. 12; “Hab., Holdfast Bay and Aldinga Bay ; parasitic on seaweed ;’ Adcock, Handlist of Aquatic Moll. 1893, p., 9; Nond9S aie ‘ep been found as far east as Aldinga Bay, ‘and as far west a3 Fowler’s Bay. It appears to be of limited “habitat, for Pritchard and Gatliff do not record it in their Victorian catalogue, nor Tate and May in their Tasmanian Census. I! have not seen it from W. Australia. Nacella compressa, spec. nov. PI. viii., figs. 11, 12. Shell narrowly elongate, elliptical; sides straight, par- allel; ends round. Apex overhangs one end (which is con- cave vertically, and slightly narrower than the other), barely oblique slightly to the left of the midline. Dorsum convex, rising higher than the nucleus. Sides nearly vertical; base flat, margin simple. Concentric growth lines, and micro- scopic radial scratchings. Dim.—Length. 5 mm.; ‘breadth, 1°6 mm.; height, 1°25 mm. Locality.—Investigator Strait, 15 fathoms, 6 dead. Diagnosis. ae shape separates it from V. parva, Angas, which measures 5°6 mm. by 2°8, and is therefore twice as wide for the same length. It may be only a variant of this species, cramped by residence on very narrow zostera or other growth. Nacella crebristriata, Verco. Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Aust., 1904, vol. xxviii., p. 144, pl. xxvi., figs. 20, 21. 209 The only habitat given was South Australia, but Tate’s shells almost certainly came from Moonta Bay, as they were in a tube with others which 1 have described in this paper as Scutellina alboradiata, sp. nov., and which have been ob- tained in numbers at Moonta Bay by Mr. Zietz. Nacella stowz, spec. nov. Pl. x., figs. 4, 5. Shell oval, thin, translucent, narrower in front, about half as wide as long, its height less than half its greatest width. Apex at the anterior sixth, simple, non-spiral. Numerous fine diverging axial striz, with crowded minute sublenticular accremental striz. Apex red; sixteen equidistant, pink, in- creasing radial rays, each composed of two to four lines: white opaque blotches, irregular in shape behind the apex, somewhat concentrically arranged; a central linear one just behind the apex. Spatula shaped as in Patella; fairly dis- tinct, margined in front opaque white; behind this pinkish- brown, which extends backwards in two shrrt diverging flames ; between these a white opaque flame extends back from the apex of the shell. The rest of the spatula is mottled with wavy, opaque, white blotches. Dim.—Length, 5°3 mm.; breadth, 3°7 mm.; height, 2°1 mm. Locality.—Shell sand, beach, Port MacDonnell, and King’s Point, Encounter Bay (Miss Stow). Family ACM AID ZA. Genus Acmma, Eschscholtz. Acmea octoradiata, Hutton. Patella octoradiata, Hutton, Cat. Marine Moll. of New Zea- land, 1873, p. 44; Acmea saccharina, Linné, var. perplexa, Pils- bry., Tryon’s Man. Conch., 1891, vol. xiii., p. 50, pl. xxxvi., figs. 69, 70, 71; Acmea perplezxa, Pilsbry., Taylor, Nautilus, 1892, vol. vi., p. 89; Acmea saccharina, Iinné, Tate and May, Proc, Linn. Soc., N.S.W., 1901, vol. xxvi., nt. 3, p. 411; Patella perpleza, Pilsbry., Pritchard and Gatliff, Proc. Roy. Soc., Vict., 1903, voi. xv., pt. 2, p. 194; Acmea octoradiata, Hutton, Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., 1904, pt. 1, p. 188. This is very rare in South Australia. It has been found on the beach at Wallaroo Bay and at Port MacDonnell. Acmea alticostata, Angas. Patella alticostata, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1865, p. 56, pl. ii., f. 11; type locality, Port Lincoln ; Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., 1904, pt. 1, p. 189. From Port MacDonnell, along the whole coastline to Western Australia, and recorded from Tasmania, Victoria, and New South Wales. 210 Obs—Angas, in Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 221, made his name a synonym of Patella costata ( Lottia costata), Sowerby, Moll., Beechey’s Voy., t. 39, f. 2, 1839; and as Acmea cos- tata, Sow., his shell is referred to by Ten.-Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1877, p. 50, and op. cit., 1878, pp. 44 and 45; Pilsbry, in Tryon’s Man. Conch., vol. xiii., p. 51, pl. xxxv1., f. 72-77; Adcock, Handlist of Aquatic Moll., 8. Aust., 1893, p- 9, No. 394; Tate and May, Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S. Wales, 1901, vol. xxvi., part 3, p. 411; Pritchard and Gatliff, Proc. Roy. Soe:, Vict.,.1903, vol..xv. (m:s.), part 2, p.;194) (Bat Hedley affirms them to be different species, /oc. cit. It may reach the size of 2 in. long, 1°77 broad, and 8 high. It is nearly always narrower anteriorly, sometimes markedly so; very rarely it is quite elliptical. The height may be 7 in. in a shell only 11 in. long, or only °5 in 1°6, just twice as high proportionally. The shape may be acutely conical and straight-sided or flat-topped and convex-sided. The ribs vary from 14 to 27, increasing by intercalation with age. The interstices may be prettily ornamented with close- set fuscous crescentic lines, convex towards the apex; these may climb the sides of the ribs, or cross them ; they are more marked in beach-worn shells. The interior may be wholly white, including the margin ; even the spatula may be scarcely tinted or distinguishable. The latter may be blackish-brown, or of any lighter tint of brown, its anterior and posterior parts being usually much darker. The margin may have no colouration, or very dark spots may mark all or some of the interspaces between the ribs. In addition to these a light- brown band may completely margin the inner border, or this may be found alone of any darker tint up to a purplish black. More or less rusty colouration may be found between the spatula and the margin, generally in blotches. Acmzea marmorata, Ten.-Woods. Proc,, Roy. Soc. ~Tasm., 1876 for 1875, pp- 156,.cor wae 1877 for 1876, p. 53; Pilsbry., Tryon, Man. Cosene 1891, vol. Xlll., p. 52, pl. xlii., figs. 66-70; Adcock, Handlist Aquatic Moll., S. Aust., 1893, p. 9, No. 399; Tate and May, Proc. Linn. Soe:, N.S.W., 1901, vol. xxvi., pt. 3, p. 412; Pritchard and Gatliff, Proc. Roy. Soc., Vict., 1903, vol. xv. (n.is.), pt. 2, p. 197. Patella latistrigata, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1865, p. 154, and p. 186, No. 196a; Adcock, loc. cit., 1893; Pritchard and Gatliff, loc. cit.; Helcioniscus latistrigata, Angas, Pilsbry., loc. cit:, p. 143: Locahity.—From Port MacDonnell to Port Victoria, Spencer Gulf. Obs.—My largest individual from Port MacDonnell measures 24 mm. long, 22°5 wide, and 10 high. The alti- 211 tude varies very greatly from 3°5 mm. in a shell 17 mm. long to 85 mm. in one 18 mm. long. When on the rocks they may be so rough and acutely costate as to be mistaken for A. alticostata, Angas. Usually with a flat base, it may rest on its ends, with the sides of the border much raised. As vari- ations from the description by Ten.-Woods, the spatula may be white, with some brown clouding in its centre, the interior of the shell being a light brown, or the spatula may be black and the rest of the interior white except for black articula- tions of the border. The most constant feature in the orna- ment is the dark dotting of the tae but in the pallid examples this is very slight. Adcock makes P. gealex, Angas, a synonym, and Pritch- ard and Gatliff give it priority, and A. marmorata as a synonym: but Angas’s shell is a distinct species. P. latistri- gata, Angas, from Aldinga, is a half-grown example, with broad radial stripes. Acmza calamus, Crosse and Fischer. Patella calamus, Crs. and ae Journ. de Conch., 1864, p. 348 ;; 1865, p. 42, pl. i., figs. 8; Tate and May, Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., 1901, vol. xxvi. ae 3. p. 412; Acmea ‘calamus, Crs. and F., Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc. , Lond., 1865, i 186, No. 200; Pilsbry., Tryon, Man, Conch., isl, vol. X11. d4, pl. XXXVil. figs. 3 4; Adcock, Handlist Aquatic Moll., S. eae 1893, p. 9, No. 395 ; Pritchard and Gatliff, Proc. Roy. ” Soe., Vict., 1903, vol. ve In. s.), Pista, eel Ore Locality ae type, St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia. I have taken it at Port MacDonnell, and dredged it from Back- stairs Passage to Spencer Gulf, alive, at all depths from 5 to 17 fathoms. Most abundant in the shallower water. Tate in Trans. Roy. Soc., 8. Aust., May, 1897, thought it would prove to be a synonym of dcmaa conoidea, Quoy and Gaimard, and this suspicion seems to have been con- firmed, as he lists it thus in his Tasmanian Census in 1901. He speaks of «Al. conoidea, in 1897, as though he had seen Quoy’s type, and as having a circular aperture and five radial threads. But Quoy seems to have only had one shell collected at King George’s Sound. This Deshayes had not seen (Anim. S. Vert., 2nd edit., vol. vil., p. 551), and Quoy does not describe it as having any radial threads, but as being “obtuse and rounded at the apex”: this 4. ca/amus never is, either alive or dead or rolled. The dimensions given by Crosse are 12°5 mm. by 10 by 6, but they reach 16°5 by 14 by 75. The shell may be wholly white within and without, or the apical part may be white and the rest ornamented, either with tiny brown spots, more or less abundantly and irregularly scattered over the surface, / 212 or only as regular dots around the inner margin, or as short radial brown lines at the internal periphery, or as a continu- ous brown border. Some are uniformly chestnut brown. One form has abundant colour-marking, which may begin at the apex as six to eight rays, tending to break up into tessella- tions as they widen. ‘This variety is often slightly polygonal instead of round, the angles being in the white rays; but it grades into the ordinary form. Acmza flammea, Quoy and Gaimard. Patelloida flammea, Quoy and Gaimard, Voy. Astrolabe, Zool., vol. i11., 1834, p. 354, pl. lxxi., figs. 15 to 24; Lamarck, Anim. s, Vert. (2nd edition, Deshayes, etc.), vol. vii., p. 552, 1836; Tate and May; Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S: W., 1901, vol..=xxviQ pia yen: 411; Ten.-Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc., Tasm., 1877 for 1876, p. 51. Acmea fammea, Wuoy and G., Pilsbry., Tryon, Man. Conch., 1891, vol. xiul., p. 57, pl. xxxvii., figs. 78-83; Pritchard and Gat- lift, Prec. Rey. Soc.,, Vict:; 1903, vol. xv: (n.s.); pt; 2p ie Acmea crucis, Ten.-Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc., Tasm., 1877 for 1876, p. 52; and 1878 for 1877, p. 53; Pilsbry., op. cit., p. 58, pl. xxxvil., figs. 12, 18, and 17, 19; Adcock, Handlist Aquatic Moll., S. Aust., 1893, p. 9, No. 400; Tate and May, loc. cit., p. 411; Pritchard and Gatliff, loc. cit., p. 196. mS Patella jacksoniensis, Reeve, Conch. Icon., vol. vili., 1855, pl. xxmix., figs) 127, a, and b; ‘Tate and May, “loc. cit. tamelee Pritchard and Gatliff, loc. cit., p. 196; Tectura jacksoniensis, Reeve, Pilsbry., loc. cit., p. 58, pl. xlii., figs. 71-75, and var mizta, Reeve, ‘toc: ch. pls xxxve, figs, "32533: Patella gealei, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1865, p. 57 and p. 186, No. 198; not Adcock, loc. cit., p. 9, No. 399; Acmea gealei. Angas, Tate and May, loc. cit., p. 412; not Pritchard and Gatliff, loc. cit., p. 197. ce ; Patella mixta, Reeve, Conch. Icon., 1855, vol. vill., pl. xxxix., figs. 129, a and b; Pritchard and Gatliff, loc. cit., p. 196. The type locality of A. fammea, Q. and G., is Hobart- town, and the type dimensions are small, 5 lines by 4 by 24 high. The type locality of A. crucis, Ten.-Woods, is Tasmania, and its dimensions are 31 mm. by 31 by 19 high. Ten.- Woods described this as a distinct species, but Tate and May and Pritchard and Gatliff unite them. Ten.-Woods refers to Patella cruciata, Linné, as distinct from his A. crucis, because the former has ‘‘a white cross on a brown ground,” instead of a brown cross on a white ground, and Pritchard and Gatliff agree. But Tate and May unite them, and make A. cruciata, Lin., the specific name, and the other two synonyms. I keep them distinct. Ten.-Woods also leaned to the identity of A. fammea, Quoy and Gaim- ard, and A. suwbundulata, Angas, and Pritchard and Gatliff unite them. Shells collected by me and identified by Angas’s type in the British Museum have not been yet graded into Quoy’s species, and are regarded as distinct. 213 A. jacksoniensis, Reeve (type locality, Port Jackson), is represented in Tate’s collection of South Australian shells, but I am unable to separate them from A. flammea, Quoy and Gaimard, and agree with Pritchard and Gatliff, who unite them. The type locality of P. mixta, Reeve, is Port Phillip, Victoria. Tate and May make jacksoniensis, Reeve, a syno- nym of A. gealei, Angas, as a distinct species, owing to the pre-occupation of Reeves name by Lesson. The two type shells of P. gealei, in the _ Bri- tish Museum, from South Australia, presented by Mr. G. F. Angas, are 24 mm. by 21, regularly roundly oval in the base, with an almost perfectly regular thin margin, with no radial ribbing, nor any radiating dark colour bands. I think they are large albino variants of A. crucis, Ten.- Woods. A. gealei, Angas, was formerly regarded in South Aus- tralia as a synonym of dA. marmorata, Ten.-Woods, No. 399, Adcock’s Handlist ; and Pritchard and Gatliff gave it priority and made the latter the synonym; but examination of the type shows absolute non-identity. The shell is certainly very variable. One form has numerous well-marked radial riblets, and a sharp apex, and may be regarded as the typical 4. fammea, Quoy. A second has no radial riblets, or only obsolete, is a larger shell, and is the typical A. crucis, Ten.-Woods. A third has compara- tively few radial costz, which are broad and rude, and some- what corrugate the surface, and is the Patella jack- soniensis, Reeve. A fourth is very like the _ second, but differs in having no radial colour markings, or radial ribs, and is the A. gealez, Angas. But all four can be graded into one another in continuous series. The comparative height varies, some shells being quite conical, and others very flat. The colour ornament may consist solely of the dark spatula, or a distinct broad Maltese cross may be present, or each arm may be broken up into two or more brown lines, or brown lines may intervene between them, or only brown radii may occur, or the ornament may be a_ brown- and-white tessellation or reticulation at the apex only, or all over the shell, or combined with the cross. The inner border may be wholly white, or have a brown border, or be articulated brown and white, or show only the four broad ends of the brown cross. Among all the specimens collected I have not found one coloured like A. cruciata, Linn., with the white rays at the centre of the front and back and sides, and the brown between. 214 Acmzea conoidea, (Juoy and Gaimard. Patelloida conoidea, Q. and G., Voy. Astrolabe, Zool., vol. lil., 1834, p. 355, pl. Ixxi., figs. 5 to 7; Lamarck, Anim.'s. Vert. (2nd edition, Deshayes, etc.), vol. vii., p. 551. Acmea conoidea, Q. and G., Angas, Proc. Zool Soc., Lond., 1865, p. 186, No. 199; Pilsbry., Tryon, Man. Conch., vol. xiii., 1891, p. 53, pl. xxxvii., figs. 84, 85; Adcock, Handlist Aquatic Moll:, S.-Aust., 1893; p. 9; No. 396; Tate and’ May, ‘Proe? Sinn: Soc., N.S.W., 1901, vol. xxvi., pt. 3, p. 412; Pritchard and Gat- liff,; Proc. Roy. Soc.; Vict., 1903, vol. xv. (n. s.), pt. 2, p. 195: Type locality, King George’s Sound, Western Australia, taken alive, only one example. Tate regarded it as conspecific with A. calamus, Crosse and Fischer, and made this a synonym, but this is a mistake. Port MacDonnell, on rocks above low water. Acmea subundulata, Angas. Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1865, p. 155, and p. 186, No. 202; Ten.-Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc., Tasm., 1877 for 1876, p. 52; Adcock, Handlist Aquatic Moll., S. Aust., 1893, p. 9, No. 398; Pritchard and, Gatliff, Proc. Roy..Soc., Vict., 1903; vol. xv. (n; s.), pts 2, Oeeeks]oy Tectura subundulata, Angas, P.Z.S., 1867, p. 220, No. 218. Angas’s type locality was Port Lincoln. I have dredged several alive at seven fathoms in St. Vincent Gulf: in Hard- wicke Bay, three miles off shore; and in Eastern Cove, Kan- garoo Island, and collected it on the ocean beach, Kangaroo Island, and at Normanville. These have been identified from Angas’s types in the British Museum by me. Ten.-Woods, loc. cit., was doubtful if it would not be found identical with A. fammea, Quoy, and Pritchard and Gatliff, Joc. cit., record it as a synonym of Quoy’s species; but, after comparison with a large number and various forms of this variable shell, I cannot recognize it as conspecific. (?) Acmzea punctata, Quoy and Gaimard. Patelloida punctata, Q. and G., Voy. Astrolabe, Zool., vol. Mesa oOo, ply xxi, fies. 40, 42: The type locality is King George’s Sound, Western Aus- tralia. I have two shells dredged, of almost the same size, 6 mm. by 4 by 2°25, with the apex carried well forward, and slightly antecurved, exceedingly finely closely radially striat- ed under the lens, the base level, inner margin smooth. White or yellowish externally, with two circles of light-brown spots, about 9 in a circle. Internally white; one shows the spatula distinctly in light brown. Quoy describes his shell as smooth, and figures it with three rows of spots. It differs from a young A. calamus, Crosse and Fischer, in being less round, with its apex more excentric and ante- 215 curved, and in having much finer and more crowded striz. It differs from 4A. suwbundutaia, Angas, in being less elevated, less orbicular, with a sharper and more antecurved apex, and in its colour. Acmea septiformis, (Juoy and Gaimard. Patelloida septiformis, Quoy and Gaimard, Voy. Astrolabe, Zool., 1834, vol. ili., p. 362, pl. Ixxi., figs. 43, 44; Lamarck, Anim. s. Vert. (2nd edition, Deshayes, etc.), 1836, vol. vul., p. 550; Tectura septiformis, QY. and G., Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1867, p. 220, No. 219; Acmea septiformis, Y. and G., Ten.-Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc., Tasm., 1877, p. 50; Pilsbry., Tryon, Man. Conch., vol. xiii., 1891, p. 55, pl. xxxvii., figs. 98, 94; Adcock, Handlist Aquatic Moll. S. Aust., 1893, p. 9, No. 397; Tate and May, Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., 1901, vol. xxvi., p. 412; Pritchard and Gat- liff, Proc. Roy. Soc., Vict., 1903, vol. xv. (n. s.), pt. 2, p. 195. A. scabrilirata, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1865, p. 154, and p. 186, No. 201; Pilsbry., Tryon, Man. Conch., 1891, vol. xiii. p. 56; Pritchard and Gatliff, lot. cid. A. petterdi, Ten.-Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc., Tasm., 1877, p. 155; Pilsbry., op. cit., p. 54; Tate and May, loc. cit.; Pritchard and Gatliff, loc. cvt. Obs.—Tate and May say A. petterdi is the senile form. The shell varies in altitude from 18 mm. long, and 4°5 mm. high, to 14 mm. long and 6 mm. high. Some have a cap occupying up to one-third or one-fourth of their size, with comparatively steep sides, with an abrupt assumption of the ordinary depressed shape, looking like one acm@a mounted on another. The base is in some uneven, resting on the front and back edges possibly because their roost was not flat. The radial lire may be marked from apex to base, and numer- ous, or very few, or absent, even when not rolled or eroded. The surface may be uniformly horn-coloured, or white, with radial black-brown widening bands, or with reticulated or roundish tessellated markings. The inner margin may be articulated brown and white, or have a uniform brown mar- gin or be wholly white. The interior may be whitish, opaque glistening white, bluish-white, or with the outer col- our showing through. The spatula may be dark chestnut- brown and very distinct, or almost invisible. The surface is generally in very good condition, but some are markedly pitted with round shallow holes, especially about the summit, evidently due to boring by molluscs, and not to erosion. Locality.—From Port MacDonnell to Fowler’s Bay; rather common. ; Acmza cantharus, Reeve. Patella cantharus, Reeve, Conch. Icon., vol. viii., 1855, pl. xl., f. 131; Pritchard and-Gatliff, Proc. Roy. Soc., Vict., 1903, 216 vol. xv. (n. s.), pt. 2, p. 195; Acmaa cantharus, Reeve, Pilsbry., Tryon, Man. Conch., 1891, vol. xiii., p. 55, pl. xxxvii., figs. 1, 2; Tate and May, Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., 1901, vol. xxvi., p. 412. The type locality is New Zealand. Tate and May list it as a distinct svecies. Pritchard and Gatliff cite it as a syno- nym of A. septiformis, Quoy and Gaimard. A shell from Port MacDonnell, collected in numbers, is probably Reeve’s shell. A. sentiformis, Quoy and Gaimard, is also abundant there. The two forms may run into each other, but the intermediate grades have not been taken. It is larger, much less depress- ed, narrower anteriorly, with the apex much nearer the front margin. It is very greatly and roughly eroded, and does not show any radial striz on the uneroded vart. The coloura- tion consists of radial brown or back stripes, varying in num- ber and width. Internally they are very dark, a blotchy brown or a uniform blackish brown, lighter or whitish at the summit. The margin is articulated brown and white. The muscle scar is very plain as a white horseshoe, and here the shell is translucent, especially at the anterior part. Possibly they may be senile examples of A. sentiformis, though their marked erosion contrasts strongly with the usually well-pre- served surface of these. Family FISSURELLID i. Genus EMARGINULA, Lamarck. Emarginula superba, Hedley. Records of the Aust. Mus., 1906, vol. vi., pt. 3, p. 216, pl. Xxxvil., figs. 7, 8; type locality, 250 fathoms, east of Port Jackson. My specimens have been identified by Mr. Hedley from his type. His shell was bleachd, so to his description the fol- lowing may be added:—Colour light pinkish-brown, deepest over the expanded posterior surface, gradually fading anteri- orly towards the slit. It is deeper in concentric rings, which leave blotches on the bounding lamina of the slit fasciole ; nine are counted in the lower two-thirds. Alternate primary ribs are white from apex to margin, and are separated by one primary and two secondary ribs, which are coloured. The anterior four of these white rays on each side of the slit are separated only by the one rib, the secondaries being absent. The colouring of the shell confirms the propriety of the name “superba.” Individuals vary. Mr. Hedley’s figure is almost uni- formly elliptical. Some South Australian examples are much expanded posteriorly, being broadest on a level with the apex, and thence are attenuated anteriorly. These are also much flatter towards the margin posteriorly than the type. Others are elliptical, but less flat posteriorly than the type, and ANT rather more compressed laterally, and have more crowded and erect imbricating concentric scales. Locality.—90 fathoms, off Cape Jaffa, 10: 13G fathoms, 17; 300 fathoms, 1; 100 fathoms, off Beachport, 6; 110 fath- oms, 3; 150 fathoms, 3; 200 fathoms, 1. Some were quite recent, many were broken, all were dead. Family SCUTELLINID, Dall. Genus ScUTELLINA, Gray. Scutellina calva, spec.nv. Pl. viii, figs. 9, 10. Shell minute, thin, conical, white; apex nearly central, directed away from the opening of the muscle scar ; anterior slope uniformly convex; posterior concave, just below the apex, then barely convexly sloping to the margin. Summit smooth, but for some accremental lines, then with crowded, well-marked axial striz, distinctly granulated with concentric strie. Base oval, margin level and simple. Dim.—Height, 2 mm.; major diam., 2°8 mm.; minor diam., 1°8 mm. Locality.—300 fathoms, off Cape Jaffa, 31 examples, dead; 130 fathoms, 9 dead. Diagnosis from Helcioniscus illibrata, Verco.—It is less solid, has a curved apex, flat base, axial lire, no colour mark- ings. Obs.—I have called this little shell provisionally a Sew- tellina, because its apex is directed away from the opening of the muscle-scar; though its summit is nearly central. Its specific name indicates its bald apex. Scutellina alboradiata, spec. nov. Pl. vii, figs. 1, 2. Shell minute, thin, depressed conic. Apex simple, sub- central, slightly anterior, directed slightly away from the opening of the muscle-scar. Base level, oval, somewhat nar- rowed anteriorly. About eighteen very low, rounded, scarcely perceptible ribs or radial undulations, and microscopic accre- mental strie. Internal surface radially scratched. The rik» are ornamented with opaque white radii, rather wider than the diaphanous interspaces. Dim.—Height, 2°2 mm.; maj. diam., 33 mm.; min. diam., 2°4 mm. Locality.—Moonta Bay, Spencer Gulf: collected in num- bers in shell sand by Mr. A. Zietz. Several individuals were in Tate’s collection, labelled ‘‘Scutellina, sp., S.A.,” in the same tube as shells which I lately described as Nacella crebri- striata. So probably the locality of WV. crebristriata is also Moonta Bay. 218 Diagnosis.—From Nacella crebristriata, Verco; it ig less solid, more rounded, has its apex less excentric, and fewer and less valid ribs. From Scutellina calva, it 1s narrowed anteriorly, has no crowded axial lire, is white-ribbed. From Cocculina tasmanica, Tate and May, ae apex 1s more central and leans backwards. _ Obs.—In some examples the opaque radii are much nar- rower, or a wide and a narrow one may alternate. The opaque lines are not continuous, but composed of arrow-heads, with their points towards the margin, or of zig-zags, or dots. Its generic location is somewhat. dubious. Family TROCHID #. Genus BasiLissa, Watson. Basilissa radialis, Tate; var. bilix, Hedley, sp. RES Phisse ae) i: Seguenzia radialis, Tate, Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., xii.; 1890, pe to2, pl wixe, f. Astele bilia, Hedley, Records. Austr. Mus., vi., pt. 2, 1905, pa 48afld: Shell depressedly conical, of seven and a quarter whorls, including a homostrophe smooth protoconch of one and a quarter whorls. Spire somewhat gradate. In the first whorl one marked spiral rib; in the rest two becoming gradually more valid and distant. In the third whorl a secondary threadlet between these: in the fourth a _ threadlet between the first spiral and the upper suture; in the fifth two terti- aries, one between each spiral and the secondary threadlet. In the sixth, or body-whorl, another spiral rib appears below and nearly equal to the lower of the two spirals; it forms the periphery and the suture, and, separated from its fellow by a furrow, gives an apparent canaliculate suture. The base is flatly rounded with eight equi-distant, nearly equal, concen- tric rounded spiral lire, as wide as their interspaces. The surface is cancellated by crowded narrow erect lamellz, cross- ing the spirals and sinuous, but not following exactly the outline of the labrum, and ending at the outer basal, |, lira. Crowded radial striz cancellate’ and granulate the base, and extend to the lira nearest the umbil- icus. Aperture obliquely quadrate, with a large posterior sinus in the outer lip, rather deeper than wide: a second at the baso-labral junction, beginning at the third spiral rib, about as deep as the infra-sutural one, and rather wider: and a third shallow and wide at the baso-columellar angle. Colu- mella oblique, concave, expanded towards the umbilicus, trun- 219 cate anteriorly. Inner lip thin from columella to posterior sinus, smooth. Interior of aperture smooth. Umbilicus deep, small, margined with oblique plicate tubercles. Dim.—Alt., 3°6 mm. ; diam., 3°4 mm. Locality.—Shell figured and described (in Dr. Verco’s collection), with four others, dredged, dead, 130 fathoms, off Cape Jaffa ; 300, off Cape Jaffa, seven, immature and broken, and six large and complete, one quite recent. Obs.—This shell was figured for description as a new species, but Mr. Hedley recognized it as his A stele biluv, which was an immature shell, and did not plainly reveal the aper- tural sinuses. He suggested its location in Watson’s genus Basilissa, as emended by Dall, in Bull. Mus. of Comp. Zool., 1889, pp. 383-385. With this it corresponds closely. One individual shows very well the nacreous central claw-like pro- cess in the labrum, somewhat inflected, to which Dall refers. It very probably belongs to the section Aneistrobasis, Dall, though none of my shells show the internal thickening and grooving of the outer lip; but Dall points out that this char- acter only occurs in adult shells. Sequenzia radials, Tate, an Eocene fossil from Muddy Creek, the type of which is in the Tate Museum of the Uni- versity of Adelaide, has the two spirals which form the canaliculate suture closer together than our recent form; it has a prominent spiral threadlet above the second spiral rib and the first spiral rib is absent; so the fossil is less gradate, and the whorls are more sloping, and have more nearly uni- form spirals. The base is flatter, the perforation and its bor- dering tubercles are larger. Dall, however, in discussing B. costulata, Watson, and var. depressa, Dall, notes the great variability of abyssal shells in general, and of that species in particular. The same consideration probably holds good in our shell, which has therefore been made only a variety of Tate’s fossil species. y One individual with a perfect aperture shows the labrum to be very irregular, owing to the projection at the border, of every spiral rib and threadlet, into a minute marginal tooth, proportional to its size as a spiral, except those which end in the denth of the two labral sinuses. ; Genus Scana, Klein. Scala nepeanensis, Gatliff. Broce Noy. coc... Vict.) A90R. wok a xis (1. Soo boot , p. 1. Pl. 1, fig. 5. ‘‘Shell sand, Ocean Beach, Point Nepean.” One example has been found in dredge-siftings, depth and locality not noted, probably St. Vincent Gulf. 220 Family TRICHOTROPID 4. Genus Lippistes, Montfort. Lippistes separatista, Dillwyn, sp. PI. ix., figs. 6 to 9. Turbo helicoides, Gmelin, Syst. Nat., p. 3598, No. 109; Turbo separatista, Dillwyn, Conch. Cab., vol. xi) ps 298, pl. -chegs i iiese 1589, 1590; Cat. Recent Shells, ii., p. 867, 1817: Wood, Ind. Test. p. 151, plex, a lee, 1825 ; ee chemnitzii, A. Adams, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1850, 45; Tryon, Man. Conch., rp aetnap: Wie: FOE oye a es 70: Rep. Ghaeear ZLools, xveeu: 428 : aah tricarinata, Brazier, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1877, , p. 313; Separatista separatista, Dillwyn, Hedley, Records Aust. Mee LV NO: yo. LOO, pe aG: pl. X yada. f, 22 ; Lippistes separa- tista, Dillwyn, Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W. Bee p. 24; Trichotropis blainvilleanus, Petit, Journ. "de cies 1851. P. DOP pls ia, tp + DE ryon. Man. Conch.., TSSi, axe 45, vl, vill. 69; Wiehobeeen gabrieli, Pritchard and Gath, Proc. bgt Vict., 1889, p. 183, pl. xx., f. 7; ibid, 1900, vol. xiii., p. ae. Some years ago five shells were dredged by me, all dead, one in 134 fathoms in Investigator Straits, off Point Marsden, Kangaroo Island; two in 16-18 fathoms, Backstairs Passage, and two in deep water, exact station unrecorded. This form was named and described by me in manuscript as a new species chiefly because its whorls were curiously polygonal, with a tubercle on the carinez at each angle. See pl. ix., fig. 6. But in 1899 I had the opportunity at the Natural History collection of the British Museum in London, of comparing it with various species of the Trichotroyide, and Mr. E. A. Smith kindly assisted me. Lippistes helicoides, Gmelin, from the Philippine Islands, with four shells on the tablet, were identical. On the back of the tablet carrying them was the following :—‘“Turbo heli- cordes, Gmelin,” which meant that Mr. E. A. Smith had com- pared these four shells with Gmelin’s description and found them to correspond. Gmelin’s types are unknown ; possibly he described only from a figure found elsewhere. Also, “Separatista chemnitzu, A. Ads., P.Z.S., 1850, p. 45, types, I. Bureas, Phil., H. Cuming.” This means that these shells were in Cuming’s collection, were obtained from Bureas Island, in the Philippine Islands, and are the types of S. chemnitzi, A. Ads. Also, “Mekran coast in Coll. Melvill,” signifying that shells in Melvill’s collection from the Mekran coast had been compared by E. A. Smith, and found to be identical. Mine were demonstrably conspecific, and Adams’s shells were found to possess the same polygonal form, with the tendency to tu- berculation at the angles. There is no question about the identity of our shell with Adams’s species, and as this has been made a synonym of Dillwyn’s species, Dillwyn’s name should be accepted by us. 221 Watson, in the “Challenger” Reports, xv., p. 429, agrees with Beck in the identity of S. chemnitzi, A. Adams, and 7. blainvilleanus, Petit. Mr. Gatliff acknowledges the identity of his species with Petit’s. He has kindly allowed me to com- pare his type with my South Australian examples, and see their identity. Mr. Gatliff also provided me with a living individual dredged in five fathoms, off the shores of Victoria. It is covered with an epidermis, extremely thin on the smallest whorls (possibly worn away), but well marked on the later. It is simple on the tabulated slope, on the base and in the umbilicus only varied by minute axial lines. On the three carine it is elevated into low spiral laminz, which are con- nected by more marked axial laminz. At intervals these are large, and projected forwards to form imbricating flounces, while between them may be 3 to 7 of the smaller ones. These flounces correspond with the tubercles at the angles of the polygonal whorls. They are figured in pl. ix., fig. 7, but very imperfectly, owing to its drying up. From his living example I was able to extract the radula. This is very similar to that of Trzchotropis borealis, Broderip, as figured in Fischer’s Manuel de Conch., 1887, p. 689. It has a rachidian tooth with a multicuspidate margin, rather more finely serrated, a large transversely quadrangular lateral with a multicuspidate border and two simple arcuate sharp manomals. (Pl ix., fig” 9.) The operculum is horny, subtrigonal, with an apical nu- cleus (pl. ix., fig. 8), and fairly closely resembles that of T. borealis, Brod. The affinity of our southern subtropical form with that of the arctic form is thus demonstrated. Lippistes meridionalis, spec. nov. PI. ix., figs. 1, 2. Shell turbinate sclid. whorls five, rapidly increasing. Pro- toconch, one and a kalf whorls, convex, smooth, but for four equal and equi-distant lire. It ends abruptly with a distinct border, not thickened or reflected. The spire whorl begins with a not quite smooth area, from which the granular spiral lire gradually arise. Spire whorls are tricarinate. In the first the central carina is more prominent, in the second it is level with the others, in the third it 1s less prominent. Slop- ing scarcely convex from upper suture to posterior carina, vertical from this to lower suture. On the slope are four equi- distant spiral lire, one-third or one-fourth the width of their interspaces, increasing in size with the whorls. Base some- what concave. A peripheral carina, less marked than those on the spire, forms the suture. Below it are four broad spiral bands, wider than their interspaces, and microscopicallv 222 spirally incurved. Crowded axial lirelle, about as wide as their interspaces cross the carine: every sixth or seventh one is strong; the next two or three are finer, and those following gradually increase. At the intersections are minute tubercles, which at intervals are comparatively large. The basal axials are less unequal. Aperture quadrangularly hemispherical, produced at the baso-columellar junction. Outer lip corru- gated by the carine. Columella concave, with a tooth-like prominence below. Inner lip valid, applied to the base on its upper half. Perforation well marked, somewhat rimate. Dim.—Alt., 3°6 mm.; diam., 2°9 mm. ; anerture, 2°) mm. by 1°6 mm. Locality.—Type, 40 fathoms, off Beachport, dead, with two: co-types; 110 fathoms, 2 dead. Diagnosis.—From Lippistes separatista, Dillwyn. It is much smaller, and more solid, the protoconch is much smaller : the whorls increase less rapidly, have three lire on the spire and four on the body-whorl, are lirated on the infra-sutural slope instead of smooth, have no polygonal shape, the base is lirated instead of smooth, axial lirelle tuberculate the carine and continue to the columella, and the umbilicus is rimate. Genus SEGUENZIA, Jeffreys. Seguenzia polita, Verco, spec. nov. Pl. ix., figs. 3, 4, 9. Shell white, smooth, glistening, turbinate, of six whorls. Protoconch one and a quarter whorls, homostrophe, smooth, round. Spire gradate, flatly concave, from simple suture (with a linear furrow) to central angulation, which is scarcely keeled ; then sloping barely concave to the lower suture, first two whorls with fine numerous radial striz from suture to angle, becoming gradually obsolete as microscopic accremen- tal lines on the later whorls... Body-whorl with a central carina, which forms the suture; a second somewhat smaller some distance anterior, somewhat concave between; a third smaller and less distant; then six concentric lire to the per- foration, which is small and rimate. Aperture subquadrate ; outer lip with a deep, narrow sinus at the suture, and a deep, wide notch at the junction of the basal and outer lip, a some- what shallower one between them, and a smaller notch at the junction of the basal lip and the columella, which is trun- cated so as to form a blunt tooth. The spiral angulation ends at the deepest part of the posterior sinus; the peripheral carina in the deepest part of the central sinus; the second carina forms the posterior boun- dary of the baso-lateral notch, whose deepest part lies be- tween the third carina and the first basal lira. The columella is concave, smooth, thick, polished, and expand- 223 ed, so as nearly to cover the perforation. The inner lip, ap- plied to the base, extends from the columella to the suture, and is smooth. Dim.—Height. 3°5 mm.; greatest diameter, 2°4 mm. Locality.—300 fathoms, off Cape Jaffa, 10 dead. Diagnosis.e-It approaches S. elegans, Jeffreys, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1876, p. 200; Tryon, Man. Conch., vol. ix., p. 47, pl. viu., fig. 75: but is distinct in having the sutural sinus with a much smaller lamina between it and the suture, the sloping part of the spire-whorls longer, a different relation of the angulation and carine to sinus, and a less production of the baso-labral angle. It is also very similar to Sequenza monocingulata, Septenzal as figured by Dall.in Bulletin 37, 1889, of the United States Nat. Hist. Mus., p. 142, pl. lxii., figs. 88-89 ; but the sinuses in the aperture are different. They differ greatly, however. in the two figures given, so_ this species may prove eventually only a variety. Genus SrpHonarta, Sowerby. Siphonaria stowee, spec. nov. ei vite: figs. 3 to 8 Shell small, moderately solid, oval, depressed. Apex sub- terminal one-eighth distant from posterior end, slightly to the left of the mid-line, oblique, inclining backwards from the central line, pointed and slightly projecting posteriorly. Posterior end nearly vertical, slightly concave. Dorsum sub- convex, more rapidly descending anteriorly. Left margin straightly convex: right more rounded, faintly bulged at the site of the siphon, just in front of the middle point. Nume- rous subdistant rather rude ribs, equal in width to the inter- spaces, multiplying by frequent intercalations ; rough, irregu- lar growth lines. Interior smooth, margin invalidly crenu- lated. Ornament, ribs opaque white; dark brown specks, lines, and blotches, chiefly intercostal, plainer on the right side ; internally light horn tint, a chestnut horseshoe around the posterior third, and broken blotches on each side of the siphon. Dim.—-Length, 75 mm.; breadth, 5°9 mm.; height, 3°25 mm. The radula contains about 94 rows of teeth, each con- sisting of a central denticle, with about 22 laterals on either side. The rachidian is narrow, with a small cusp tending to be bilobed. The laterals have large simple cusps, and these as well as the teeth grow ene smaller the further they are from the centre. “(Figs 6, 7, 8.) Hab.—Pondolowie Bay, in Spencer Gulf, on rocks above tide mark: 9 examples, alive. Fry in shell sand, King’s Point, Encounter Bay (Miss Stow). . 224 Obs.—The fry reveal a spiral nucleus of two full turns, dextral, smooth, and horn-coloured. In some, especially the smaller, the ribs are more distinct and the sculpture less rug- ged. Some have much more brown colouring, either in the intercostal spaces or in the internal horseshoe or both. One has the enlarged extremities of the horseshoe muscle-scar plainly painted. We have no other Siphonaria with its apex so near the posterior end. The largest example is 9°4 mm. I have named the species after Miss Stow, who ccl- lected the immature examoles. by 6 5. “UD CTH CO BO | bp) blz . Seguenzia polita, Verco. ~—SOONADUIBWLY a EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Puate VITT. Scutellina alboradiata, Verco.—Ventral view. by iy o, Side view. Siphonaria stowae, Verco. — Dorsal view. Ventral view. oy) ” ) : ss 3a + Side view. in yd AS Radula. u as M Radula, rachidian, aud first lateral from the other half. * Fifth lateral, side view. ; ert elln nn calva, Verco. —Ventral view ! - Side view ! _ Naceila compr essa, Verco.—Side view. 9 > Pe Ventral view. Prate IX, lippistes meridionalis, Verco. », Protoconch. - FY - Lip in profile ” a Basal view. Lippistes separatista, Dillwyn. —Spire, full view. With epidermis. 9 cy) 99 » » 7 Operculum. 9) be) I) Radula. PuaTE X. Basilissa radialis, Tate, var. bilar, Hedley. ap - x * Base. uy rae A Vs ,, Outer lip. Nacella stowe, Vereo. — Ventral view. i. ny Be Side view. Helcioniscus illibrata, Verco.—-Side view. Ventral view. Radula, front view. Laterals, side view. >) ? 99 9 9° bie) >” 59 99 + iy a Marginal, side view. a “ “ A second radula, front view. af be ip Laterals, side view. has 55 ie A third radula, front view. hs * ‘5 A lateral, side view. 225 DESCRIPTION OF A NEW CALADENIA. By KR. °S. Rogers, M.A...” M.D; [Read October 2, 1906. IPUATE, AL: Mr. E. Ashby, of this Society, has handed me an orchid which he collected at Blackwood on September 16 of this year (1906). It was blooming at a time when Glossodia major and Ualadenia deformis were both fairly numerous in the vicinity, the former being at the beginning of its season, and the latter at the end. No other Caladenias were in flower, un- less, perhaps, an isolated (. paterson. In habit and general appearance the new form so closely resembled the two species first mentioned, that it was unlikely to attract attention, unless by accident, or by a critical exa- mination of the plants in its neighbourhood. The following is its botanical description : — Height, 8 inches. Stem, slightly hairy. Two bracts, one fairly large and sheathing near the middle of the stem, the other smaller and subtending the flower. Leaf almost glabrous ; lanceolate with cuneate base, about 4 inches long by 4-inch in its widest part. Flower solitary, dark blue in colour, about the size of a well-developed Glossodia major. Segments of the perianth elliptic-lanceolate, nearly equal. Dorsal sepal 1 inch long, other segments rather less. Labdellum entire, 2-inch long, dark blue, softly glandular, subsessile; distal end recurved, proximal half concave. Two well-defined rows of golf-stick calli extend from the base to about the middle of the labellum. Filaments purple, ex- tremities white. Four tall sentinel calli (about $-inch high) of the same type, and attached to the base of the labellum, stand up vertically in front of the column. They constitute the most striking feature of the plant. . Column nearly as long as labellum, incurved, broadly winged in upper half, narrowly winged below. | Dorsal sur- face pubescent. Anther point nearly a line long, slightly recurved. A few days later another plant was discovered close to the first find. It conformed in every particular to the above description, except that the double row of calli was absent, leaving only the four sentinel calli on the labellum. I 226 After a careful examination of the plants I am forced to one of two conclusions, either of which is equally interest- ines (1) That this orchid is a new and, perhaps, sparsely dis- tributed species, which may have hitherto escaped observa- tion on account of its association with two other common species which it superficially resembles ; or, (2) That the new form is a cross between Glossodia major and Caladema deformis. The lack of total agreement between the two specimens makes the first hypothesis difficult to sustain, unless confir- eee evidence should be forthcoming. Then, too, few of - districts have been so systematically searched as Black- Be and it seems improbable that a new species of this type should have escaped detection so long. In this connection, however, we must remember that certain species occur with singular infrequency. Some six years ago an isolated speci- men of Caleana major was discovered at Mylor, but in spite of the most diligent search on the part of collectors, no other specimen has been found in the State since that time. The alternative conclusion, that it is a hybrid, is favoured by the slight disagreement between the two specimens, and on the whole seems to me to be rather the more reasonable hypothesis. However rare hybridization between genera may be in the case of most plants, it is certainly not unknown amongst the orchids, and probabiy indicates the arbitrary nature of certain distinctions, which have been used in their classifica- tion. Should a crossing between the two species mentioned be possible, the fact would suggest even a closer affinity be- tween the Caladenias and the Glossodias than is generally con- ceded, and would seem to justify Reichenbach’s contention that the latter genus should be included under the former. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XI. A. Side view. B. Front view. C. Back view. D. Enlarge- ment to show front view of column and labellum. E. Side view of column and labellum, showing golf-stick and sentinel calli. THE GEOLOGY OF THE MOUNT LOFTY RANGES.~—PART II (THE LOWER AND BASAL BEDS OF THE CAMBRIAN.) By Watrer Howcuin, F.G.S., Lecturer in Geology and Paleontology in the University of Adelaide. [Read July 10, 1906.] Prawe XE, ContTENTS. PAGE. lee lntrodwerioniae i ah Be 2 227 Il. Cambrian Glacial Till RA ae a) 228 Ill. Upper Quartzites (Mitcham and Glen Osmond Beds) ie xi 234 IV. The Thick Slate (Glen ey Slate) We 935 V. ‘“‘Blue-metal’’ Limestone # a uy 237 VI. Small Dolomitic Limestone ... 1% a 241 VII. The Thick Quartzite ... z 24] VITL. The Phyllites and Lower Pime stone aes er Torrens Limestone) ee fe 8 = 245 IX. Basal Beds of the Cambrian ees (Basal Grits and Conglomerates) ... be , 249 X. Pre-Cambrian Complex (Archean) Ee 257 XI. General Considerations coe i: Ag 260 T.—INTRODUCTION. In a previous paper which I had the honour of placing before the Society * the geology of the maritime district bor- dering the Mount Lofty Ranges was described. The area in- cluded the older rocks of the eastern side of Gulf St. Vincent, and inland to Tapley’s Hill: the western banks of the River Sturt, and the lower Onkaparinga Valley. The beds which came under notice in that communication were considered in the three following divisions : — (a) A very thick series of purple slates, quartzites, and limestones, which form the upper members of the Cam- brian beds, and are mainly covered, in the southern paris of South Australia, by the waters of Gulf St. Vincent, but are extensively developed in the Flinders Ranges. Some of the limestones of this series contain Archawocyathina, Obo- lella, and other characteristic Cambrian fossils. (b) A calcareous series which immediately underhe the purple slates. Strong oolitic limestones occur near the top, but pass down into siliceo-caleareous slates, that gradually * Trans. Roy. Soc. (S. Aus.), vol. xxviii. (1904), p. 253. 12 228 merge into the next following. Typically developed at Brigh- ton, Reynella, and Hackham. (c) Fine-grained and banded clay slates (ribbon slate), which are slightly calcareous. At Tapley’s Hill, ete. In continuation of the same subject, the present paper deals with the beds v-hich follow in descending order, and are locally developed in the foot-hills and main elevations of the Mount Lofty Ranges. This carries the investigations (so far as a generalized description goes), of the Cambrian succes- sion down to the basal beds. The ground covered in the present paper is so extensive, and involves so many points of interest, that only a mere outline of the facts can be dealt with, leaving for future efforts a more detailed description of the several members of the series. The greatly disturbed condition of the beds within the area presents many points of difficulty to the field geologist. The continuity of the beds is frequently broken by folding, over-folding, and faulting, and in a series such as now dealt with (where there is little to distinguish individual beds of the same class from each other) it becomes a most difficult task to determine the true order of succession. ‘To fill in the outline will require detailed and prolonged investigations in the field. [1.—Cambrian Glacial Till. In April, 1901, a “Preliminary Note” was read before this Society, submitting definite evidences of the glacial origin of a thick set of beds in our Cambrian series, covering a very wide area in South Australia. Previous observers have in one form or another, noted the existence of these beds, and in the following references I include all such as are known to me. 1859. A. R. C. Selwyn. “June 1. Ascended Mount Bryan |Razorback, north of the Burra], and found it com- posed almost entirely of an olive-green and brown schist, or ‘shaal stein’ breccia or conglomerate, . . . associated with the above, on the east flank of the hill, are bands of hard quartzose rock, occasionally with a laminated or gneissose structure ; and near the base of the hill on the same side there appears to be a _ thin band or dyke of hornblendic granite, numerous fragments of which are scattered about on the surface, though I could not find any im setw.” Parl. Paper No. 20 of 1859, p. 8. [The granites observed by Sel- wyn occur as glacial erratics. ]. 229 1872. G. H. F. Ulrich. Report on the Welcome Mine [north of Umberatana|—‘“The underlay wall of this reef is well defined, and composed of a gritty silicified sandstone of a few feet in thickness, beyond which follows conformably a boulder-conglomerate, in very thick beds, the enclosed boul- ders of which consist mostly of quartzite.’ Parl. Paper No. 65 of 1872, p. 12. 1879. R. Tate. “Evidences of a missing chapter in the geological history of this province are afforded by the occur- rence of rolled pebbles of stratified rocks in the oldest known of our sedimentary deposits. These are well-rounded quartz- ite pebbles, discovered by Mr. Scoular, in the grit bands in the basal beds of the Gawler Hills, and subangular pebbles of gneiss in the siliceous clay slates at Hallett’s Cove.” Pres. Add. Ad. Philos. Soc. (Roy. Soc.), vol. 11., p. xlvi. |The rocks at Hallett’s Cove, referred to in the above paragraph by the late Professor Tate, are not im situ, but are blocks of the old Cambrian till, which were torn from their bed by land ice of a later age, and in this way became erratics in the newer till laid down at Hallett’s Cove. | 1884. H. Y. L. Brown. Report on country east and west of Farina. “Other portions of the ranges |Mount Nor’- West | consist of argillaceous grit and conglomerate, quartzose erit, quartzite, kaolinized slates, arid sandy shales. The con- glomerate, besides pebbles of quartz, flint, lydianstone, and siliceous pebbles of all kinds, contains large boulders of quartz rock and quartzite two or three feet in diameter.” Also, “Termination Hill . . . consists of quartzite and cal- careous boulder conglomerate (comprising quartzite, quartz rock, cherty flint, granite, porphyry, and limestone), many of the boulders being of considerable size, interstratified with clay slates,” etc. Parl. Paper No. 102 of 1884, p. 1. “The conglomerate beds at Mount Nor’-West contain pebbles, boulders, and pieces of granite, quartz,” etc. Ann. Report of Government Geologist, 1884, p. 9. “The clay slates on the Sturt Creek contain boulders of pebbles of granitic rocks, quartzite, etc., imbedded, and occa- sional bands of grit, conglomerate, and limestone. The thick- ness of the quartzose bands is very irregular, and they thin out considerably in short distances; they vary from a hard quartz rock to a loose grit, and generally contain a consider- able amount of felspar, and bear a strong resemblance to a decomposed granulite : in many cases it may be that the sili- ceous water, which, in the case of the clay and micaceous slates, deposited quartz in cracks and fissures in that of the sandstone, chiefly penetrated through the porous material, 230 and silicified it through the entire mass.” Ann. Report of Government Geologist, 1884, p. 10. 1884. H. P. Woodward. Report on Range to the east of Farina. ‘Towards the north-east end of the range these beds [clay slates and quartzite] gradually change their lithological characters into a conglomerate, with boulders from several tons in weight to small pebbles of quartzite, sandstone, granite, limestone, marble, and slate, scattered through a slaty mat- rix, of which there are large patches without any boulders or pebbles. These beds, from their resemblance to boulder clay, have most probably been formed in a similar manner, viz., by floating ice dropping boulders and pebbles on to clay- beds in process of formation. They are from their marked characters traceable throueh gradual change into gneiss and granite, where all the boulders, with the exception of the quartzites, are also changed into granite, but generally of a different texture from the matrix, so that, on weathering, the boulders come out in their original shapes. The slates are seen in small strips of country, mostly in the centres of anti- clinals or by faults. The boulder slate runs from the Daly and Stanley Mines to Hamilton Creek and Billy Springs.” Parl. Paper No. 40 of 1884, p. 3. 1885. H. Y. L. Brown. Journey to Silverton. “At Bim- bowrie, granite and slate conglomerate, and mica schist. This slate conglomerate contains pebbles and boulders of granite. quartzite, etc, and is penetrated by small dykes of coarse granite.” Parl. Paper No. 143 of 1885. 1891. H. Y. L. Brown. Further Geological Examina- tion of Leigh’s Creek and Hergott Districts: —“‘Along the northern boundary of the range, going from Petermorra, there are beds of ferruginous sandstone and boulder conglome- rate, resting upon granitic and metamorphic rocks.” Parl. Paper, 1892. 1894. H. Y. L. Brown. Report on the Peake and Denni- son Ranges. The following clause probably refers to the beds in question : —‘‘Near the borehole, some fourteen miles north- ward [of Anna Creek Railway Station], the strata are lime- stone, clay slate, conglomerate, and a siliceous brecciated con- glomerate.” Ann. Report, No. 25 of 1894. 1898. H. Y. L. Brown. Wadnaminga Goldfield :—‘‘The slates and flags, as well as the limestone, in this vicinity, con- tain scattered boulders and pebbles of various varieties of granite, quartzite, sandstone, slate, limestone, and other rocks, sometimes forming a true conglomerate. Some of these boulders are very large, and, judging from their size and mode of occurrence, have probably been transported by ice action 231 at an early period in geological history.” Records of Mines, 1898. 1899. H. Y. L. Brown. $Oladdie Station : -—‘“‘The coun- try rocks in this district are vertical and inclined flaggy slates, sandstones, limestones, and slate conglomerate.” Parl. Paper, 1899. 1901. W. Howchin. Preliminary Note on Glacial Beds of Cambrian Age in South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc., South Aas. 6904. p.,.1.0. 1901. C. Chewings. Glacial Beds of Cambrian Age in Far North of South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc., South Aus., 1901, p. 45. 1901. T. W. Edgeworth David. The Glacial Theory [‘‘By an Investigator’ ]. The Register (S.A.), September 17, 1901. The Advertiser (S.A.), same date. 1902. Glacial Committee Report. Aus. Asso. for Ad- vancement of Science, Hobart meeting, vol. ix., 1902, p. 190. 1902. W. Howchin. Report of South Australian Glacial Investigation Committee. Zdid., ps £98: 1902. T. W. Edgeworth David. Note appended to Re- port of South Aus. Glac. Inves. Committee. hid, p. 199. 1902. E. F Pittman. Two photographs of glaciated boul- ders from glacial till, Petersburg, South Aus., Zbid., facing p. 200. 1905. J. D. Tliffe and H. Basedow. Paper read before the Royal Society of South Aus., “On the formation known as Glacial Beds of Cambrian Age in South Australia.’ Abstracts published in Adelaide daily press, April 5, 1905, et seq., in correspondence columns. 1906. J. W. Gregory. “The Dead Heart of Australia,” p. 10, London. The beds were, in the first instance, and for many years later, regarded as a “conglomerate,” which is a formation very distinct from a glacial till, both in its origin and char- acteristics. The credit of first recognizing the true signifi- cance of these beds belongs to Mr. H. P. Woodward, some time Assistant Government Geologist in Adelaide: but their glacial origin could not be regarded as definitely determined until the discovery of undoubted glaciated erratics in the till beds of Petersburg and other places, in 1901. Lithological.—A_ great uniformity of features is main- tained over very wide areas, which makes the identification of these beds comparatively easy. The greater part of the 232 deposits form a highly characteristic till—unstratified, with a ground mass more or less gritty. The beds are coarsely cleaved, with flaky surfaces in the direction of the cleavage, and producing, on weathering, rough serrated outcrops. The grain varies in the degree of siliceous cement, from an earthy mud-stone to a hard quartzitic base. The till includes erratics, promiscuously distributed, and up to eleven feet or more in diameter. Many of these erratics have no known location of parent rock in South Australia. It sometimes passes into a quartzite or coarse grit, with irregular boun- daries. In most localities the till is, at certain horizons, interstratified with regularly bedded slaty zones, laminated, and destitute of erratics, and not infrequently with thin dolo- mitic limestones, which are generally gritty, and may contain erratics. In common with most of the Mount Lofty Ranges, the beds give evidence of pressure and strain. The tectonic forces, operating from the east, have thrown the Mount Lofty beds into great north and south folds, which often develop into overfolds. The effects produced on the till by such pressure are strongly evident and very interesting. The in- cluded erratics, for example, have been forced to assume a position with their longer axis parallel to the planes of cleav- age, whilst the fracture of a great many of these included stones in parallel lines across their short diameters, gives evi- dence of strain operating along the cleavage planes. The ef- fects of such strain are further seen by the apparent distor- tion of some of these stones, and by the presence of fine par- allel striz on their surfaces, caused by rotation in their bed. Striz thus caused are of a totally different kind from glacial striz, and cannot well be confounded with the latter. The dip of the beds varies greatly. In some of the north- ern areas, as at Orroroo and some parts of the Flinders Ranges, they exhibit anticlinal and synclina! foldings in large curves. At Petersburg, Appila Creek Gorge, and other places they are practically vertical. In the Sturt Valley they dip under the Tapley’s Hill slates at a low angle, whilst on their eastern side they are reversed. In the Onkaparinga Valley they override the newer Tapley’s Hill slates. The glacial origin of the beds is determined—/(a) by the typical features of the unstratified till: (4) the number, great size, and promiscuous distribution of the boulders; (c) the essentially foreign character of the included erratics; (d) the clear proof of glaciation on subangular erratics; (e) other minor features usually present in ice-laid material. Form of Glaciation.—Mr. Woodward’s suggestion of 233 floating ice as the conditions under which these beds were laid down is undoubtedly correct. There is no instance of a hard glacial pavement that would indicate land-ice as the agent, but a continuity of deposit which shows that the material was laid down in an area of uninterrupted sedimentation. Hatent.—The beds occur in their natural order with the related divisions of the Cambrian series throughout the Mount Lofty and Flinders Ranges. In the anticlinal and synclinal foldings of these ranges the beds under description make scores of outcrops, over an area which may be regarded as a great triangle, having the Onkaparinga at its southern apex, and the Willouran Ranges, near Hergott, on the one side, and the extreme north-east of the Flinders Ranges, on the other, forming the base-line. Measured north and south they have an outcrop of 450 miles, and an east and west direction of 20G miles. The beds have been subjected to much faulting, which, in the case of strike faults, have repeated or obscured the beds, aud by dip faults have broken the con- tinuity of the outcrops. A more detailed description of these beds is reserved for future publication. A paper was read before this Society in April of last year by Messrs. [liffe and Basedow, in which the authors gave a totally different explanation of the beds in question. This paper was not printed in the Society’s Transactions, but lengthy abstracts from the paper appeared in the Adelaide daily press'of April 5, 1905, and was supplemented by subse- quent correspondence. Tne theory expounded by the essay- ists was that the beds in question owed their existence, “not to glacial but to cataclysmic action,’ in the form of a “thrust conglomerate,” and that this “extends along a line of fault from the south of Adelaide far into the north.” The “foreign stones” are accounted for by the supposition that “a fundamental series was first folded between overlying beds, the fold closed forming thin alternations of different litho- logical composition, and the older were then thrust up among the younger.” Great emphasis was laid upon the ‘“‘deforma- tion produced by stress due to earth movements occurring in the rocks adjacent to and bordering on the conglomerate in the Sturt Valley.” I do not intend to discuss the points at issue between Messrs. Iliffe and Basedow and myself. I do not think it necessary to do so. The observations of the gentlemen referred to were limited to one locality, and their theories are entirely unsupported by the facts. The fulness ‘and clearness of the evidences for the glacial origin of these beds have received the unqualified acceptance of several dis- \ 234 tinguished geologists * who have been on the ground, and their special knowledge of this department of geological science confers on their opinions the greatest weight. From the base of the glacial till there follows, in de- scending order, a thick series of quartzites, slates, phyllites, and limestones, which exhibit a certain uniformity of features. They are found in the country lying between the Sturt River and the main heights of the Mount Lofty Ranges. The very siliceous character of most of the quartzites confers on them great resistance to waste, with the result that they develop prominent ridges, forming the principal heights, and make precipitous cliffs and waterfalls in the lateral gullies. The associated slates give feature to the foot-hills and lesser heights by rounded summits and a rich verdure which springs from their productive soils. The series is conformable, and with strong resemblances throughout, but for convenience of treatment it may be con- sidered under the following sections: —fa) The Upper Quartzites (Mitcham and Glen Osmond beds): (0) the Thick (Glen Osmond) Slate: fc) the Middle or Thick Quartzite : (d) the Phyllites and Lower Limestone: /e) the Basal Grits and Conglomerates. Ill..-Upper Quartzites (Mitcham and Glen Osmond Beds). The junction of the till beds with the underlying quartz- ites can be conveniently studied in the Sturt Valley (Section 22, Hundred of Adelaide), and in the railway cutting near the Blackwood Metropohtan Brickworks. A good section is also visible in the Onkaparinga (Section 858, Ilundred of Willunga). The beds immediately beneath the till are lami- nated and wavy in structure, and usually strongly flexured and contorted. They stand at a high angle, and, in places, override the till beds along its eastern margin; whilst the till beds override the superior Tapley’s Hill slates on the Onkaparinga. The Upper Quartzites, of which there are several dis- tinct beds, outcrop along the foot-hills at Glen Osmond, Mit- cham, Belair, etc., They have been extensively quarried throughout the Adelaide district, and many instructive sec- tions can be seen. As they are much faulted, it is difficult to establish a clear correlation of the disjointed members of the series, but the main quartzite, worked at Glen Osmond * See references, ante, under the names of Professor T. W. E. David, Professor J. W. Gregory, Mr. FE. F. Pittman, and others, 235 and Mitcham (two miles apart), appears to be the same bed, and is about 100 feet thick. The petrological characteristics of these quartzites are re- markably uniform and constant throughout the series. Mac- roscopically the stone is highly vitreous, and has a piebald appearance. This effect is produced by the presence of clastic felspar, of a white colour, distributed through the siliceous cement, in company with grains of quartz which are often confluent. The proportion of granular felspar to quartz grains ranges from 30 to 40 per cent. This constituent is sometimes excessively fine, and can only be clearly distin- guished after the stone has been immersed in water. The stone may be regarded as a fine-grained, arkose sandstone or grit, derived from the waste of granitic rocks, and subsequently metamorphosed by the infiltration of silica from solutions. The proportion of siliceous cement present in the stone determines the economic use. Where the proportion of silica is rela- tively low the stone is used as a freestone for building; but where high it is hest adapted for road metal. In many places fault breccias occur, and when these carry vughs, very fine nests of quartz crystals and tabular crystals of barite are sometimes found. An interesting series of petrological studies in South Australian quartzites was carried out by my late colleague, Dr. Woolnough, and published in the Transactions of this Society.* 1V.—The Thick Slate (Glen Osmond Slate). The quartzites of the Glen Osmond and Mitcham dis- tricts are interstratitied with slates which have an aggregate thickness exceeding that of the associated quartzites. In structure they vary from laminated shales, with shght evi- dences of cleavage, te slates in which the cleavage is com- plex, and obscures the bedding. The metamorphic effects on the slates increase with the relative depth, so that the lower beds differ much in structure and lithological aspects from the higher. For purposes of identification the shales and slates of this series present equal difficulties as those connected with the quartzites. Beds widely removed in their vertical order are at times faulted against each other with no superficial evi- dences of such displacements. In the great fold movements to which this series has been subjected it has been the weak and yielding slates which have suffered the greatest defor- mation. The pressure which caused the earth-folds was * Petrological Notes on some South Aus. Quartzites, &e, Trans. Roy. Soc. South Aus., vol. xxviii., p. 198. 236 directed from the east towards the west, and has resulted in the stronger quartzites making overfolds, and crushing or overriding the slates. The slate-bed which overlies the quartz-_ ite of the round hill at Mitcham, for example, has had a sharp throw-down to the west, as seen in an old quarry in a by-road, on the south side of the township. The beds are vertical, wavy in the grain, and exhibit several nearly hori- zontal thrust-planes in a movement from east to west, by which the vertical beds have been broken and slid along planes at right angles to the bedding. Fine examples of thrust can also be seen in cuttings on the new road between Magill and Norton Summit. The thickest of these slate-beds occurs immediately below the Glen Osmond quartzite. The junction of these beds (which also exhibits a remarkable illustration of thrusts) can be dis- tinctly seen in the large quarry which has supplied much of the building stones of Adelaide and district. The slates rise from beneath the quartzite, at a low angle of dip, and extend in the direction of Mount Lofty, as far as the Hagle-on-the Hill; down the Waterfall Gully, and in a northerly direction, they form the grassy foot-hills which run parallel with the ranges. Jn its upper portions it has the features of an earthy slate, with cleavage imperfectly developed, but near the base it is often a typical phyllite. This bed forms the dominant outcrop on the western flanks of the Mount Lofty Ranges, and is probably not less than 2,000 ft. thick. Towards the bottom of this thick slate several beds of quartzite are intercalated. These can be seen on the Glen Osmond road, between the Eagle-on-the-Hill and Crafers, and also in the Fourth Creek (Morialta), where one of the beds makes a scarped cliff on the south side of the gorge, where the softer beds are strongly sericitic. At the Fourth Creek and Stonyfell, as well as at other localities, the ‘thick quartzite” (which underlies the “thick slates,” and will be described presently), has been sharply curved towards the west, sometimes overfolding, and _ has thereby thrown the overlying thick slates down to the west, forming the clay foot-hills referred to above. It is from this movement that the Glen Osmond slate-beds have such an ex- tended area in a northerly direction. The stratigraphical sequence of these beds is materially simplified by the pres- ence in them of a calcareous belt, which is moderately con- stant in its features, and forms a definite horizon in the series. It includes an impure limestone, locally known as “blue metal,’”” which has been extensively used for road-making. The stratigraphical importance of these beds requires sepa- rate reference. 237 V.— ** Blue=Metal’’ Limestone. The stone is a blue-black carbo-argillaceous limestone, with some chert, which occurs in thin seams or as small pellets distributed through the limestone. The calcareous zone in the slates is about 30 or 40 feet in thickness, in which the so- called ‘“‘blue metal’ makes beds of stronger stone, varying from a few inches up to 10 or 14 feet in thickness. Its dark colour is distinctive, and the outcrops are usually marked by the presence of superficial travertine. The beds occur at in- tervals along the foot-hills adjacent to Adelaide, not on a con- tinuous or uniform line of strike, but in faulted fragments. The main localities for their occurrence are as follows: — Glen Osmond Road.—The relationship which this belt of impure limestone bears to the associated slates can be well seen in outcrops near the Mountain Hut Hotel, on the Glen Osmond Road. The beds are on the old road, about half a mile higher up than the hotel, and cross the new road in a north-west direction, just above the sharp turn which has ob- tained the name of the ‘‘Devil’s Elbow.” Here a large quarry has been worked in the stone, the “blue metal’ having a thickness of about 14 feet, with a dip of 20° in a direction 20° south of west. The strike carries the beds along the hillsiae, and obliquely across the lower bend in the road, and beneath the Mountain Hut Hotel. Mitcham.—What are probably the same beds occur in the thick slates on the south side of the Brownhill Creek, opposite the school on the public reserve. The main lime- stone is here 12 feet thick, with several thinner beds of lime- stone in the section. It has been quarried at several points. Dip south-east at 25°. Beaumont.—The “blue metal’ limestone is well exposed in Goldsack’s quarries, near Beaumont, on the Burnside and Glen Osmond Road. The quarry face shows about 40 feet of stone, with 14 feet of “blue metal.” The limestone layers .are separated by laminated and calcareous slates, which are greatly puckered and compressed into small angular folds and little overfolds in the direction of the dip, which is west, at 25°-30°. The crush has developed a phyllitic structure in the slates. The beds curve around the north side of the hill and across a small gully to the east, and slope upwards to near the top of the ridge, where the dip is at a lower angle and apparently directed to the eastwards. A little short of the summit the limestone is cut off by a bar of quartzite (much penetrated by quartz), about 12 yards wide, and cuts across the strike. This is apparently a fault rock. On the east side of this quartzite, or fault rock, are grey slates. 238 Stonyfell.—This outcrop occurs about two miles north- east of the preceding one. A private road passes behind the wine cellars at Stonyfell, leading to several quarries in the “blue metal’ limestone, situated on the ridge about a third of a mile to the west of the Stonyfell (Dunstan’s) quartzite quarries. The “metal” is about 10 feet thick, but is some- what uncertain in its quality. In some of the workings the associated calcareous slates afford beautiful examples of bed- ding crossed by cleavage planes that can be obtained in good hand specimens. The heus having suffered a downthrow to the west (as shown in Dunstan's quarries), are broken and un- certain as to dip. In one of the “blue metal” quarries a small fault with contrasted dip is seen; the one easterly at 20°, the other 20° south of west, at 20°. The general strike, however, is a little east of north, which carries the beds across the vailey on the north side, where they have also been quar- ried. Further outcrops of these beds can be traced in the olive plantation, about three-quarters of a mile to the north of Stonyfell, where they have been quarried at many places along the strike. The thickness of cover in most of the “blue metal” outcrops has led to a system of under-mining, by which large caves have been excavated and carried back on the lne of stone as far as it was safe to do so. Im this method, successive quarries are worked along the line of out- crop, as has been the case in those now described, as well as in most of the other outcrops of the “blue metal.” The out- crops in this instance follow the south side of a dry gully through the olive plantations. and pass out of these grounds on the eastward (Sections 108 and 918, Hundred of Adelaide) to the head of the gully, where a quarry exposes very char- acteristic phyllites, with thin beds of the “blue metal.” Here the beds roll in a shallow syncline with low dip to the south, and appear to run out to the east. A great thickness of these calcareous beds is exposed in the dry gully on the north side of the olive plantation, where the beds have been quarried at the bottom, and also in a small quarry on the north side of the valley. At the latter position the limestone beds are seen to be nearly horizontal and faulted against the slates, which are thrown down at a high angle. Much tra- vertine appears on the surface from this point, northwards, towards Magill, but no “blue metal” beds are exposed, having apparently been cut off by the fault seen in the small quarry just referred to. Magill.—About half a mile from the tram terminus at Magill several quarries in the “blue metal’? beds can be seen on the north side of the old road to Norton Summit. The 239 main quarry shows a face of 24 feet in all, with 12 feet of good “metal.”” Dip west at 35°. A little higher up, on the same bank, phyllites with a 6-feet bed of quartzite are seen in an old quarry. Here the beds show a sharp monoclinal fold, in which the septum has a dip to the south-west at 75°. On the new road to Norton Summit, about half a mile above the Magill Reformatory, the “blue metal” beds are seen in a road-cutting, which is due north-east from the outcrop on the old road. The beds are not so strong as usual, but this may be partly due to weathering. Dip, 10° east of south, at 38°. The strike from this point (judging by the travertine surface) follows the foot of the low hills bordering on the plains. Similar indications appear at the mouth of the Fourth Creek and on the hill slopes south of the Fifth Creek. The presence of travertine cannot be taken, however, as a sure guide to the presence of a limestone beneath, as there is often sufficient diffused lime in the slates themselves to produce a considerable travertine cap. Anstey’s Hill and Teatree Gully.—On the main road be- tween Paradise and Houghton (Section 5608, Hundred of Yatala), where the old and new roads of Anstey’s Hill are nearly parallel to each other, black slate with bands of blue- black limestone cross the road, and can be traced along the strike on either side. The outcrop is very similar to the “blue metal” stone met with elsewhere, although the limestone is in places somewhat of a lighter colour than is usual for this bed. The outcrop on the road extends for about a hundred yards, and is followed on its eastward side by a ferruginous rotten sandstone and cherty quartz with phyllites. The strike carries the beds, on the south side. across Payne’s Gully and the next spur, and was traced in the same direction until not far from the north bank of the River Torrens. The exposures show the beds to be vertical, or in- tensely contorted into acute folds with the dip rapidly chang- ing to opposite directions. On the north side of Anstey’s Hill road the beds can be followed down the valley and across the Water Gully road, where good sections of strong stone can be seen on the road and in Mr. F. Newman’s garden. The beds take the next rise to the north (passing a little east of the old ironstone flux mine, Section 5632), where it is mostly evidenced by the presente of chert or cherty quartz on the top of the hill. From this point the beds descend and cross the Teatree Gully road, about halfway up the gorge. Here they make two (if not three) distinct outcrops. "The stone is ver y strong, carries much chert, as do also the associated phyllites, and is quar- 240 ried. In these sections there are extraordinary evidences of crush, with reversed faults showing push from the east. The “blue metal” beds are nipped in between two ridges of the thick quartzite, which appears to be repeated here by a strike fault. One ridge runs from the River Torrens by way of Anstey’s Hill to the bottom end of the Teatree Gully gorge; and the other, almost parallel, crosses Anstey’s Hill road, about half a mile higher up, and strikes for the top of the Teatree Gully, where it has been extensively quarried. Between these two ridges of quartzites, the phyllites and “blue metal’ beds have received a great nip (as already described), with much quarfz veining that has prompted ex- ploration for minerals, but without success. In _ all the other instances the ‘blue metal’ beds _ out- crop on the western side of the thick quartzites, but in the Ansteys Hill and Teatree Gully sec- tions they outcrop on the eastern side. This accords with the prevailing dip of the quartzites of Anstey’s Hill, which is towards the east, and has been no doubt influenced by the strike fault which has given the beds an easterly tilt, and thereby also thrown the “blue metal’ beds to that side. Waterfall Gully.—That part of the gully which is below the First Waterfall, as well as the left bank of the stream, in its upper part as far as the Hagle-on-the-Hill, consists al- most entirely of thick slates, which are presumably an exten- sion of the thick (Glen Osmond) slates. A footpath leads up from the base of the waterfall to the ledge over which it plunges. On this path, just before reaching a rustic bridge which spans a small runner from the hill, an outcrop of the dark calcareous beds can be seen in the bank side. The beds have a dip, 20° south of east, at 46°. GENERAL.— The repeated occurrence of this very charac- teristic horizon of carbo-argillaceous limestone and chert is of great significance with respect to the stratigraphical rela- tionships of this much-disturbed district. Assuming that these occurrences represent one and the same set. of beds, they indicate an horizon in the thick (Glen Osmond) slate, which becomes an important datum line for the determination of the associated quartzites, both above and below. Their anoma- lous position, in flanking the base of the Stonyfell quart- zites (although really superior to them in position), is ex- plained by the great fold along the western side of the range in which the thick quartzites participated. In this move- ment, the overlying slates were tipped over to the west, and, being softer than the quartzites, have suffered a more rapid denudation, which has placed them at a lower level than the 241 underlying harder beds. The general trend of these lime- stone outcrops is along the western slopes of the foot-hills, and separately, curving upwards in an easterly direction towards the rise, die out before reaching the summit. VI.—Small Dolomitic Limestone. At a lower horizon in the thick (Glen Osmond) slates than that occupied by the “‘blue metal” limestone, a small, buff-coloured dolomitic iimestone occurs. It does not appear to exceed from a few inches up to a foot in thickness, and from its thinness is often only indicated by loose fragments and travertine cover. It is associated with a fine-grained, laminated quartzite, which weathers smooth and of a buff colour, and carries a close superficial resemblance to a dolo- mitic limestone. Irdeed, some specimens give a slight re- action for calcium-magnesium carbonate. It has a distinct outcrop, about a foot thick, on the west side of Waterfall Gully (high up); also at some old mine workings on the same side, but at a lower level. It has also been noted at Brown- hill Creek, above Mitcham; on the north-east side of Green- hill road, where it is associated with lumps of magnesite or dolomitic travertine; on the spur between the Third Creek and Horsnell’s Gully ; and probably on the hillside, near the by-road, south of Fifth Creek, where a piece of dolomitic lime- stone was found in the surface travertine associated with the buff-coloured laminated quartzite, which usually accompanies this bed. A thin dolomitic limestone was found crushed in a fault plane, on the hill south of the Torrens Gorge, where it is associated with much quartz and chlorite. Vil.—The Thick Quartzite. Anstey’s Hill, the Black Hill, Stonyfell, and Mount Lofty form the most conspicuous eminences of the Mount Lofty Ranges, as seen from Adelaide. They have much in common. They each ccnsist of quartzites of great thickness (probably not less than 1,000 feet), whilst a similar geological character has given rise in each case to a scrubby vegetation that clearly defines them in the landscape. In structure, the quartzite 1s seldom massive, but is divided up into relatively thin layers of solid stone, separated by partings of shale or mylonitic material. The composition of the stone is that of a clastic rock, consisting, in the main, of rounded quartz and felspar grains, similar to the other quartzites of the series. From the features which these several outcrops have in com- mon, as well as other considerations which will appear in the sequel, it is believed that they represent the same geologica} horizon, although they form disconnected fragments. 242 Anstey’s Hill is a prominent spur of the Mount Lofty Ranges, situated a mile and a half, in a direct line, north of the Torrens Gorge, and is traversed by the main road between Paradise and Houghton. It exhibits a thick series of quartz- ites, which in structure and composition bear a close resem- blance to the thick quartzites which occur in the other locali- ties referred to above. The cuttings on the road, as well as numerous quarries, give excellent sections of the beds. The beds dip east, or a little south of east, varying from 50° to 70°, which they maintain in a direction across the strike, for about a quarter of a mile, indicating great thickness. The outcrop is continuous to the River Torrens, and forms the precipitous hill on the north side of the waterworks weir. On the east side of the great curve in the road. which goes around the north side of the hill, the quartzites take a lower angle of dip, and just before they disappear are hori- zontal, or perhaps have a slight dip to the west. There, is here a sudden change to phyllites, with much thrust to the west. From the dip of the quartzites these phyllites should overlie them, and the “blue metal” beds, which outcrop a little higher up the road, point in the same direction. The phyl- lites are greatly disturbed, and it is probable that they are faulted against the quartzites. The relationship which the Anstey’s Hill quartzites bear to a parallel ridge of similar stone on the eastern side is referred to under Section V. The Black Hill, situated at the entrance of the gorge of the Fifth Creek (Montacute road) forms the greatest mass of quartzite in the Mount Lofty Ranges. Its steep sides and flat top, covered with a sombre scrub vegetation from top to bottom, makes it a conspicuous object from the plains, and has secured for it the appropriate name of the Black Hill. The hill rises 1,000 feet* above the plain, and consists of quartz- ite throughout. The stone is divided up into compara- tively thin beds, separated from each other by partings of a more or less shaly nature. These partings consist mainly of sand grains mixed with thin lamine of silicates, which give evidence of much shearing. There has evidently been con- siderable movement along the divisional planes, which would be planes of weakness under stress. Quartz has been develop- ed, more or less, in these partings, and in a few instances a slight, evidence of pegmatitic structure was recognized. In the Government quarry [Stone Reserve, Section 304, Hundred of Adelaide}, about a quarter of a mile from the mouth of * As near as can be judged from data kindly supplied by the Surveyor-General’s and the Engineer-in-Chief’s Departments. the Black Hill is 1,540 feet above sea level, and 1,140 feet above the plains at its base. 243 the gorge, there is a conspicuous fault dyke in the centre of the quarry, 2 feet thick, having well-defined walls, and-hades 10° east. The dyke consists of brecciated quartzite and quartz, the whole mass thickly penetrated by dendrites. The beds being thin and much jointed, the stone is only used for road metal, and is easily won. The dip of the beds swings round between south-west and south-east, at from 18° to 25°. The steepness of the face, the extensive jointing of the beds, and the dip being towards the gorge, have had the effect, in wet weather, of bringing down great: slides of stone, damming the creek and blocking the road. The Fourth Creek (Morialta).—The thick quartzite, which forms the high range on the north side of the Fourth Creek, is undoubtedly the same as that of the Black Hill, but it is a distinct fragment. The Black Hill is determined by faults, both on its west and south sides. The west fault is a continuation of the great displacement which runs along the western slopes of the hills, and the fault on the south side follows the direction of the Fifth Creek. The latter has broken the continuity of the thick quartzite, and thrown it further to the east between the Fifth and Fourth Creeks. Stonyfell presents another isolated fragment of the thick quartzite, almost equalling the Black Hill in magnitude. The beds for the most part have a comparatively low angle of dip directed to the south-west, but the dip increases towards the western side, where the beds roll, and are intensely disturbed as they near the important fault which skirts the foot-hills. The fault-plane can be well seen in Dunstan’s extensive quarries. The strike of the fault here is 35° east of north, and can be traced along the outcrop, both north and south. It is well seen in the Fourth Creek and between the Fourth and Fifth Creeks. The zone of fault-fracture in the quartz- ite at Stonyfell is about 50 yards wide, in which the rock is much brecciated, and penetrated by quartz veins. The quartz- ites are thrown against the slates, and the slates dip towards the fault-plane. At the fault their dip is 55° east, and in a short distance away, in a small quarry on the old road, the dip is 35° in the same direction. The quartzite comprises the high ground to the south of Stonyfell, which is intersected by Slape’ s Gully, and is limited, in the main, on that side bv the Greenhill road. At Stonyfell, as in all cases with the thick quartzite, the stone is exclusively used for road metal. Mount Lofty—Mount Lofty owes its prominence to the thick quartzite, which forms its summit, and is there nearly horizontal in position. ‘The ridge which connects the Mount with Crafers forms a continuous outcrop of the same beds, and 244 may be regarded as the crest of a wide anticlinal fold, nearly flat on top, with a low dip to the south-east on its eastern side; and a gradual slope with a dip to the south-west on its western side—the dip slope trending towards the Glen Osmond road. The summit of Mount Lofty, especially on its western face, is composed of crags of large size, which rise steeply from the road to a height of 150 feet. The east side of the ridge is steeper than the western, and cuts off the quartzite some- what abruptly, the base of which is seen near the bottom of the escarpment, where it gives place to a compact slate, fre- quently coloured red. The line of junction between the quartzite and slate is marked by several springs, which yield strong runners of water. The best exposure of the quartzite is seen in Hardy’s quarry, on the east side of the ridge, near the road which con- nects Crafers and Piccadilly, and from which most of the road metal of the district is obtained. The top beds are soft, from the effects of weathering. The main body of the stone is siliceous, much jointed, and breaks with a free fracture. The bottom beds in the quarry contain a proportion of crys- talline silicates, of a kind that alters the grain and makes the stone tenacious and tough, and difficult to break. This fea- ture is mainly seen on the west side of the quarry, where the beds show the effects of thrust, directed from the east, which has raised the beds into a succession of small saddles, with a talcose film between the layers. STRATIGRAPHY OF THE THICK QUARTZITE.—The evidence seems to be conclusive that the prominent outcrops of An- stey’s Hill, the Black Hill, the Fourth Creek Hill, Stonyfell. and Mount Lofty represent the same geological horizon. If so, they are examples of block-faulting on a large scale. A very thick series of beds has been tilted, broken into large fragments, and rendered discontinuous by a deformation of the earth’s crust. This conclusion has been reached partly by the correspondence which these quartzite blocks show to each other in their hthology and great thickness, but more particularly from the peculiar occurrence of the ‘‘blue metal’ limestone which accompanies them. This limestone appears to be in its normal position on the Glen Osmond road and at Beaumont, where, respectively, it is inferior in position to the Glen Osmond quartzites, and superior to those of Mount Lofty. In the same way, along the foot-hills, the “blue metal’ limestone at Beaumont, stands related to the Slape’s Gully quartzites; the same beds at Stonyfell and the olive planta- tions are stratigraphically associated with the Stonyfell 245 ‘quartzites; the Magill and Fourth Creek exposure, to the Fourth Creek and Black Hill quartzites, and, in each case, the limestone, though stratigraphically superior to the quartzites, is thrown down to the west. At Anstey’s Hill, however, where the quartzites are tipped to the east, the blue limestones are also thrown to the east. This stratigraphical association of the two sets of beds throughout the district (notwithstanding the disturbed condition of the field), estab- lishes the order of succession and materially assists in fixing the main fault-planes. Vill.—The Phyllites and Lower Limestone (River Torrens Limestone). A phyllite is an argillaceous rock of a micro-crystalline structure. It differs from clay-slate mainly in its more schis- tose character. It is generally laminated ana wavy, and the development of sericitic mica gives it a lustrous appearance. There is no sharp line of distinction between the Glen Osmond slates, which are sometimes phyllitic (especially in their lower members), and the phyllites proper, which occupy a geological horizon beneath the thick quartzite described above. The development of the phyllitic structure appears to have been mainly determined by the measure of folding lo- cally developed ; the greater the crush the more distinctly are the phylltic features manifest in the beds. These beds outcrop on the north side of the Black Hill, are well seen in gullies facing the west; and also in the Tor- rens River, above the weir, where they have yielded a small amount of copper. The phyllites occur on the east side of Mount Lofty (rising from beneath the quartzite), and from their decomposition the productive garden soil of Picca- dilly, situated in the valley, has been mainly derived. The Mount Lofty Park Mine (Section 840, Hundred of Onkapar- inga) is in these beds. The ore is mainly sphalerite (zinc sulphide), with a little galena and iron pyrites. The phyl- lites at this place dip south-east at 30°, and the lode, which does not exceed 4 inches in width, has well-defined walls, and hades to the north at 80°. Not much quartz is present in these slates, a feature in which they show a strong contrast to the Pre-Cambrian slates of the district. The dip of the beds increases to the eastward, where they become vertical, or dip east at a very high angle. The phyllites are often strongly chloritic, giving the stone a green colour, and along lines of great disturbance, ac- companied by quartz veins, the mineral chlorite is often found in considerable quantities. The contemporaneity of the 246 quartz and chlorite, in their origin, 1s proved by the inclu- sion of granular chlorite within the crystals of quartz. Phyllites also occur extensively in the Onkaparinga River, about Clarendon ; in the Little Para River, and the South and North Para Rivers. Interbedded with the lower phyllites are quartzites and limestones. The latter are of great stratigraphical value in determining the geological horizon of the lower members of the Cambrian series. The Lower (or River Torrens) Limestone.—Towards the lower part of the phyllte-quartzite series (which underlies the thick quartzite of the Black Hill, Mount Lofty, etc.), is an important development of limestone. The main bed varies from a blue or buff-coloured limestone to a white crystalline marble. It is frequently dolomitic, and in places becomes a true dolomite. The designation “lower lmestone’’ distin- guishes it from the Brighton and Reynella limestone, which occupies a much higher geological horizon; and as it is typi- cally seen in the valley of the Torrens and its tributaries, it may be called the “Torrens limestone.”’ The limestone proper is associated with impure calcareous beds and quartzites, whilst the much faulted and broken condi- tion of the beds makes it somewhat difficult to state their exact sequence, but the following appears to be the order in descent : — (a) Overlying (rather thick) quartzite. (6) Impure siliceous blue limestone. ; (c) Caleareous quartzite. Weathers with quartz grains on surface of stone. (d) Quartzite. About 50 feet thick. (ec) Slate. Calcareous near bottom. About 60 feet thick. (f) Buff-coloured dolomitic limestone, or marble, with one or two earthy beds (not exceeding 2 feet), in- terbedded with the limestone. About 150 feet thick. (g) Phyllites and quartzite. Taking the limestone beds as a whole, for general descrip- tion, the following localities have been noted:—It forms a rounded hill at Montacute, on the ridge behind the church. It crosses the new and old Corkscrew Roads, where it is appar- ently faulted with a throw to the west. In one direction (going east) it can be followed down to the Corkscrew Valley, and skirting the hillside (going east) it crosses a small creek at the back of Mr. Barnet’s house ; then, passing over the next 247 ridge, it appears on the south side of the old Montacute mine, and is strongly developed in the Sixth Creek, on the same line of strike ; and also in a tributary of the Sixth Creek, Sec- tion 5524. Another line of strike of these beds, roughly parallel to the preceding, is met with on the ridge separating the Cork- screw Valley from Pinkerton Gully. In the latter the lime- stone becomes faulted, and is thrown down, on the east side of the gully, towards the bottom; then, passing over the east ridge, it again crosses the Sixth Creek, not far from the lat- ter’s confluence with the Torrens. From thence, with a strike east, slightly north, it passes over a steep hill, and is found in the grounds of Mr. Hersey and Mr. Batchelor, on the fol- lowing rise. Maintaining the same general direction, the limestone follows the bed of the Torrens eastward, outcrop- ping for half a mile before reaching the junction of Kangaroo Creek with the Torrens, and is continued beyond that point to the old drive, known as “‘Anstey’s Mine,” which was worked in this limestone, and is now beautifully coated with stalag- mitic drapery. Two other outcrops of this limestone occur in the bed of the Torrens, in each of which the strike is nearly at right angles to those just described. The more westerly of these outcrops occurs in the southerly bend of the river in Section 333. The stone is a dolomitic limestone of a buff colour, and is about 150 feet in thickness. On its southern side it is cut off by an east and west fault, accompanied by great masses of ironstone of metasomatic origin. The beds dip 20° west of south, at from 35° to 45°. The limestone follows the left bank of the river for about 200 yards from the angle of the bend, when it rises to the bank at an increased angle of dip. This outcrop is apparently an isolated fragment of no great extent, determined by fault planes. On the east side of the same bend in the river, and nearly opposite the confluence of the Sixth Creek, another outcrop of this limestone can be seen in the bed of the Torrens. It is similar in character and thickness to the one last described, and has a like strike and dip, but on parallel lines. Locally it is known as the “Marble Bar.” This line of outcrop extends in a south-easterly direction for about a quarter of a mile, when, in the grounds of Mr. Hersey, it is cut by a strike fault and ends abruptly. Here also, as in the case of the faulting of the limestone on the west side of the river bend, the fault zone is marked by meta- somatic deposits, and has been opened out in a small quarry for ironstone flux. In the opposite direction the limestone follows the gully in a northerly strike, passing through Sec- 248 tions Nos. 5604, 5607, 5546, and 5517. It outcrops in the vineyards of Highercombe, and can be traced up the side of the hill towards the house; but it disappears before reaching the latter. It is probably thrown down by a fault, as the limestone was penetrated when sinking a well in Highercombe House at a depth of 80 feet. On its western side the lime- stone is here bounded by quartzite; and on its eastern sidé the Pre-Cambrian beds, in a high and rocky ridge, form a continuous outcrop from the River Torrens to Houghton and beyond. OTHER LOCALITIES FoR THE LowER Limestone.—In the Onkaparinga, a little below Hack’s Bridge, where the beds consist mainly of white marble, and are much obscured by the alluvial of the stream. This outcrop is at no great distance from the basal grits. At Mount Bold, in the valley of the Onkaparinga, a blue siliceous limestone outcrops on the east side of the Mount, and a more extensive outcrop of limestone occupies the summit of a minor elevation (Section 295, Hundred of Noarlunga), about half a mile north-west of Mount Bold, and has been used to construct the ford of the river on the Clarendon Road. The stone apparently dips 8.8.W. at 15°. I cannot definitely place this limestone, as it is a few years since I visited the locality, but it 1s probably the lower limestone. On the South Para there is an outcrop of the same lime- stone series, which can be traced for a long distance on the north side of the river, and is closely associated with the basal beds, which rest on Pre-Cambrian gneiss. ABSENCE OF THESE LimEsToNES aT Mount Lorry.—In the consecutive order of the lower Cambrian beds this im- portant limestone series ought to outcrop on the east side of Mount Lofty, between that eminence and the Aldgate grits. No such outcrop, however, occurs. The absence of these beds must be referred to a strike fault of some magnitude, which has prevented the limestone from showing at the surface. This effect might be brought about in several ways. Two examples are shown on Plate xii., figs. 2 and 3. In fig. 2 the beds are thrown down in two parallel trough faults, which obscure the limestone, and cause a repetition of some of the higher beds at the surface. The limestone is shown as faulted against the Pre-Cambrian beds at depth. In fig. 3 a fault is shown which hades in the direction of the dip. This would have the effect of cutting off some beds and preventing their coming to the surface. JT think the section shown in fig. 2 is the more likely occurrence of the two, and this is supported by some local features, which 249 are best understood by applying to them the theory of a trough fault. IX.—Basal Beds of the Cambrian Series (Basal Grits and Conglomerates). ; For some time my attention has been directed to a series of outcrops which exhibit features no less interesting than difficult of interpretation. In general aspect they vary from fine-grained, white, felspathic sandstones and grits, through every gradation of coarseness to pebbly conglomerates. The lithological features were strongly suggestive of their being basal beds resting on an older and unconformable series. This first impression as to their origin has been gradually strengthened with more extended acquaintance, and there is little doubt, I think, that we have in the beds, now briefly described, the base of the Cambrian series of the Mount Lofty and associated ranges. The general strike of the beds follows a north-by-east direction, through the Mount Lofty and Barossa ranges, and can be studied in the following localities:—/(a) the Inman Valley; (>) in the ranges, a little east of Myponga; (c) on the Onkaparinga, a little below Hack’s Bridge, at Mylor; (d) at Aldgate, Stirling, and Carey’s Gully; (¢) on the southern spurs of Forest Range, between Summerton and Balhannah ; (/) on the River Torrens, near the confluence of Sixth Creek, and through Houghton; (7) on the South Para, near Menzies’ Barossa Mine; (/) on a line, rather more to the east, forming escarpments of the Barossa Ranges, south-east of Williamstown; (7) and at Tanunda. There is also a con- glomerate at Hog Bay,* Kangaroo [sland, which is about on the same line of strike with the outcrops already referred to, and may represent the same horizon. As illustrative of the general features of these beds a few of the outcrops will be briefly described. Aldgate. — In this locality the basal beds are mostly gritty sandstones, with white felspathic cement, passing at times into coarse grits, with occasional pebbles. The stone is soft to friable. A special feature of the stone (as it is of most of the beds at this horizon) is the occurrence of ilmenite grains, which are laid down along current planes or diffused thr ough- out the stone. Current bedding is common. Joints irregu- lar. Much strain is exhibited by the texture of the stone, as well as by frequent small faultings of the body of the stone, which is only made apparent by the dislocation or faulting * Tate: Trans. Roy. Soc. South Aus., aah v1. (1889- 83), p. 122, Howchin: Ibid., vol. xxvii. (1903), p. 82. 250 of the dark lines of ilmenite deposits. The stone can be got in very large blocks, but is of uncertain coherence. These beds can be studied at Torode’s Quarry, Stirling West, from which the stone for building the Conservatorium of Music and portions of the Adelaide Children’s Hospital was obtained. The quarry exposes about 50 feet of stone face, with a south-east dip at 42°. The top layer of the quarry is a hard siliceous quartzite of the Mitcham type. This hard bed can be traced on the west side of the quarry, across the . road, and on the railway line, where it is exposed in the first cutting above the Aldgate Station. The beds also skirt the hillside on the north side of the line, and have supplied a quarry near the entrance to Sewell’s Nursery, showing a dip south-east at 21°. Opposite the railway gates (north side) the road is cut through these rocks, showing, in top beds, about 24 feet of soft laminated sandrock, underlain by hard Mitcham stone, with diffused ilmenite grains. Dip south-east at 20°. The hard rock is exposed for about 17 feet in thick- ness, under which is soft laminated felspathic beds. At a short distance up the road to Stirling the first of two quar- ries shows soft laminated rock on top, with hard Mitcham stone beneath, and a dip south-east at 16-25°. About 70 yards higher up the road the second quarry exposes hard white felspathic quartzite, in broad dip slopes, reading south- west at 10°. According to the dip, which shows a slight anti- clinal curve across the strike, the main stone probably under- lies the hard rock of the lower quarry, which is further in- dicated by the former being overlaid by hard _ siliceous quartzite, as in the case of the lower quarry. Within 20 or 30 yards of the felspathic quartzite, grani- tic rocks appear in the road, and in the creek which runs by its side. The granitic belt has a width, at this spot, of 420 yards, with an ‘outcrop trending in a north-easterly directioa, showing at intervals through the ranges. It cannot be traced in the opposite direction, being apparently obscured by the felspathic sandstones and grits which rest upon it. The question of the relationship which the grits bore to the granite was rendered difficult, inasmuch as the line of junction is obscured by soil and wash from the hills. Tt was observed, however, that the granite, which is mostly in the form of pegmatite and aplitic dikes, penetrates a set of beds which are of very distinct lithological character from the local grits, as well as divergent in dip. On the south side of the granitic belt aplitic veins penetrate what may be a much altered quartzite; whilst on the north side the granite 1s bounded by talcose and chloritic slates, which Show a dip of 75°, with a face to the road of 77 yards long. At the north- 201 ern limits of these slates the local sandstones are seen again, with a dip south-east at 45°. These beds, with granitic in- trusions, I regard as a Pre-Cambrian inlier that has become exposed by the removal of the basal beds of the Cambrian series. Another section of the beds in question can be seen on the back road leading from Aldgate Station to Stirling. It is almost due east of the one last described, and at no great (:3- tance from it. The outcrop is exposed in a small cutting on the road, and shows unconformity between the two series The Pre-Cambrian slates, with pegmatite veins, show folia, with a dip south 10° west at 85°, and are overlain by hard quartzite of the Mitcham type, which dips 10° east of south at 35°. A still more interesting exposure of the two unconform- able series occurs about one and a half miles to the north- east of the one just described, on Sections 1203, 1133, and 1134, Hundred of Onkaparinga. On the district road, in front of Mr. Melrose’s house, and on the creek to the east of the road, an excellent line of junction can be studied. Here very characteristic exposures of the Aldgate sandstone occur, which can be seen resting unconformably on aplitic and highly-foliated crystalline rocks, the former with a strike 120° east of north and dip 25° south-west, and the latter with foliated strike 10° east of north and dip 75° easterly. The grits are in places coarser than those which occur near the Aldgate township, and by following them down the creek they are seen to include rolled pebbles. In one instance, at least, a fragment of the older series was observed to be included in the upper beds near the line of junction, and also a rolled nodule of ilmenite. Lately I have had the privilege of being accompanied in a visit to the Aldgate section by my col- league, Mr. D. Mawson, B.Sc., Professor T. W. Edgeworth David, F.R.S., and Professor Skeats, D.Sc., who concurred in the interpretation that had been given to the beds. The granite near Melrose’s belongs to a much larger patch of the Pre-Cambrian beds than that which is exposed near Aldgate Station. It hes to the north-east of Stirling East, and can be seen on the main road going to Carey’s Gully, about 200 yards from the Stirling East public school. It goes north- westerly to an unused north-and-south district road, and through Sir John Downer’s and other properties to the dis- trict road between Piccadilly and Woodhouse, for three- quarters of a mile, beyond which it cannot be traced in that direction, in consequence of the ground falling suddenly away to low cultivated flats. On the main road to Woodhouse and the old sawmill it is clearly defined, but very rotten; and in 292 a small quarry, near Cox’s Creek, the junction of the granite with the slate rocks, and its intrusions into them, are clearly seen. The granite crosses the creek at the bridge, and out- crops on the rise of the hill on that side. A district road goes off from the Carey’s Gully road, in a southerly direc- tion, through Section 1203, along which the granite can be traced, making bold outcrops on Mr. A. H. Smith’s grounds. (Section 1133), and was proved in a well near the homestead at a shallow depth, yielding a moderate supply of water. It does not seem to pass behind Mr. Melrose’s house (unless very near to it), as a quarry in Aldgate sandstone occurs in the grounds behind the house, with dip south-east at 30°. North-west of the house, quartz and ironstone outcrop ; whilst on the low ground on the north side there is a large outcrop of granite, which is but slightly decomposed. Following the rise to the north-east, there are considerable outcrops of granite in a scrub, and these join on to those already described on the district road at Mr. Smith’s, and in the section which shows the unconformity. This granitic patch may be re- garded as about one and a half miles in length by about a mile in width. A special feature of the quartz veins, included in these Pre-Cambrian beds, is that they frequently contain ilmenite plates and nodules and grains, which is presumably the source of the detrital ilmenite abundantly present in the overlying grits and conglomerate. The Grey Spur, Inman Valley.—The outcrop of the basal beds in the Inman Valley district is one of the most marked and instructive of those examined. It is approached by a district road, which crosses the Inman at the eighth milepost from Victor Harbour, passing over a ridge into a lateral val- ley. In this valley, near the homestead of Mr. J. J. Cross- man, is the Dog Hill (Section 84, Hundred of Encounter Bay), exhibiting a very rocky face on its south-east side. This prominent ridge consists of a coarse conglomerate, and was named the Grey Spur by Mr. D. H. Cudmore, of Adare, Vic- tor Harbour, who was the first to call attention to its re- markable features. The matrix consists of a coarse arkose grit, the chief in- gredients being quartz and felspar, mostly sharp or _ but slightly water-worn, and in places fragments of aplite. The pebbles are very numerous, strongly water-worn, and occur up to 10 inches in length. They consist mainly of a very hard siliceous quartzite, with rounded quartz, granitic, and other rocks. Layers and grains of ilmenite are distributed more or less throughout the bed. It is often laid down under cur- rent bedding, showing its derived origin, whilst some of the 4 253 included quartz and other pebbles exhibit the same mineral of primary origin in situ. At the base of the conglomerate, which is about 150 feet in thickness, is a layer of finer material a few feet thick, making an unconformable junction with the granitic and highly-altered schists and quartzites on which it rests. The evidence of strain and shear, so generally present in the Mount Lofty Ranges, is strongly developed in the lower parts of the conglomerate. The line of junction with the older Pre-Cambrian beds appears to have shown itself a plane of weakness, and consequently of yielding along the line of least resistance. The basal portions of the beds have been ereatly altered by shear, flattening out the particles, and drawing them out in the direction of the movement. The effect has been to convert the lower parts of the bed into a flattened, schistose structure. A similar effect has been pro- duced on the included pebbles within the zone of shearing, flattening and drawing them out into long blade-like lenticles ; whilst some of the quartzite pebbles have been converted into quartz-rock, making pseudo-quartz veins along the planes of bedding. The effect is most striking. In the upper parts of the conglomerate the included pebbles have suffered little or no distortion, but as they gradually approach the shear plane for some yards the deformation becomes increasingly evident. At one spot, near the bottom of the bed, differential movement could be detected in a line of fracture which passed through three adjacent pebbles, with the effect that the upper portions were carried forward 2 inches beyond those portions of the pebbles which were situated below the line of fracture. No intrusive veins of quartz were observed passing up from the older beds into the Cambrian grits, although it is probable that the shearing took place at great depth, and was associated with some measure of hydro-thermic action, indi- cated by the development of quartz along the bedding planes, and which no doubt contributed to the plasticity of the pebbles under pressure and movement. The conglomerate bed has been greatly fractured, ex- hibiting vertical smooth joints, the joint planes passing equally through matrix and pebbles, showing as clean and smooth faces as though cut by a knife. The lower, or Pre-Cambrian, beds in this section con- sist chiefly of aplite in coarse crystals of quartz and felspar, sometimes passing into pegmatite or granite. The beds are much broken by quartz veins, which, together with the granite intrusions, have penetrated and greatly altered the sedimen- tary beds of this older series. The external appearance of these beds is very deceptive. for the molecular reconstruction 2904 has been so complete in many instances that what looks in general form like a sedimentary rock, shows, on fracture, com- plete crystalline structure. The beds contain much ilme- nite, which is often sporadically developed, and generally in association with quartz. These granitoid beds are a leading feature in the Inman Valley exposures, and are of great ex- tent. The unconformity of the two series is determined upon the following considerations :— A The great discordance in structural features. (a) The underlying beds are to a large degree, crystal- line, interpenetrating, and intrusive, inducing marked contact metamorphism in the sedimentary beds of the same series. (b) The overlying grits and conglomerate are as clearly clastic in origin, and in no instance was it ob- served, in either the Aldgate or Grey Spur sec- tions, that the aplitic veins pass over the line of junction and penetrate the upper series. In other localities, however, veins of pegmatite penetrate the Cambrian grits. (c) The Pre-Cambrian beds are highly foliated, whilst the newer series, in the localities now more par- ticularly referred to, gives no distinct evidence of foliation. (d) The gritty particles forming the matrices of the upper beds give proof that they are derived, whilst the arkose character of these grits points to the dis- integration of the underlying granitoid rocks as the source of the material. (cv) The occurrence of ilmenite in both series of beds is a characteristic feature; only, in the Pre-Cambrian it is a primary constituent, whilst in the Cambrian grits and conglomerates it 1s usually laid down on distinct planes of current deposition, showing its secondary origin. The quartz pebbles in the con- elomerate, which have been derived from the older beds, frequently contain ilmenite crystals or plates. B The stratigraphical unconformity. (f) There is a distinct discordance shown along the plane of junction, the Pre-Cambrian having usually a much higher angle of dip (foliation) than the over- lying beds. Barossa. At Williamstown, slates (probably the lower phyllites) outcrop in Victoria Creek, and are nearly vertical ZB5 in their dip. Following the Mount Pleasant road, in a south- east direction, the basal grits, in a very decomposed condi- tion, appear in the road cuttings. Thin veins of pegmatite are seen in the sections. About half a mile from the South Para River, on the same road, good sections are visible of these beds, with pegmatite veins, up to 22 inches or more, cutting obliquely across the bedding. By following a district road, near Kangaroo Gully, these beds can be instructively studied, as they make very exten- sive outcrops on the ridge which runs south to the South Para River, including Sections 125, 126, 127, 136, and 222, Hundred of Barossa. The beds are more highly metamorphosed than those of the Aldgate district, which can be explained from the fact that they are situated more easterly, and therefore more within the zone of metamorphism which becomes more and more marked in that direction. instead of the felspathic cement, as in the Aldgate grits, mica is developed, and the stone often resembles a micaceous schist, whilst preserving the bedding-planes. Iimenite is present to an extraordinary degree, showing bedding-planes and cross-bedding in profusion. The pres- ence of this mineral has had the effect of delineating in sharp lines the fitfulness of current action, furnishing some striking examples of this kind, and at the same time demonstrating the sedimentary origin of the beds. This is a feature which strongly differentiates the newer series from the older. The presence of rounded pebbles in the grits accords with what is found in connection with these beds elsewhere. At the Grey Spur and at Forest Range the beds are char- acteristic conglomerates, whilst in other places the included pebbles are scattered irregularly through the matrix. This js the case with the Barossa beds. For a mile or more of out- crop these rounded stones are plentiful, but distributed singly rather than in layers or groups, and do not reveal the sorting action of water that is usual with clastic deposits. The stones are worn to a very high degree, being in nearly every case almost round, but there is no sodlsnce of strong-cur- rent action in their transportation, as they are set in undis- turbed finer material. The pebbles appear to consist of only two kinds: quartz, aud a very fine-grained, siliceous quartz- ite, the sizes ranging up to ten inches or a foot; stones of 3 to 5 in. in diameter are very common. It is not easy to ex- plain their occurrence under the conditions in which they are found. The beds give no evidence of ice action, as the bed- ding is undisturbed, and there is no indication of morainic 256 material having been laid down, even by floating ice; whilst the limited variety of included pebbles is a further difficulty in assuming such an origin. To refer the beds to a crush conglomerate is equally out of the question, so that the diffi- culty must be left for a possible future solution. The Pre-Cambrian beds are found underlying the basal grits near the southern extremity of the ridge, forming one of the south-western escarpments of the Barossa Ranges. The beds consist of a very coarse pegmatite, penetrating a true mica schist (mostly biotite), with accessories of beryls, tour- maline, and other minerals. The beds are highly foliated, showing a strike of 10° west of north, and a dip at 78° east- . erly. The exact junction between the Cambrian and the Pre- Cambrian beds cannot be seen at surface, as a narrow area of a few yards of grass separates the two, but the change is abrupt and strongly defined. OTHER LocaLiTigEs.—Time has not permitted careful ex- amination of other outcrops no less interesting than those just described. Of these the following may be mentioned :- Forest Range.—This section (to which my attention was called by Mr. Robert Caldwell) occurs near the main road, five miles west of Balhannah. It presents a bold scarp to the east and south, about 200 feet in height. In lithological features it closely resembles the Inman Valley outcrop, in being a coarse conglomerate, with gritty matrix. Expo- sures of the conglomerate beds, much decomposed, can be recognized for most of the distance from Carey’s Gully to the great outcrop of the Forest Range spur. The Pre-Cambrian slates, etc., follow the range on the east side of Carey’s Gully. River Torrens and Houghton.—A very interesting ex- posure of these beds can be studied in the Torrens, near the confluence of the Sixth Creek, and higher up the stream. The older series form a hill rising abruptly from the Tor- rens, to a height of seven or eight hundred feet. Its ser- rated and precipitous faces have suggested the local name of “the Devil’s Staircase.” The river has cut its way through its lower slopes and exposed fine sections. The beds are in- tensely altered slates, foliated, with felspar and quartz de- weloped along the planes of foliation, giving the rock a eneissic character. Larger lenticles of a granitoid character are frequently present. On the western and southern sides of these older rocks the basal grits of the Cambrian series out- crop at a lower angle of dip. They closely resemble the il- menite grits of Aldgate, with an occasional pebble included. The junction of the two series can be traced to Houghton, 257 etc, in which direction the Pre-Cambrian beds are largely penetrated by granitic intrusions, some of which are of great width. South Para.—The junction can be studied near Menzies’ Barossa Mine, and in the South Para River, where very fine sections occur. The older rocks in this district develop a very characteristic augen-gneiss structure. They form the country rock at the Princess Alice Mine, and have been quar- ried to form the weir of the Barossa Reservoir. Tanunda.—The felspathic grits are quarried near the township, and the older series is developed, under a great variety of lithological features, in the Tanunda Creek. Yorke Peninsula.—The western limits of the Cambrian serles are indicated on Yorke Peninsula by features closely analogous to those on the eastern side. At Ardrossan fels- pathic grits of Cambrian age rest unconformably on pegma- tites and graphic granite. At Winulta Creek a coarse quartz conglomerate is seen to overlie similar granitic rocks. At Port Hughes, near Moonta, there is a coarse conglomerate and siliceous gritty quartzites outcropping on the beach. The included pebbles are nearly all quartz ana rounded, similar to those of Winulta Creek. In certain zones the rock has been greatly cracked, and subsequently filled with quartz. These quartz veins run through matrix and pebbles quite in- differently. Dip, north, 20° west at 12°. No floor was visible, but granitic rocks outcrop at no great distance from the exposure. X.—Pre-Cambrian Complex (Archzan). The fundamental rocks which underlie the Cambrian series have been but slightly investigated. They occur as inliers of the Cambrian beds, sometimes several miles in extent. They are frequently in an advanced stage of decom- position, and in consequence have suffered extensive denuda- tion and are reduced to low situations. Their study involves many difficult problems, but is of more than ordinary inter- est, as they will, no doubt, throw light on the early condi- tions of the Australian continent and the development of its orographic features. The Pre-Cambrian rocks consist primarily of a sedimen- tary series, but these have been so altered under metamorphic action as frequently to obliterate their stratigraphical boun- daries. They have been subjected to successive eruptive and intrusive conditions, which have profoundly modified both the texture and structure of the beds. In the central axes of the Mount Lofty and Barossa Ranges they include extensive areas of granitoid rocks, mostly under the forms of aplite and peg- Jd 258 matite. The batholiths and granitic dikes penetrated the sedimentaries, and were, in turn, penetrated by the later pegmatites and quartz veins, forming together an exceed- ingly complicated order of geological events. One of the most attractive fields for investigation in relation to this subject is the pegmatization of the Pre-Cam- brian sedimentaries, which is a special feature of their occur- rence. In addition to the injection of thick dikes and veins of pegmatite, possessing a very coarse crystalline texture, the pegmatitic action has penetrated the schistose rocks over wide areas. tn the slates the cleavage seems to have pre- sented the planes of least resistance to the mineral solutions, with the result that the latter has, in many instances, com- , pletely penetrated the older slates, depositing, in parallel folia, strings, and lenticles, crystalline aggregates of felspar and quartz, giving the slates a granular or gnelssic appear- ance. These lines of intrusive deposition may be almost microscopic in their fineness, or they may swell into lenticu- lar aggregates of large size, causing the slaty laminz to curve around them. Asa rule, the pegmatitic material follows the cleavage planes, but at times it breaks across the cleavage and produces a tangential deposition. The gradual passage of these impregnated slates into a highly developed and char- acteristic augen-gneiss can be followed. At Aldgate and dis- trict we have examples of the former type, and at Barossa we have examples of the latter. | No evidence could be clearer that gneiss, in some of its forms at least, can be de- veloped under the conditions just described. Van [ise, in his great work on metamorphism,* lucidly discusses the origin and phases of pegmatization. He con- cludes that pegmatites are formed in the latter stages of ig- neous intrusicns, when the liquid rock becomes increasingly aqueous, and gradually passes into a hot-water solution. He states: —‘‘From the water solutions true cementation takes place: from the rock solutions, true injection. Pegmatiza- tion comprises these and the intermediate processes. It is not to be expected that under great pressure and at high tem- peratures there is any sharp line of demarcation between the processes of aqueous cementation and igneous injection. At the surface it is usually easy | to sharply separate aqueous from igneous. action, but deeper within the earth even the strongest rocks are latently plastic. At great pressure heated waters must have power to absorb a quantity of material far beyond that at the * A Treatise on Metamorphism, U.S. Geo. Sur. Monog. xlvii., p: 20. 259 surface of the earth. Truly liquid rock is highly impregnated with water. It, therefore, is probable that at considerable depths we have, on the one hand, material which all would call water solution, and on the other hand material which all would call liquid rock, with no sharp division-line between the two. If this be so, there are all stages of gradation between true igneous injection and aqueous cementation, and all the vari- ous phases of pegmatization may thus be fully explained.’’* It is an interesting circumstance that Van Hise and others have observed in the United States a schistose im- pregnation which appears to be precisely similar to that which is exhibited in the Pre-Cambrian slates of SouthAustralia. He says:—‘“‘This phase of pegmatization [the aqueo-igneous] is most extensive and best illustrated by rocks in which there is a gneissic or schistic structure, since cleavage furnishes planes of weakness which are readily taken advantage of by the ig- neous rocks. . . . Parallel to the folia are innumerable cementation-injection bands of lighter colour. These bands vary from those as thin as leaflets, being perhaps but a single row of crystals, to those of considerable width. There may be many such bands within the space of a centimetre, or a single one may be many metres across. Frequently parts of the in- jected material are in dike-like masses of varying size, which cut the schistosity at various angles. At numberless places the leaf-like bands of pegmatitic-looking material parallel to the schistosity are found to be connected directly with the dike- like masses cutting the schistosity.”+ The final stage of this aqueo-igneous process is when the liquid residuum is distinctively a water solution, and is an agent of simple cementation, penetrating fissures and cavities caused by mechanical strain and porous beds, depositing quartz either diffused or in veins. No better illustration of this class of hydrothermal action could be had than occurs in the inti- mately reticulating veins of quartz,-which penetrate the slates bordering the pegmatized areas of Aldgate. The weathering of the slate has freed the quartz from the matrix, strewing the ground with the scattered fragments, and in bare places giving the resemblance to a light cover of snow. As accessory minerals in the pegmatized rock, the most prevalent are ilmenite and tourmaline. Both occur as in- clusions of quartz. The ilmenite is in grains and plates, some- times in considerable quantity. Tourmaline occurs, for the most part, as long acicular crystals of black colour. These * A Treatise on Metamorphism, U.S. Geo. Sur. Meroe irik p. 723. ibid... .palkep 2 260 are sometimes developed along certain planes in the slates, and still more commonly in vein quartz. If the vein is nar- row, the rod-like prisms of tourmaline, mixed with quartz, cross the vein at right angles to the rock walls. When the vein reaches a thickness of a few inches the tourmaline be- comes zonal, on either side of the quartz vein, exhibiting parallel dark bands, half an inch to an inch in thickness, which, when closely examined, is seen to consist of very fine bundles of tourmaline needles. Another mode of its occur- rence is in larger prismatic crystals, in quartz, under an arrangement similar to that of graphic granite, the tourma- line taking the place of the felsnar; whilst the strongly con- trasted colours of the two minerals make a very striking effect when viewed in transverse section. Other accessories are beryls (yellow and blue), which are very common in the Mount Crawford district ; garnets, chiastolite, etc. XI.—General Considerations. Information, at present, is too limited to attempt a full explanation of the great earth movements which built up the Mount Lofty and associated ranges. A few steps in advance, however, have been taken. The base of the Cam- brian series has been determined, and the _ stratigraphical order of this very thick set of beds (so far as the central and western districts are concerned) 1s now fairly well understood. The eastern side of the ranges, with its highly metamorphosed rocks, presents greater difficulties, and these await solution. A few facts that will assist in reaching some generalizations may be mentioned. It is clear that prior to the movement towards elevation the base of the Cambrians had become depressed to a great depth. This is made evident by the great thickness of the superin- cumbent beds and also by the metamorphosed condition of the beds, which must have sunk to such a depth. It has already been stated that pegmatite veins penetrate the Cam- brian grits in the Barossa district. They are not so nume- rous or on so great a scale as those which intersect the Pre- Cambrian of the same and other districts, but their occur- rence in the lower Cambrian beds is an important point of evi- dence. In the few examples of such intrusive dikes, noticed at Barossa, there was proof of inter-action between the rock mass and the intrusive dike. The latter, along either margin for the thickness of about an inch, showed a modification of crystalline structure as a_ selvage, approaching the comb-vein structure where the crystallization is developed at right angles to the retaining wall. From the difficulty in distinguishing arkose clastic 261 material from thin intrusive veins, it is quite possible that the latter may exist in parts of the basal grits in a form almost indistinguishable to the eye. I was particularly struck with such a possibility when examining the coarse felspathic erits which rest immediately on the Pre-Cambrian beds near Melrose’s, Aldgate. My friend and colleague, Mr. Mawson, B.Sc., discovered a pegmatite vein penetrating the Cambrian glacial till of Sturt Valley, which is at a considerably higher geological horizon than the basal grits. There is thus sufficient evidence to show that there was, to a limited extent, contemporaneous pegmatization of both the Pre-Cambrian and the lover Cambrian, and was probably coincident with the maximum depression of the Cambrian series. If the Mount Lofty area received the full thickness of the Cambrian beds, as developed to the north of Adelaide, the depth to which they must have sunk ‘luring the period of their deposition must have equalled, if not exceeded, 20,000 feet, which would bring them well within the zone of meta- morphic action. The Mount Lofty Ranges, through a breadth of from 20 to 30 miles, exhibit anticlinoria on a large scale, but, through excessive denudation, the primitive foldings are truncated, and often obscure. The main axis of the uplift cor- responds, roughly, with the centre of the highlands, although the Archzan core often occupies a less elevation than the superincumbent beds. From this ridge of elevation the beds, on the whole, dip away westwards and eastwards. A consider- ation of the causes which brought about the elevatory move- ment must be deferred until the eastern side of the ranges has been studied, and more particularly the great igneous belt which skirts the highlands of South Australia on their eastern and southern sides. It is, however, certain that the great earth-push came from the east, which determined the main north and south direction of the major folds—that is, the main folding has occurred at right angles to the folding forces, and has produced endless small overlaps and thrusts towards the west. There was also a nip between north and south, which contracted the area along the strike and diverted the main folds into a more or less tangential Cirection. This duplex system of crush has caused the beds, in many places, to roll in all directions, giving rise to a periclinal dip, pro- ducing either domes or saucer-shaped depressions. This fea- ture is still more markedly developed in the Flinders Ranges. Small slips and overthrusts frequently occur on the line of strike, and are well seen on the beach between Brighton and Cane Jervis, where the sea has cut a floor of marine denuda- tion. 262 The Mount Lofty ridge is in a condition of relatively rapid waste. The felspathic quartzites, of which it is largely composed, are greatly decomposed and but slightly cemented. When the mechanical action of running water is brought to bear on this material it is rapidly eroaed. The clearing of scrub-lands and the cultivation of steep slopes are important contributory factors in producing this result. As the inco- herent material is carried away by rain and rivers, the sili- ceous outcrops will become more prominent, and the valleys, following the direction of the more friab!e material, will be- come widened and deepened. In certain places this rapid denudation may have a disastrous effect on the productiveness of the gullies, and an economic foresight suggests that every effort should be exercised to conserve the soil in such situ- ations where, by baring and loosening the ground under cul- tivation, it is liable to waste to an excessive degree. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XII. Fig. 1. Diagrammatic section of the Lower Cambrian beds from the River Torrens to the sea—about 15 miles. Fig. 2. Diagrammatic section, from Mount Lofty to Aldgate, tc illustrate how the Lower Limestone may be prevented from outcropping at the surface. Two parallel trough faults are shown in the section, by which the beds are thrown down to the east, and thereby cut off the limestone. Fig. 3. Diagrammatic section, in which another explanation for the absence of the limestone at the surface is given, as alter- native to the former. The section shows a normal fault, which hades in the direction of the dip of the beds. By this move- ment some beds slide down the fault-plane, and are thereby eut off from the surface. 263 FURTHER NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW GENERA AND SPECIES. By the Rev. T. BLacxsurn, B.A. [Read October 2, 1906.| XXXVI. LAMELLICORNES. COPRIDES. ONTHOPHAGUS. O. Macleayi, Blackb. I have received from Mr. R. C. L. Perkins a number of specimens from North Queensland, which I cannot venture definitely to pronounce specifically distinct from O. Macleayi, although they present some differences. They are of darker colour (dark piceous), with the apex and the hinder part of the lateral margins of the elytra red. This colouring points to the probability that the unique type of O. Macleayi is immature, its colour being dark red brown, with a traceable indication of still hghter colouring of the sides and apex of the elytra. The eyes are a little less dis- tinctly granulate in the type (which again may result from immaturity), so that these recently acquired specimens do not fall so evidently as the type into the aggregate characterized in my tabulation (Tr.R.8.8.A., 1903, p. 270) as having the eyes ‘scarcely visibly facetted on their. surface,” although they certainly could not be referred to the other aggregate (of species having the eyes “‘conspicuously facetted”). On the whole, I believe them to be O. Macleayi. Among the Queens- land specimens there is one male. all the rest (and also, con- trary to my previous opinion, the type, assuming identity) being females. The male prothorax is much more massive than the female, with its front strongly and vertically decliv- ous, the slight protuberances of the female notably exagge- rated, and the puncturation of the dorsal surface finer and less close. The male clypeus is more elongated and narrowed in front. with its front almost evenly rounded. The sexual difference of the front tibize is almost nil. The Queensland specimens vary considerably in size (long., 3-4 |.), and in some of them the pronotum has a slight coppery gloss. The head of the male is unarmed. O. hbipustulatus, Fab. By some oversight I misplaced this species in tabulating the Onthophagi of Australia (Tr.R.S.S.A., 1903). I placed it among the species having the base of the pronotum without any raised or depressed mar- 264 gin, whereas it should stand among those having a fine raised margin along the base (Group V.), where its place will be be- side, Zietzt, Blackb., and mnitidior, Blackb. (page 271), from both of which it differs by the presence of a humeral red spot on each elytron. The punctures of its elytral interstices are notably stronger than those of O. Zicetzi, and much less coarse than those of O. nitidior. SERICIDES. DIPHUCEPHALA. This extensive genus, no doubt on account of its species being for the most part of brilliant colourings, and many of them very abundant, contains numerous species whose so- called descriptions are scarcely worthy of being called descrip- tions at all. Consequently a really reliable monograph of its species is practically unattainable. On this ground, I have always hitherto omitted it when dealing with allied genera. As, however, the types are so scattered over the world that it is not likely one author can be in a much better position than another for solving the many enigmas of the genus, only prospect of eventually redvu_ing it to order seems to lie in someone making the best attempt he can at a revision of its contents, and so giving an opportunity for those who have access to individual types in isolated collections to confirm or correct with authority his identifications. It is with this idea that I offer the following notes on the genus, and [ hope to be able at least to render it possible to identify the insects to which the specitic names are applied in a memoir that, 1f in places needing correction, at any rate discusses all the existing names in a connected series. I have had the advan- tage of examining nearly all the types of Sir W. Macleay’s species, and some of his identifications of species described in Europe, and therefore probably have at command as much profitable material for the work as anyone else could have. The species of Diphucephala have been described under 56 names, the earliest description being. I think, that of D. colaspidoides, Schonh., published about the year 1806. The only treatises that I know dealing with the species collec- tively are those of Mr. G. R. Waterhouse (A.D. 1835), dealing with 16 species, and Sir W. Macleay (A.D. 1886) dealing with 43 species. The former of those treatises is, of course, obso- lete, and the latter merely gives descriptions (many of them very insufficient) of the species known to the author, and which are divided into five groups, but not further classified. Burmeister, it is true, in 1855, included a synopsis of the genus in his ““Handbuch der Entomologie,” but it contained only a slight grouping of the species, and was little more than 265 a repetition of Waterhouse, with the addition of three new species. Other authors only catalogued the species or de scribed new ones. No table has been published to indicate the distinctive characters. Of the 56 names referred to above, 11 are placed in Mas ters’s Catalogue, which is, I believe, the latest catalogue of the Australian Diphucephale, as mere synonyms. ‘The following of them I propose to assume to be correctly treated in that catalogue, although in most instances their determination (largely traditional) is very unlikely to be founded on exami- nation of types, and, if that is the case, is little more than guesswork, owing to the insufficient nature of the descriptions. But since they have been assigned to certain species as syno- nyms, no end would be served by changing the assignment through a different guess. I propose, therefore, to let the following synonymy stand pending substantial reasons for changing it: — D. foveolata, Boisd.=aurulenta, Kirby. D. lineatocollis, Boisd. = colaspidoides, Macl. (? Gyll.). D. splendens, W. 8. Macl.=colaspidoides, Macl. (? Gyll.). D. acanthopus, Boisd.=furcata, Guér. D. pilistriata, Waterh.=lineata, Boisd. D. enea, Sturm=rugosa, Boisd. D. viridis, Sturm = sericea, Kirby. D. pusilla, Waterh.=smaragdula, Boisd. The following synonymy of Masters’ Catalogue must not be allowed to stand : — D. pygmea, Waterh.=fulgida, Boisd. [Waterhouse’s description applies to a very distinct and easily recognizable species. | Boisduval’s is quite worthless, founded on a specimen which had lost its legs, and is in- capable of confident identification with any insect. | D. Hope, Waterh.=furcata, Guér. [Waterhouse’s description applies well to a very distinct species. Guérin’s description (Voy. Coquille, vol. ii, 1830, p- 89), though very lengthy, cannot be definitely associated with the insect which Waterhouse described, because it omits reference to an important sexual character which Waterhouse correctly indicated in his species ; it, however, applies very well to an insect closely allied to Hopez, and the only objection to regarding it as referring to that insect is its citing Port Jack- son (instead of Western Australia) as the habitat. I take it that Guérin’s habitat is erroneous, and I regard Hope and furcata as two good species. It is to be noted that Water- house (Tr. Ent. Soc., I., 1836, p. 219) mentions a D. furcata, Guér., for which he gives the reference, “Griff. Cuv. Insecta, 266 J. p. 483,” of which he gives a short diagnosis, adding his opinion that it is not a Diphucephala. I have not the work he refers to, but have no doubt Waterhouse’s opinion is cor- rect. The insect of which he furnishes the diagnosis is clearly, however, not that which Guérin described in Voy. Coquille. | D. Spencei, Waterh.=rugosa, Boisd. [Here again Waterhouse’s description can be confidently identified with a familiar species; but Boisduval’s rugosa might be any one of several Diphucephale. I think that I know rugosa, Boisd., from its being a common species near Sydney, and one of those that fit the description, and there- fore I propose to retain the name and treat Spence: and rugosa as two good species. And here I may remark that Waterhouse himself seems to have confused the two species, since he states in a footnote to the description of Spencer that after writing 1t he had observed the female of that insect to differ from the male by the front angles of the prothorax not being produced. The female in question was no doubt a specimen of the insect that I take to be rugosa, Boisd. I have both sexes of both species before me, and do not find that there is any sexual difference in the front angles of the prothorax. This confusion of Spencet and rugosa no doubt is what accounts for Waterhouse’s memoir not containing the description of so common a species as that which I have called rugosa, Boisd.] Of species more recently described I find that D. lati- collis, Lea (which I have received from its author), is evi- dently the species that Waterhouse described as Spencer; and an examination of the presumable type of D. prasina, Macl. (in the Macleay Museum), has satisfied me that it is the in- sect which I described as D. Kershawi, Macleay’s being the older name. I have now indicated as synonyms 10 of 56 names that have been used for Diphucephala. Of the remaining 46 I have been able to identify, with more or less confidence, and tabulate the characters of, 35 of the species that they repre- sent, and I furnish below descriptions of 6 new species, bring- ing the total to 41 species. There are thus left 11 names to be accounted for, on which I make the following notes. To prepare these notes I have visited the Sydney Museums, and have there examined the specimens bearing the names that Macleay used for Diphucephale, but, unfortunately, with not very satisfactory results, as there is in very few instances any mark to indicate the actual type. In some cases specimens of more than one species bear the same name, and in one in- stance the presumable type differs widely in colouring from 267 the description. I place the names now to be treated of in alphabetical order : — D. azureipennis, Macl. The presumable type (in the Mac- leay Museum) does not seem to me to differ from 1). pulchella, Waterh, It is a female. D. cerulea, Macl. Type presumably in the Brisbane Museum, which [ have not visited. The description would fit several species. D. cuprea, Macl. The presumable type (in the Macleay Museum) appears to me DV. rugosa, Boisd., var. D. fulgida, Boisd. The description cannot be identified with any particular species. D. hirtipennis, Macl. Type presumably in the Brisbane Museum. The description does not enable me to place the species in my tabulation ; but I think it is a good species which I have not seen. D. humeralis, Macl. The presumable type (in the Macleay Museum) appears to me to be D. rugosa, Boisd., var. D. latipennis, Macl. Type presumably in the Brisbane Museum. The description contains no definite information as to whether the longitudinal sulcus of the pronotum is divided in its basal part. If it be not divided, latipennis is probably near Mastersi, Macl.; if it is divided, the species will stand in my tabulation near parvula, Waterh. D. lateralis, Macl. I can find no difference, except a little in colour, between the presumable type (in the Macleay Museum) and the species which stands in the same Museum (correctly, I have no doubt) as D. pygmaa, Waterh. D. obscura, Macl. The presumable type in the Macleay Museum does not appear to differ, except in colour, from that of D. nitidicollis, Macl. ‘Vhe only definite distinction that the description indicates consists in the greater length of the lateral fovez of the pronotum in obscura; but I do not find this a reliable character, except in a few instances of very peculiar lateral fovese. The length of these fovezx varies some- what within the limits of a species, and also appears different from different points of view. D. pubiventris, Burm. The description of this species is very defective, and is founded on a female example. I am fairly confident, however, that the insect it represents is D. rugosa, Boisd. Macleay makes the name a synonym of colas- pidoides, Macl. (? Gyll.), but, inter alia multa, the size that Burmeister assigns is much too small for that identification. According to Burmeister, D. rugosa, Boisd., is a synonym of D. aurulenta, Kirby ; but the latter is one of the species that even the vague description of ). rugosa cannot be made to fit. 268 D. Waterhouset, Burm. Macleay says that he has never seen this species. Neither have I seen any species that fits the description. Burmeister says that the form of its front tibie is very remarkable, but the description of the tibie that follows does not specify any character that is not found in other species. I now add notes on a few species which seem to call for special remark. D. pulchella, Waterh. The female of this species is stat- ed by Blanchard to have mucronate elytra. This is incor- rect. Probably Blanchard had before him the female of the species which Macleay subsequently named Barnard. D. pusilla, Waterh. I have not been able to identify this species. Its author says that it is unique in the Macleay Museum, but I have failed to find it there. The description does not mention any very salient character by which the in- sect would be easily recognized. Waterhouse says that its allies are D. parvula and D. Spencei--two species that cer- tainly are not closely allied, inter se, among the many Diphu- cephale now known. D. smaragdula, Burm. It is possible (but only possible) that Macleay may be right in making pusilla, Waterh., a synonym of this species. It is most improbable that he had seen the type of D. smaragdula, and the description of that species would fit almost any Diphucephala. I have used Bois- duval’s name for a species which will, I think, be recognizable by the characters indicated in my _ tabulation, because that species, being one of the many that Boisduval’s quasi-descrip- tion fits, was taken at no great distance from Paramatta (the habitat cited for smaragdula), and under those circumstances it seems hardly safe to describe it as a new species. The following tabulation shows the characters by which the Diphucephale known to me may be distinguished : — A. Legs red. B. Longitudinal sulcus of pronotum even and narrow (in some species subobsolete). C. Puncturation of pronotum very fine and close (confluent). D. Size large (4 |. or more)... ... sericea, Kirby DD. Size small (less than 31.) ... K. Scutellum not punctured... pubescens, Macl. KE. Scutellum punctured ... puberula, Blackb. CC. Hapcturation of pronotum not as, D. Base of elytra widely testaceous pulcherrima. Blc ckb DD. Base of elytra not testaceous P HANG EK. Lateral margins of elytra strongly dentate in the middle 269 Ek. Lateral margins of elytra at most feebly angular in the middle .. ih Sculpture of “elytra lete around the apex mee FF. Sculpture of elytra uni- form, or nearly so ... BB. Longitudinal sulcus of pronotum very wide and deep; lateral sulci large and approximating to each other. C. Pubescence of elytra not running in conspicuous vittee. D. Size very large (5 1.) he DD. Size much smaller (41, or less) OC. Pubescence of elytra running in conspicuous vitte. D_ Elytra very coarsely punctulate ; red with greenish gloss DD. Elytra less coarsely punctu- late, green BBB. Longitudinal sulcus of pronotum double at base . ~ AA. Legs metallic, and of dark colour. B: Elytra red BA BB. Elytra metallic. (Or Longitudinal sulcus of pronotum not double in hind part. D. Front tibize unarmed externally above apical process. Ei. Inner margins of clypeal emargination parallel or sub- parallel in male. Elytral punctures deep and_ well-de- fined. KF. Pronotum somewhat strong- ly and less finely punctured FF. Pronotum very finely and feebly punctulate. G. Pygidium of female with a large, deep impression GG. Py cidium of female even EE. Inner margins of clypeal emargination strongly di- verging in male. Elytral punctures feebler and _ less defined DD. Front tibise with an external tooth above the apical process. obso- “K. Pronotum with longitudinal sulcus narrow, continuous, and even. F. Inner apical spur of male hind tibia small, like that of intermediate tibia; fe- male pygidium not having an elevated flat. area. ignota, Macl. nitens, Mazl. rufipes, Waterh, spreta, Blackb. nitidicollis, . Mact. richmondia, Maci. Boisd. lineata, minima, acl. castanoptera, Waterh. beryllina, Burm. Hopei, Waterh. furcata, Guér. Mastersi, Macl. *D. Carteri, Blackb. (placed under EE), is somewhat inter- mediate between the two aggregates. 270 G. Inner margins of clypeal emargination of male quite parallel, or even a ap proximating towar apex. H. Hlytral puncturation serlate, lightly im- pressed, and not very close HH. Elytral “puncturation very close, strongly im- presssed, "and scarcely seriate GG. Inner margins of clypeal emargination evidently diverging in male FF. Inner apical spur of male hind tibia very long; fe- male pygidium bearing a flat elevated area EK. Dorsal sulcus of pronotum very different in front and hind parts, or very wide throughout. F. Front angles of pronotum dentate, well separated from the head. G. Secutellum not both very flat, and closely and finely asperate. H. The lateral edging of the elytra does not quite reach the base. Size very large (more than 4 1.). I. Middle of lateral mar- gins of prothorax strongly dentiform II. Middle of lateral margins of prothorax feebly angular 1D HH. Lateral edging of elytra normal. I. Punctures of prono- tum isolated and well-defined, for the most part including a single granule. J. Lateral sulci of pronotum widely separated from longitudinal — sul- cus; female elytra mucronate 3 JJ. Lateral * sulci of pronotum nearly or quite reach the longitudinal — sul- cus; female elytra normal. Childreni, Wuterh affinis, Waterh. Edwardsi, Waterh. colaspidoides, Mael. ? Gyll.) elegans, laticeps, Barnardi, Blackb. Mad. Macl. 271 K. Transversely im- pressed behind scutellum; apli- eal part of pygi- dium nitid, with basal pilose area triangularly pro- cducedi iis: --- aurolimbata, Blanch. KK. Not having ely- tra and pygi- Giumas ‘K.?? L.oHind ).part..of scutellum bear- ing a_ deep, round fovea... pulchella, Waterh. LL. Pygidium nor- mallee smaragdula, Boisd. ¢ JI. Punectures of prono- tum feeble, ill-de- fined, and generally including several m1i- nute granules. J. Sides of elytra (viewed from the side) quite straight rectipennis, Blackb. JJ. Sides of elytra (viewed from the side) sinuate. K. Elytral punctura- tion moderately strong and not exceptionally close. L. Puncturation of pronotum (ex- cept fine close asperity) all but wanting... sordida, Blackb. LL. Larger punc- tures of prono- tum quite dis- tinct. M. Brilliantly nitid ; longi- tudinal sul- cus of pro- n so chyusimM forming a large sub- quadrate ca- vity in front of base --- qQuadratigera, Blanch. MM. Much less nitid; long- itudinal sul- cus of pro- notum smal- ler and not quadrate ... angusticeps, Macl. 272 KK. Elytral pune- turation excep- tionally fine and close + ... erebra, Blackod, GG. Scutellum very flat and even, closely and _ finely asperate, H. Elytra normally (at most) costate. I. Sculpture of head and pronotum strongly of subareolate character Spencei, Waterh. II. No distinct areole, but only fine close asperity, forming sculpture of head and pronotum ». Carter, Blackb: HH. Elytra strongly cos- tate prasina, Macl. FF. Front angles of pronotum obtuse and not at all pro- minent ane eh .- rugosa, Boisd. CC. Longitudinal sulcus of pronotum doubled in basal part. D. Front tibie without any exter- nal tooth above the apical pro- jection Ee bie at un DD. An external tooth on front tibize above the apical projec- tion. E. Pronotum more or less nitid, its puncturation not very close and fine. F. The two parts of the longi- tudinal suleus of pronotum separated by a sharp strong ridge ... = oe me FF. The two parts of the longi-. tudinal suleus of pronotum separated by a feebly-rais- ed obtuse ridge. G. Elytra more closely and less coarsely punctulate purpureitarsis, Mael. GG. Elytra more _ coarsely and less closely punctu- late Me ns ... obsoleta, Macl. EE. Pronotum subopaque, owing to the very fine and close as- perity of its surface ... .. pygmea, Waterh. parvula, Waterh. aurulenta, Kirby D. puberula, sp. nov. Minus nitida; viridis, antennis clypeo pedibusque testaceo-rufis; supra pube sat densa _ brevi adpressa fulva vestita (hac in pygidio et in corpore sub- tus dilutiori magis densa); capite (ut pronotum) confer- tim subtiliter aspere punctulato; prothorace sat trans- verso, supra longitudinaliter anguste leviter canaliculato, sulcis lateralibus parvis (inter se remotis), antice fortiter 273 angustato, lateribus minus arcuatis ad mediam partem dentato-angulatis pone medium leviter sinuatis, angulis posticis subrectis; scutello subtiliter punctulato; elytris confertim subtiliter aspere punctulatis, vix manifeste cos- tulatis; tibiis anticis extus antice bidentatis. Maris clypeo sat producto, quadrato, angulatim emarginato. Feminz clypeo minus fortiter minus angulatim emarginato ; elytris ad apicem haud mucronatis. Long., 24 1.; lat. 12 1. Closely allied to D. pubescens, Macl., but easily distin- guishable by its smaller and punctulate scutellum, and by the non-mucronate apex of the elytra in the female. This species is confused in the Macleay collection with ). pubescens, Macl., but it is the one of the two that does not agree with Macleay’s description of pubescens. N. Queensland (Kuranda); taken by Mr. Dodd. D. pulcherrima, sp. nov. Mas. Nitida, letissime viridis, an- tennis (clava nigra exceptis) palpis pedibus (tarsis omni- bus et tibiis posticis plus minusve infuscatis exceptis) et elytrorum parte tertia basali (sutura viridi excepta) clare testaecis; capite, pronoti lateribus, pygidio, et corpore subtus, setis minutis adpressis testaceo-griseis densissime vestitis ; clypeo sat producto, quadrato, antice late leviter emarginato; capite crebre subaspere punctulato; pro- thorace leviter transverso, supra longitudinaliter anguste canaliculato, transversim prope marginem lateralem breviter sulcato, antice fortiter angustato, minus crebre (latera versus confertim subaspere) subfortiter punctu- lato (puncturis simplicibus), lateribus arcuatis vix sinua- tis pone medium angulatis nec dentatis, angulis posticis subrectis (vix obtusis); elytris subseriatim subrugulose fortiter punctulatis, costis manifestis circiter 4 instructis ; tiblis anticis extus antice bidentatis. The remarkable colouring of this beautiful species sepa- rates it widely from all its described congeners. Long., 34 1.; lat., 12 1. N. Queensland (Cairns). Sent by Mr. French. D. rectipennis, sp. nov. Mas. Sat nitida; sat angusta ; elong- ata; corula, purpureo-tincta, antennis nigris; supra parce subtus sat crebre albido-pubescens; capite crebre subtiliter ruguloso; clypeo lato, transversim quadrato, antice reflexo et sat profunde emarginato; prothorace minus transverso, supra obscure subareolato (areolis granula minuta nonnulla includentibus), sulco longitu- dinali simplici sat profundo ab apice ad basin gradatim latiori, sulcis lateralibus sat profundis supra haud plane conjunctis, lateribus in medio dentato-angulatis, angulis 274 anticis leviter dentiformibus posticis obtuse rectis; scu- tello minus zquali vix perspicue punctulato; elytris modice [fere ut D. colaspidoidis, Macl. (? Gyll.)] sculptu- ratis, lateribus rectis; tibiis anticis extus antice modice (ut D. Hdwards, Waterh.), bidentatis, intus haud pro- ductis. Long.; 3 1.; lat., 14 1. : Remarkable for the straightness of the margin of the elytra, which is more straight even than that of D. pulchella. The present insect resembles pulchella in some respects, but its pronotum is very differently sculptured—the sculpture hav- ing an areolated appearance after the manner of that of D. Spencer, Waterh., and others—and the longitudinal sulcus of the pronotum is in the hind part very much wider than that of pulchella, and continues to widen quite to the actual hind margin of the segment. The colour seems to change from blue to green, according to the point of view from which the specimen is looked at. The bidentation of the front tibie is of the character of the same in D. Hdwardsi, rather than in PD. colaspidoides. Australia; I do not know exact habitat; unique in my collection. D. sordida, sp. nov. Sat nitida; obscuze cuprea nonnihil viri- dimicans, vel znea, antennis palpisque obscure ferru- ginels; supra sat sparsim subtus magis crebre albido- pubescens; capite crebre subtiliter punctulato, puncturis nonnullis majoribus vix impressis; prothorace sat trans- verso, supra sat obsolete subareolato (areolis granula minuta nonnulla includentibus), sulco longitudinali sim- plici sat profundo ab apice ad basin gradatim latiori, sulcis lateralibus sat profundis supra vix plane conjunc- tis, lateribus in medio angulatis vix dentatis, angulis an- ticis manifeste prominentibus vix dentiformibus posticis obtuse subrectis; scutello longitudinaliter canaliculato, postice nonnihil impresso, vix manifeste punctulato; elytris modice [fere ut D. colaspidoides, Macl. (? Gyll.)] sculpturatis, lateribus sinuatis; tibiis anticis extus antice modice (ut D. Hdwardsi, Waterh.) bidentatis, intus haud productis. Maris clypeo ut precedentis (D). rectipennis, Blackb.) ; femine antice leviter sinuatim emarginato. Long., 22-31 1; lat., 14-12 1. This species stands unnamed in the Macleay Museum. It is of an obscure dingy-copper or bronzy colour, with dull greenish reflexions, the green somewhat more pronounced on the under-surface. It is especially characterized by the ex- treme faintness of the quasi-areolation of its pronotum. It 275 does not seem very closely allied to any other species known to me. I have taken it in some numbers. iD New South Wales; Blue Movutains. crebra, sp. nov. Mas. Sat nitida; supra late viridis, sub- tus cyanea, antennis (clava obscura excepta) ferrugineis ; supra sat sparsim subtus magis crebre albido- pubescens ; capite crebre subtilissime aspera; clypeo minus lato, modice producto, antice angulatim sat fortiter emargi- nato; prothorace sat transverso, supra obscure subareo- lato (areolis granula minuta nonnulla includentibus), sulco longitudinali ab apice ad basin gradatim latiori (parte postica fere subquadrata), sulcis lateralibus sat pro- tundis supra (certo adspectu) conjunctis, lateribus in medio angulatigs haud plane dentatis, angulis anticis sub- dentiformibus posticis sat rectis ; scutello longitudinaliter eanaliculato, subtiliter punctulato; elytris crebre minus fortiter [quam D. colaspidoidis, Macl. (? Gyll.), multo magis crebre minus fortiter| sculpturatis, lateribus levi- ter sinuatis; tibiis anticis antice extus leviter bidentatis, intus inermibus. Long., 21 |; lat., 1j, 1. The sculpture of the elytra of this species is not much different from that of D. pygmea, Waterh. My specimen was sent to me by Mr. Lea, without indication of exact habitat, as D. purpureitarsis, Macl, which, however, has widely differ- ent sculpture of the pronotum. LD); Australia. Cartert, sp. nov. Mas. Sat nitida; obscure viri- dis, plus minusve aureo-micans, ae eg pedibusque picescentibus; supra sat sparsim subtus magis crebre albido-pubescens ; capite cum pronoto fete et subtilis- sime aspero; clypeo lato, transversim quadrato, antice reflexo sat profunde emarginato; prothorace sat fortiter transverso, supra sulco longitudinali subobsoleto sed sat lato, sulcis lateralibus sat magnis vix profundis supra nullo modo conjunctis lateribus in medio angulatis (angulis subdentiformibus), angulis anticis subdentiformibus pos- ticis subrectis; scutello sat plano sat equali, confertim aspero ; elytris crebre minus fortiter [quam D. colaspidor- dis, Macl. (? Gyll.) multo magis crebre paullo minus for- titer] puctulatis, vix perspicue costulatis, lateribus sinu- atis, aa anticis antice extus bidentatis intus inermibus. Long., 23 L: lat., 1$ 1. Allied to D. Spencei, Waterh., but much less strongly sculptured, and of duller colouring. The longitudinal ulti of the pronotum is remarkably faint, and does not increase in width hindward in any considerable degree. Such as it is, 276 however, this sulcus is distinctly wide, but to a casual glance it does not appear very much different from that of some species with a faint but (when closely examined) much nar- rower sulcus. New South Wales; Kosciusko. SERICOIDES. AUTOMOLUS. I furnished some preliminary notes on this genus in the preceding memoir of the present series (T.R.S.S.A., 1905), in the course of which I pointed out that its essential feature of distinction from Liparetrus is in my opinion the structure of its front tibiez. Subsequent observation has shown that this same character distinguishes it from all the other known Aus- tralian genera of Sericoid Melolonthides, except Caulobius and the very widely separated genus Mechidius. Caulobius was founded by Le Guillou (Rev. Zool., 1844, p. 224), for a species from Hobart which he named villosus,* and of which I have examples from the locality cited, agreeing perfectly with the descriptions, both generic and specific. Blanchard (Cat. Coll. Ent., 1850) states that that species is identical with Silopa pubescens, Er., and Omaloplia villigera, Hombr., and Jacq. (both described two years previously to Le Guillou’s description). Blanchard’s authority is not conclusive in res- pect of Erichson’s species, and as the descriptions do not agree (¢.g., Erichson makes the claws of pubescens bifid) he is no doubt mistaken in respect of pubescens. But as he doubtless had the collection of Hombrot and Jacquinot before him, his authority ought, I think, to be accepted for the statement that O. villigera is a Caulobius, and, that being granted, there can be little doubt that he is right in identify- ing 1t with Le Guillou’s insect, which must, therefore, stand as Caulobius (Omaloplia) villiger, Hombr. and Jacq. In a former memoir (Tr.R.S.S.A., 1898), I associated provision- ally with ©. villiger several new species that appeared to me (chiefly on account of different facies) not unlikely to be eventually regarded as generically distinct from it. I am still of the same opinion regarding these insects, but the un- questionably close structural alliance between Automolus and Caulobius villiger (in spite of great difference of facies) only recently observed by me, aggravates the generic difficulty. The species describec as Caulobii (2) in my former memoir *T may ae in passing inat ie a ereioae error I dalled this species “C. pubescens, Le Guill.,’”’ instead of ‘‘C. villosus, Le Guill.,” in Tr.R.S.S.A., 1898, p. 49. T hope that anyone having occasion to refer to the memoir in which this la psus calami occurs will be good enough to correct it. 277 are in facies intermediate between Automolus and Caulobius villager, in view of which I regard it as possible that the two may eventually have to be merged in one aggregate, the name Automolus being dropped as a synonym of Caulobius. As, however, it is easy to distinguish the Auwtomoli from (C. villiger and the species I have associated with it, by the elytra of the former leaving the greater part of the propygidium exposed, while those of the latter almost or quite cover the propy- gidium, it is convenient to .naintain both names provisionally. The following tabulation will enable the student to distin- guish the species I regard as Awtomoli and Caulohii from the rest of the genera that seem to me to form with them a natu- ral group, and also from all other known Australian genera of Sericoides. A. Claws simple. B. Prosternal sutures closed. C. Eyes small, not (or scarcely) pro- minent, and very conspicuously granulate. D. Body winged. E. Front tibiz not as in EE. F. Elytral not ‘striped with conspicuous wide pubescent vitte. G. Elytra not regularly striate. H. Clypeus strongly mar- gined in front. ; Liparetrus HEE “Clypeus not (or scar- cely) margined in front Comophorus GG. Elytra regularly and strongly striate ... ... Microthopus FF. Klytra striped with con- spicuous wide pubescent Vibe) <.. Haplopsis EE. Front tibize having " exter- nally a straight margin be- tween two subapical and one basal tooth. F. Elytra leaving a large part of the propygidium exposed Automolus FF. Elytra almost or quite covering the propygidium Caulobius DD. Body apterous ... Callabonica CC. Eyes not as in the above genera Colpochila & its allies BB. Prosternal sutures open to receive the antenne ... de a ... Mechidius AA. Claws not simple ie a ... Heteronyx & its allies T refer, shen, to Awtomolus as distinguished from Caulo- bous, all the known Australian Sericoides having the tibial structure mentioned above, and having the greater part of their propygidium not covered by the elytra. This distinction 278 is perhaps open to objection on the ground that accidental circumstances—such as distortion—may affect its reliability ; but, nevertheless, it is found on examination that the princi- pal part of the propygidium is, in the case of Caulobius, a sur- face, from its want of sculpture and vestiture, evidently de- signed to be a covered part of the body, while in Automolus the sculpture and vestiture are evidently those of an exposed segment, and are more or less uniform with those of the py- gidium. The antenne of Autfomolus are not easy to examine, the joints between the 2nd and the club being very short, and their sutures difficult to distinguish. When paucity of speci- mens forbids the removal of an antenna I have been unable to arrive at certainty as to the number of joints of the an- tennz in the species before me. I have not, therefore, been able to use this character in tabulating the Awtomol, but I can say that the antennez are by no means of uniform struc- ture, there being in most of the species eight joints only, of which three form the club, while in at least one species there are certainly nine joints, of which three form the club, and in two species known to me the club (of at least one sex) con- sists of four joints. The Awtomoli have a most remarkable sexual character in the elytra of the female, which appears to have been over- looked in the descriptions of all the hitherto described species. This consists in an elevated nitid space (varying in size and position with the species), which in some (e.9., poverus, Blanch.) is extremely conspicuous; while in others it is small enough to be easily disregarded. Other sexual characters are found in the greater elongation of the antennal flabellum and peculiarities (very pronounced in some species) In the front tarsi of the male. According to Burmeister (who uses the name “Lipare- tride’’ for the aggregate, which Lacordaire—and I in these memoirs—call “Sericoides”) the genera Automolus and Caulobius belong to different sub-aggregates distinguished by the comparative length of the ventral segments-—the 5th seg- ment in the former being longer than, and in the latter equal to, the 4th. My observations show that there is an evident variation in this respect in closely-allied species, correspond- ing to the variation in the size and prominence of the propy- gidium on the dorsal surface—so that Burmeister’s distinction between dA wtomolus and Caulobius is in reality the same that T have indicated in the tabulation above. I caanot, however, regard it as of sufficient importance to be used in forming groups of genera—indeed, as already remarked, I doubt its being even generic. 279 It should be further noted that the elytra of the typical Automoli have a characteristic outline. Their lateral margin is more or less strongly sinuate, and they are narrowed be- hind in such fashion that outside a short apical portion of them the surface of the abdomen isto a greater or Jess extent visible on either side. In Caulobius villiger, and in the other species that I now attribute to Caulobius, the lateral margins of the elytra are straight, or almost straight, and the elytra are not narrowed hindward; but one which I attributed for- merly to Caulobius, and which I now transfer to Awtomolus on account of its exposed propygidium [A. (Caulobius) evane- scens|, has elytra intermediate in form between those of a typical dutomolus and of Caulobius villiger. It appears to me quite possible that when both sexes are known of all the species which I now place in Awtomolus and Caulobius it may be found necessary to form, for species that do not appear quite at home in either of those genera, at least one new genus. Meanwhile, the tabulation given above will enable the student to assign without hesitation any of them to the genus in which I should place it. Hitherto only the typical species (angustulus, Burm.) has been referred to Automolus, but 17 other names, which appear to me clearly referable to this genus, have been given to species that have been attributed by their authors to Lipare- trus or Caulobius. Three of these names, however, I believe to be synonyms, viz., Awtomolus (Liparetrus) basalis, Macl. (nec. Blanch.)=d7color: Blackb.. Auwtomolus (Liparetrus ) Cooki ; Macl. = depressus, Blanch., Automolus (Liparetrus) uni- color, Macl. =humilis, Blanch., female. I regard it as barely possible that also Automolus (Liparetrus) alpicola, Blackb. = angustulus, Burm. This synonymy will be found more fully discussed below. I therefore regard Automolus as consisting of 15 species, already described, and to these I have now to add 6 new species, bringing the number of Australian Automoli up to 21, all of which I believe that I know, except angustulus, Burm. The following is a tabulation of the distinctive characters of the species that I place in the genus A wtomolus :— A. Lateral part of elytra vertical, its limits defined both above and _ below. Antennal club four-jointed in both sexes, so far as known. B. Pilosity of elytra as long as of pro- notum . ... hispidus, Mael. BB. Pilosity of elytra much shorter ... aureus, Blackb. AA. Lateral part of elytra not as in A. Antennal club, so far as known, only three-jointed in both sexes. 280 B. Head and pronotum with long dense, generally erect, pilosity. C. Pygidium clothed w ith fine hairs. D. Pilosity of pronotum dark, at least in middle part of disc. E. Elytra red, in some examples somewhat blackish along base. F. Pilosity of propygidium and pygidium long + bicolor, Blackb. FF. Pilosity of ~ propygidium and pygidium short ..- Burmeisteri, Macl. EE. Elytra black. *F. Two rows of punctures in each of the elytral striz... striatipennis, Macl. FF. Elytra not having strie furnished with two rows of punctures... funereus, Blackb. DD? Pilesity. or pronotum ‘entirely of pale colour. E. Nitid area on elytra of female is sublateral and extends from base to apex .. semitifer, Blackb. EE. Nitid area on elytra of fe- male is sublateral and sub- apical (a sharply-limited, large, strong convexity) E poverus, Blanch. EEE. Nitid area on elytra of nae male much smaller, at most not a sharply-limited strong convexity. F. Elytra red, or, at any rate, only blackish across base. G. Clypeus much produced in both sexes. EHlytra not closely punctured. Male front tarsi very thick ... alpicola, Blackb. GG. Clypeus much less pro- duced. Elytra closely punctured. Male front tarsi much less thick- ened. H. Pubescence of propygi- dium and _ pygidium close and ene ad- pressed ... ordinatus, Macl. HH. Pubescence of “propy- gidium erect, finer, and less close oe ... depressus, Blanch. FF. Elytra black, with an . oblique red area on disc ... pictus, Blackb. CC. Pygidium clothed with coarse scale-like seteo valgoides, Blanch. BB. Head and pronotum ‘clothed with fine, erect, very short, and extreme- | ly dense pilosity ot 7 .. 6 aprasus; Blachtss *T accidentally omitted to examine the type of this insect in the Macleay Museum, and therefore have determined its place in this tabulation by a study of the description. 281 BBB. Head and pronotum with little pilosity, at most fine adpressed sparse hairs. C. Punctures of pronotum very coarse and by no means close ... .. pygmeus, Mael. CC. Punctures of pronotum not as C. (?Burm.) D. Propygidium of comparatively small size. E. Clypeus of male much narrow- ed forward and rounded at ApPeRaAE ae at ... evanescens, Blackh, EE. Clypeus of male wider, shorter, and tridentate at apex oe aa aie ... opaculus, Blackb. DD. Propygidium enormous. E. Antenne entirely testaceous... major, Blackb. EE. Club of antennee black. F. The depressed part of pygi- dium bears a longitudinal suleus ip a ae FF. The depressed part _ of pygidium not longitudin- ally sulcate ... ae ... humilis, Blanch. granulatus, Blackb. I shall now furnish notes on species already described, and add descriptions of new species. A. (Liparetrus) hispidus, Macl. I have examined the presumable type of this species in the Macleay Museum. It is, | think, a male. Two specimens in my own collection are certainly male and female. The elytra of the female bear a strongly convex, highly nitid, glabrous elongate sublateral area, commencing at about the middle of the length and bent inward near the apex to join the subapical callus. It does not differ much from the male in other respects. In both sexes the antennal flabellum has four joints, which are a little shorter in the female than in the male. A. (Liparetrus) aureus, Blackb. This species remains unique in the South Australian Museum. It is near to A. hispidus, Macl., but the pilosity of its elytra is so much shorter than in that insect that I have httle doubt of its specific validity. The specimen is a male, and it is therefore, though probable, not. certain that its female has antenne with a four- jointed flabellum. A. (Linaretrus) bicolor, Blackb. Identical with speci- mens named /. basalis, Blanch., in the Australian Museum. I have already (Tr. Roy. Soc., S.A., 1905, p. 312) stated my reasons for thinking that Macleay was mistaken in this deter- mination. This insect is somewhat close to A. (Liparetrus) depressus, Blanch., but is readily distinguishable by the very much darker pilosity of its pronotum and the notably courser sculoture of its elytra. 282 A. (Liperetrus) Burmeisterz, Macl. I have identified this species by comparison with the presumable type in the Mac- leay Museum. A. (Liparetrus) alpicola, Blackb. I have already (Tr. Roy. Soc., 1905, p. 332) discussed the possibility of this being identical with A. angustulus, Burm. (the type of the genus). A. (Liparetrus) ordinatus, Macl. This species is near to A. (Liparetrus) depressus, Blanch. Macleay distinguishes it by its pilosity being “decumbent.” I believe this to be a sat- isfactory distinction when applied to specimens in their natu- ral condition, but I find that the pilosity on depressus is easily made decumbent by artificial means (¢.g., passing a wet brush over it). The dense adpressed pilosity of the propy- gidium and pygidium of ordinatus, however, is essentially dif- ferent from the finer, erect, and much less close pilosity of the corresponding segments in depressus. A. (Liparetrus) depressus, Blanch. I have before me a long series of Avtomoli from almost all parts of New South Wales, Queensland, and Victoria, among which depressus 1s undoubtedly included. They vary considerably in size and somewhat in colour, but I cannot find characters in them to indicate more than one species. Some of them from North Queensland are of small size and evidently identical with the presumable type of 4. (Liparetrus) Cooki, Macl., in the Mac- leay Museum, which Macleay distinguishes from depressus only by assigning a smaller size to it. ze i Taparetrus) py gmens, Macl. (? Burm.). The speci- men before me of this insect is certainly identical with that which stands in the Australian Museum as ZL. pygmeus, Burm., and is, therefore, presumably that which Macleay described under that name in his Monograph of Liparetrus. In that case Macleay was mistaken in placing the species among those with only 8 antennal joints, as the stipes un- doubtedly has a minute 4th joint, closely connected with the basal joint of the lamella. Whether Macleay’s identification was correct, appears, however, doubtful in the extreme, not only because Burmeister, as the author of Awutomolus, would have been unlikely to place one of its species in Liparetrus, but also because Burmeister’s description does not agree with Macleay’s pygmaeus, representing it as inter alia smaller, with less coarse punctures (nadelstichpuncten), forming on the elytra regular (Macleay calls them “irregular’”) rows. Never- theless, as among extensive collections from Western Aus- tralia that I have examined I have not seen any other species that could possibly be pygmaeus, Burm., T think this one may reasonably be called provisionally “pyqmeus, Macl. (? Burm.).” 283 A. (Liparetrus) humilis, Blanch. The species that I identify with this name is so identified in the Macleay Museum, and is doubtless that described as humilis in Mac- leay’s Monograph. I have specimens from various localities (from Sydney to tropical Queensland) in eastern Australia. A. (Liparetrus) unicolor, Masters. This was originally described by Macleay as 1. concolor (nom. preoce.). It is found in the same localities as A. hwmelis, from which I can- not distinguish it, except by colour and sexual characters, and of which I have no doubt it is the female. A. funerceus, sp. nov. Mas. Ovatus; subnitidus; niger, anten- nis (clava excepta) rufescentibus; pilis subtilibus erectis sat elongatis (in elytris brevioribus) vestitus (his in capite {Sa elytrisque nigris, in aliis partibus albidis); an- tennis 8-articulatis (2), clava quam articull ceteri con- juncti haud breviori; clypeo antice subtruncato (vix sinuato) modice reflexo, crebre subgranulose ut frons (hac convexa) punctulato ; prothorace fortiter transverso, supra equal, ut frons punctulato, antice sat angustato, lateri- bus leviter arcuatis; elytris crebre minus ‘subtiliter sub- seriatim punctulatis, vix manifeste bicostatis; propygidio crebre, pygidio sparsius (hoc zquali) fortiter punctulatis ; tibiis anticis ad apicem bi- (ad basin uni-) dentatis; tarsis anticis sat fortiter elongatis, posticorum articulo, 2° quam basalis plus quam duplo longiori. Fem. latet. Long., Mew ati £4 This species is readily distinguishable from its con- geners by the characters cited in the tabulation. As it is unique in my collection I cannot bring myself to sacrifice an antenna for separate examination, but I am almost sure that there are only three joints in the very short stipes. New South Wales. A. semitifer, sp. nov. Fem. Ovatus: subnitidus : nigro-piceus, antennis palpis elytris (his circa scutellum infuscatis) et abdomine rufis, pedibus plus minusve rufescentibus: pilis elongatis erectis pallidis (his in pronoto medio vix, in elytrorum lateribus manifeste. infuscatis) vestitus: antennis 8-articulatis, clava quam articuli ceter1 conjuncti parum breviori : clypeo antice late subtruncatim rotun- dato, parum reflexo, crebre sat grosse granulatim (ut frons pronotumque) punctulato : prothorace fortiter transverso, antice sat angustato, supra equali. lateribus modice arcuatis: elytris subfortiter (versus suturam nec latera seriatim) punctulatis, sat perspicue bicostulatis, area glabra pernitida sat lata sublaterali totam longi- tudinem percurrenti: propygidio pygidioque (hoe 284 equali) ut pronotum punctulatis; tibiis anticis ut A. funerei, Blackb., dentatis; tarsis anticis brevibus, posti- corum articulo 2° quam basalis vix duplo longiori. Long 3/25; lated. The pilosity of the pronotum of this species is of a some- what darker tone of colour on the middle of the disc than elsewhere, though very different in colour from that of the preceding species. In that respect, however, the insect must be regarded as somewhat intermediate between the two aggre- gates which I have distinguished py the colour of the pilosity of the pronotum. The only sex known to me (the female) is, however, quite incapable of confusion with any other female Automolus that I have seen, on account of the presence of a wide, glabrous, and brilliantly nitid vitta near the lateral border, traversing the whole length of the elytra and divid- ing the otherwise uniformly pilose surface by a kind of lane which presents a very characteristic appearance if the insect be looked at obliquely from in front. I have not been able to identify the male of the species, but as I have seen four examples of the female I suspect that the other sex is among the Automoli before me, and is not distinguishable by any . very noticeable character from the male of A. depressus, Blanch. New South Wales (sent by Mr. Lea from Galston). A. pictus, sp. nov. Mas. Ovatus; subnitidus ; piceo-niger, an- tennis (clava excepta) palpis pedibus et in elytris macula magna discoidali ovali obliqua rufis; pilis erectis sub- tilibus pallidis sat elongatis vestitus; antennis 8-articu- latis (?), clava quam articuli ceter1 conjuncti haud bre- viorl ; clypeo antice late rotundato (vix subtruncato), sat late reflexo, crebre subgranulatim punctulato ; fronte con- vexa, fortiter vix crebre vix rugulose punctulata; pro- thorace minus transverso, antice sat angustato, supra equal, grosse minus crebre nec rugulose punctulato, lateribus parum arcuatis; elytris sat crebre sat fortiter subrugulose vix seriatim punctulatis, vix manifeste costu- latis ; propygidio pygidioque fere ut pronotum punctulatis ; tibiis anticis ut A. funere?, Blackb., dentatis ; tarsis anti- cis modice elongatis, posticorum articulo 2° quam basalis multo longiori Fem. latet. Long., 2 1.: lat., 1 1. The markings on the elytra of this species (probably con- stant in the male) readily distinguish it. Other distin- guishing characters are found in the red colour of its legs, the coarse puncturation of its pronotum, the almost complete absence of prominent lines on its elytra (of which there is no trace at all except faint indications of one near the suture). 285 As the species is unique in my collection Ihave not been able to examine the antennze under a microscope, but I am almost sure that there are only three joints in the stipes. North Queensland. A. opaculus, sp. nov. Ovatus; sat opacus; piceo-niger, an- tennis (clava excepta) palpis et elytris (nonnullorum exemplorum) plus minusve rufescentibus ; pilis subtilibus pallidis adpressis minus crebre vestitus; antennis 9-arti- culatis ; clypeo antice breviter tridentato, cum fronte (hac minus convexa) subtiliter granulato; prothorace fortiter transverso, antice angustato, supra quali, sparsim granulato-punctulato, lateribus arcuatis; elytris crebre subseriatim minus fortiter granulato-punctulatis, minus perspicue bicostulatis; propygidio sat crebre, pygidio minus crebre, squamoso-punctulatis; tibiis anticis ut A. funerei, Blackb., dentatis. Maris quam femine antennarum clava magis elongata, tibi- arum anticarum dentibus minoribus, tarsis anticis crassi- oribus, posticorum articulo 2° quam basalis minus quam duplo longiort. Femine pygidio longitudinaliter impresso; tarsorum posti- corum articulo 2° quam basalis duplo longiorl. Long., fees lat ll: Its opaque dorsal surface distinguishes this species from all the preceding. It is near A. (Caulobius) evanescens, Blackb., from which the form of its clypeus readily separates it. The female has a small nitid sexual area on the subapical callus. Western Australia (Perth). A. irrasus, sp. nov. Ovatus; subnitidus; rufus, antennarum clava capite prothorace sternisque plus minusve infus- catis; pilis pallidis (his supra brevibus erectis confer- tim positis, snbtus longioribus minus crebre positis) vesti- tus; antennis 8-articulatis ; clypeo antice subtruncato (vix subemarginato), sat reflexo, cum fronte (hac convexa) pronotoque crebre minus subtiliter subrugulose punctu- lato; prothorace sat transverso, antice angustato, supra eequali, lateribus sat arcuatis; elytris obsoletissime striatis, confertim subseriatim nec profunde nec subtiliter punc- tulatis, haud costulatis: propygidio pygidioque fere ut pronotum (sed paullo minus crebre) punctulatis; tibiis anticis ut A. funerez, Blackb., dentatis; tarsis anticis brevibus. Maris quam femine antennarum clava magis elongata, tarsis anticis paullo longioribus, posticorum articulo 2° quam basalis minus quam duplo longiori. 286 Femine tarsorum Se le articulo 2° quam basalis duplo longiori. Long., 13-2 1.; lat., 1 1. Remarkable for its “almanat uniform rusty-red colour, with the head, front part of pronotum, and the sterna infuscate, and by its short, erect, close, nap-like pubescence. Having only two specimens, I have not been willing to break off an antenna for examination, but I am confident that the stipes has only three joints. There is scarcely any trace of a sexual nitid space on the elytra of the female, and such as there is it can be discerned only on the subapical callus. North Queensland. A. major, sp. nov. Fem. Ovalis; sat opacus: castaneo- brunneus; pilis subtilibus adpressis sat brevibus minus crebre vestitus; antennis 8-articulatis, clava quam articuli ceteri conjuncti manifeste breviori ; clypeo antice trun- cato, parum reflexo, subgrosse granulato: fronte sat con- vexa, cum pronoto crebre subtilius eranulato-punctulata : prothorace leviter transverso, antice leviter angustato, supra equali, lateribus sat ‘arcuatis postice sinuatis ; elytris confuse (a sutura latera versus gradatim magis grosse) rugulosis, vix perspicue costulatis, area nitida sat obsoleta in callo subapicali ornatis: propygidio (hoc quam elytra parum breviori) pygidioque (hoc equali, fere a basi sub corpus reclinato) fortiter granulatis: tibiis anti- eis ut A. funerei, Blackb., dentatis: tarsis brevibus ro- bustis, posticorum articulo 2°:quam basalis duplo longiori. Mas latet. Long., 33 1.; lat., 1¢ 1. This species is of more oval form than typical Automol, which are a little more dilated hindward. The extremely strong granulation of its dorsal surface and its large size render 1t a very distinct species. ‘lhe testaceous colour of its antennal club is unusual in the genus. North Queensland. CoMOPHORUS. This genus, founded by Blanchard, still contains only the one species (testacerpennis), which that author described. The genus is quite distinct from /iparetras, though closely allied to it. There is no need to add here to what Blanchard (Cat. Coll. Ent., 1850; p. 106) has written about it. MICROTHOPUS. . I have already discussed this genus (Tr.R 1.8.8.A.)1905), and as I, in doing so, had occasion to deal also, incidentally, with the three described species belonging to it, IT need not add any remarks here. 287 HAPLOPSIS. Only five species attributable to this genus have been described, and I have no adaitions to make to them. They closely resemble each other superficially, and are not likely to be confused with any species of any other genus on ac- count of their elytra being ornamented with wide, longitudt- nal stripes of whitish pilosity, the intervals between which are glabrous, or nearly so. I have selected this superficial character to distinguish the genus in the tabulation of genera (vide Autemolus), because | have not been able to discover . any reliable structural character to separate //aplopsis trom the extremely heterogeneous aggregate Liparctrus. Bur- meister selects for this purpose the concealment of the propy- gidium under the elytra (or, rather, what I have pointed out above is the corresponding character on the ventral sur- face, viz., the shortening of the 5th ventral segment as com- pared with the 4th); but there is a distinct tendency in th females of Haplopsis to a lengthening and protrusion of the propygidium, and I have before me females of at least two species of Haplopsis in which the propygidium is as fully ex- posed as in many Liparetri, and the 5th ventral segment quite decidedly longer than the 4th. The most that can be made of this character, therefore, is that in Liparetrus the propygidium is exposed and the 5th ventral segment elon- gated, while in Haplopsis normally the propygidium is con- cealed, and the 5th ventral segment not longer than the 4th. The structure of the front tibiz is intermediate between that of Liparetrus and Automolus, there being two adjacent ex- ternal teeth close to the apex, and one (much smaller) about halfway between the intermediate tooth and the base of the tibia. These characters, toeether with the constant charac- teristic vestiture of the elytra, seem to indicate the generic validity of Haplopsis. I have already discussed the synonymy of the species described by the earlier authors (wde Tr.R.S.S.A., 1898, p. 48), and need not refer to it further. The following table shows the distinctive characters of the known species : — A Front of clypeus strongly, and decid- edly angularly, emarginate in both Sexes, B. Dorsal surface blackish, searcely metallic; -pronotum and pygidium deeply punctulate... ue : BB. Dorsal surface quite bright-green ; pronotum and pygidium very light- ly punctulate ... va ae Eitavinidis,“Blackw. AA. Front of clypeus not as A in.either sex. lineoligera, Blanch. 288 B. Clypeus of both sexes conspicuously reflexed in front. C. Clypeus of male truncate in front. Elytra unicolorous .. .. Olliff, Blackb. CC. Clypeus of male distinctly and widely emarginate in front. Elytra red tow vards apex ... .. grisea, Burm. BB. Clypeus in both sexes not reflect- ed, only narrowly margined ... debilis, Blackb. CAULOBIUS. I have already discussed the genus (vide Automolus, supra), and will here merely repeat that I cannot see my way to a better treatment of the species than I attribute to it. I am afraid the genus as here regarded is little better than a receptacle for somewhat diverse species associated on the ground of their belonging to the Liparétrus group without being attributable to any other of its genera than this one. The first four species (in the following tabulation) are really very close to Automolus, but have their propygidium quite (or largely) covered by the elytra ; the remaining four species (in the tabulation) differ much in facies from the first four, but I cannot find satisfactory structural differences for the crea- tion of a new genus. As in Liparetrus and Automolus, the number of antennal joints varies in Caulobius. The first four species and the last in the tabulation (which follows and shows characters differentiating the species that I place in Caulo- bius) have 9-jointed antennz, while there are only 8 joints in the antennz of the other three species, A. Less elongate species. Length of elytra exceeding width by about 2 (or less) of the width. B. The lateral margins of the clypeus strongly sinuate-emarginate. C. The pronotum with very coarse sparse sculpture. D. Elytra very coarsely sculptured. Tarsi robust pu) AS .... discedens, Blackb. DD. Elytra much less coarsely sculptured. Tarsi slender... immitis, Blackb. CC. Pronotum much more closely and less coarsely sculptured ... ... rotundus, Blackb. BB. Lateral margins of clypeus not emarginate an =f ... .mechidioides, Macl. AA. More elongate species, Length of elytra exceeding width by about 4 of the width. B. Pronotum densely clothed with ag erect pilosity ... : villiger, Hombr. and BB. Pronotum not as B. Jacq. C. Club of antenneze dark. D. Elytra opaque ... a ... rufescens. Blanch. (?/ DD. Elytra subnitid advena, Blackb. CC. Antenne entirely pale testaceous punctulatus, Blackb. 289 C. compactus, Blackb. I find that this species is identi- eal with that which stands in the Macleay Museum as Lipare- trus mechidioides, Macl., and since one of the Museum speci- mens 1s presumably the type, aay name must be dropped as a synonym. C. rufescens, Blanch. This species is described by Blanchard as being that which was figured but not described in the “Voyage au Pole Sud” (1842), under the name Piilo- chlema rufescens. Probably the identification is correct ; but, whether or not, the name Caulobius rufescens, Blanch., will stand. I have a species before me from Tasmania (Blanch- ard’s locality) which agrees with the description fairly satis- factorily, but the description is not detailed enough to allow of certainty. I have, therefore, called the species “Caulobius rufescens, Blanch (?).” According to Burmeister, C. rufes- cens, Hombr. and Jacq., is identical with Caulobius (Serices- this) cervinus, Boisd. It, however, seems very clear that C. rufescens, Blanch., is not identical with (. cervinus, Burm. (? Boisd.), as a glance at the descriptions will show, the for- mer being called ‘‘depressed,” and the latter “strongly con- vex, almost cylindrical.” Pending the improbable produc- tion of evidence to the contrary it seems clear, therefore, that there are two distinct species, which must be called C. cervi- nus, Burm. (? Boisd.), and C. rufescens, Blanch. I have not seen any insect that seems likely to be the former of these, which would be difficult of identification without inspection of Burmeister’s specimen. C’. advena, Blackb. When I described this species I men- tioned that I had failed to arrive at certainty as to the num- ber of joints in its antenne, but thought there were nine joints. I have now succeeded in counting them, and can state posi- tively that there are only eight joints. C. wmmitis, sp. nov. Ovatus; subnitidus; niger vel piceo- niger, antennis (clava excepta) palpis pedibusque dilu- tioribus ; setis brevibus fulvis vestitus, his in elytris seria- tim dispositis; antennis 9-articulatis ; clypeo reflexo, cum fronte granuloso, antice truncato; prothorace fortiter transverso, supra grosse rugulose punctulato, canalicu- lato, basi media sat lobata, lateribus sat arcuatis, angulis anticis sat acutis; elytris fortiter rugulose punctulatis et transversim nonnihil rugatis, interstitiis inequaliter levi- ter subcostulatis ; pygidio grosse punctulato ; tibiis anticis ad apicem bi- (ad basin uni-) dentatis; tarsis anticis minus elongatis, posticorum articulo 2° quam basalis cir- citer duplo longiori. 290 Maris antennarum clava quam stipes paullo longiori; feminz breviori. Long., 23 1.; lat., 121. There are six specimens before me of this insect, and I do not find any very conspicuous sexual characters among them. In some, however, which I take to be males, the joints of the flabellum are slightly longer than the 4 joints together of the stipes, and the clypeus is a little more abruptly trun- cate than in others whose antennal flabellum is a little shorter. The species has a thick-set, coarsely sculptured appearance, suggestive of a lilliputian Syrrhomorpha, from which, how- ever, its structural ckaracters separate it widely, ¢.g., its con- spicuously granulate eyes with the hind angles of the clypeus projecting considerably beyond the outline of the eyes. Western Australia; sent by Mr. Lea and others, from Perth. C. rotundus, sp. nov. Ovatus; latissimus ; minus nitidus ; ob- scure rufus, capite prothorace metasternoque picescenti- bus; setis fulvis decumbentibus minus crebre vestitus ; antennis 9-articulatis; clypeo reflexo cum fronte pro- thoraceque sat zqualiter sat crebre minus grosse granu- loso-ruguloso, antice truncato; prothorace sat fortiter transverso, equali, basi media vix lobata, lateribus minus arcuatis, angulis anticis acutis; elytris subtilius granu- loso-rugulosis, interstitiis inter se imequalibus (horum nonnullis leviter subcostulatis); pygidio leviter sub- tilius punctulato; tibiis anticis ad apicem bi- (ad basin uni-) dentatis; tarsorum posticorum articulo 2° quam basalis circiter duplo longiori. Long., 22 1.; lat., 12 1. I have seen several specimens of this insect, which include both sexes. The antennal flabellum of the male is as long as the preceding joints together: that of the female a little shorter. The species seems out of place in being associated with the very much larger and more cylindrical C. villiger, Hombr. and Jacq., from which it differs also in the partial exposure of its propygidium. This latter character approximates it to Awtomolus, but in all the species that I attribute to Automolus there is much more of the propygidium exposed, and the elytra are of different shape, as indicated in the re- marks (above) on the genus 4 wtomolus. New South Wales. Taken by Messrs. Carter, Lea, and Taylor; also in the South Australian Museum. HAPLONYCHA. I have already discussed the affinities of this genus in Proc. L.S.N.S.W., 1890, pp. 517, etc., and at the same time I furnished a tabulation of the species then known to me, and 4) described some new species. Since that paper was published I have had opportunity of studying a large number of additional species, and have now before me a considerable number as yet undescribed. I am still of opinion that Colpochila cannot be maintained as distinct from //aplonycha, although I think that I was mistaken in selecting the former name for use, 1n- asmuch as //aplonycha seems to have been used for Boisdu- val’s Melolontha obesa in Dejean’s catalogue, in 1837. Col po- chila was proposed by Erichson (1843) without description. In 1850 Blanchard furnished characters for Erichson’s name, and at the same time characterized under the name //ap- lonycha an aggregate which he regarded as forming a genus allied to but distinct from (olpochila. 1, however, can find no character mentioned in his diagnoses which distinguishes either from the other, but in an appended note it is stated that in Haplonycha the galea of the maxille is not gibbous, the labium is less quadrate, and the antennal club and clypeus are distinct in shape (but without indication of the nature of the distinction, unless reference is intended to the word “‘produc- tus,” which in the diagnoses is used of the clypeus of Colpo- chila, but not of Haplonycha, and “oblonga,” which is used of the antennal club of Haplonycha, but not of Colpochila). However, these characters are, I think, of no value, though, of course, one cannot be positive about the maxille without dis- secting all the species, which I have not been able to do. Bur- meister, in 1855, treated the two aggregates as identical. Lacor- daire,in 1856 (in his tabulation of the //eteronycid genera of the world) distinguishes (olpochila from Haplonycha by the shape of its antennal club; certainly not, in my opinion, a character of generic value, nor constant in any considerable number of species. It is quite possible that the long and somewhat di- verse series of species which I attribute to //aplonycha may sooner or later be regarded as vielding material for the forma- tion of several new genera. At present T am able to break those species up into several groups, distinguished from each other by easily recognizable characters: but those characters are all such as appear to me, in the Australian Ser7coides in general, merely specific, 7.¢., not indicative of the nature of the other characters of the insects in which they appear. It has seemed to me, therefore, that //aplonycha may be dealt with most satisfactorily by dividing it into subordinate aggregates under the name of groups, a method of treatment which I adopted recently in revising Onthophagus and Lipa- retrus. The species of /aplonycha known to me fall conveni- ently, I think, into eight groups, which may be distinguished as follows : — K2 292 A. Antenne consisting of oak shea only Group I. AA. arsenate: consisting of nine “joints. B. Lateral gutter of pronotum (especi- ally round the hind angles) wide and filled with closely-packed seti- ferous rugulosity 0 Group II. BB. Lateral gutter of pronotum “not as C. Surface of apical joint of maxil- lary palpi, with a large impres- sion bordered later ally by a raised edge . Group III. CC. acai joint of maxillary palpi not as C *D. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi longer than antepenulti- mate Group IV. DD. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi not (or scarcely) longer than antepenultimate. E. Antennal club, with more than 3 joints in both sexes.. Group V. EE. Antennal club, with only ‘3 joints in both SEXES, F. Species not having the pro- notum and pygidium black. G. Perpendicular front face of clypeus, with plenti- ful, more or less rugulose punctures, more or less obscuring the transverse setiferous series ... Group VI. GG. Perpendicular front face of clypeus nitid, smooth, and all but unpunctured, except the transverse series of very large seti- ferous punctures Group VII. FF. Pronotum and pygidium black ... Group VIII. The species which I associate together in each of the above groups are fairly homogeneous in facies, though considerably less so in respect of structural characters. More detailed re- marks about the groups will be found below. In subdividing Haplonycha into groups, the number of joints in the antenne, though not, in my opinion, a character of much importance, enables two or three species with only eight antennal joints to be satisfactorily separated from the *In the concluding species of this group the group-charac- ter is only feebly pase but in these the dorsal surface of the body is pruinose and iridescent, which is not the case with any species known to me (of the following groups), having maxillary palpi of somewhat similar structure. 293 others as the first group. If the antennal characters were dis- regarded these species might very well be placed near H. bella, Blackb. The second group consists of large or very large species in which the marginal gutter of the pronotum presents the remarkable structure indicated in the tabulation, a character, however, that does not appear to be of much 1m- portance, since several species not possessing it are otherwise very close to some in the second group; it 1s, however, of great value for purposes of identification. The preceding two groups having been eliminated, I have arranged the remain- der of the groups by means of the character that appears to me the most fundamental of those [I have observed in the genus, inasmuch as well-marked differences in respect of it seem to be somewhat uniformly accompanied by other differ- ences, such as in facies, colour, texture of elytra, etc. I refer to the structure of the maxillary palpi. Using this character I first separate as the third group a small aggregate of species having a remarkable impression on the apical joint of the maxillary palpi. The remainder of the genus I then divide into two sections (“D” and “DD” in the preceding tabula- tion) according as the penultimate joint of the maxillary palpi is or is not longer than the antepenultimate. It must be admitted, however, that there are a few intermediate forms in which there is little or no difference in length between these joints, but these forms will present no practical difficulty in identification, because if they be pleced together it will be found that they naturally divide themselves into two aggre- gates, in one of which (while the penultimate joint is invari- ably, I think, at any rate a trifle longer than the ante- penultimate) the facies is in general that of the species in which the antepenultimate joint of the palpi is very short, and the dorsal surface is invariably more or less brilliantly iridescent ; and in the other aggregate the facies is very dif- ferent (average size smaller, texture notably less fragile), and the dorsal surface is not, in any species known to me, irides- cent. The aggregate “D” does not seem to lend itself to sec- tional division, and therefore I treat it as a single (the fourth) group. The aggregate ‘““DD,’’ however, is much less homo- geneous, and contains a few isolated forms which I have sepa- rated as the seventh and eighth groups, the eighth consisting of three species not very much like each other, or very close to any other Haplonycha, but which happen to agree in present- ing the unusual character of the head, pronotum, and py- gidium being black; while the seventh group consists of a few species bearing a general resemblance to those of the third group, and differing from all those of the fifth, sixth, and 294 eighth groups by the combination of a peculiar sculpture of the perpendicular front face of the clypeus, with antennal club of only three joints in both sexes. The remainder of the section ‘““‘DD” consists of species closely resembling each other cwith a few exceptions) in respect of facies, but conveniently divisible into two groups (the fifth and sixth), in one of which the sides of the prothorax are sinuate behind the middle and the antennal club has four joints (the first usually much shorter than the second in the females), while in the other the sides of the prothorax are not sinuate behind the middle and the antennal club has in both sexes only three joints. I have not found any uniform external difference between the sexes in /aplonycha, except in the antennal club. The lamelle of this are longer in the males than in the females, but not different in number, although in the species in which the club has more than three lamelle the first of them is usu- ally much abbreviated in the female, but very rarely (1 think Hf. bella, Blackb., supphes the only instance), so much abbre- viated that it is not very obviously a lamella of the club. In dealing with the species of this genus 1t 1s necessary to begin by discussing those described by the earher authors, inasmuch as their descriptions are for the most part extremely brief and devoid of any mention of the structural characters that are the most valuable for purposes of identification. The earliest species of those subsequently attributed to Haplonycha are Melolontha obesa, Boisd.. M. Astrolaber, Boisd., and M. ciliata, Boisd. (described in 1835). Burmeister subsequently described as the first of these an insect which it seems probable was not Boisduval’s type, but a Hap- lonycha, believed by Burmeister to be identical with the type, and in that identification JI have little doubt he was mistaken. Assuming J/. obesa to be a Hap- lonycha (which I fear is not certain), its description happens to mention two characters that in combination are very un- usual in the genus, viz.. “head and thorax black” and “‘pro- thorax rugulose-punctulate.” Now, Burmeister says of what he calls “obesa, Boisd.,’ that it is entirely (weherall) shining castaneous-brown, and makes no reference to its prothorax being rugulose. My own opinion is that J/. obesa, Boisd., is the species of which Burmeister described a variety as MV. gagatina. Tt is one of the very few species of the genus that seems subject to considerable variation in colour (its head and prothorax are always, so far as IT have observed, black. while its elytra vary from dark ferruginous to black). It is found in New South Wales, the presumable habitat of MW. obesa, Boisd., and the puncturation of the pronotum is more inclined 295 to rugulosity than in most of its congeners. As, however, Boisduval gives no information about the antennz of his insect, and does not mention its size, I do not propose to change the name of //. gagatina, Burm., but prefer to regard M. obesa, Boisd., as unrecognizable without a fresh descrip- tion founded on the actual type (which very hkely is not in existence), and accepting provisionally the bare possibility that Burmeister’s statement of colour was an intentional cor- rection of Boisduval, founded on inspection of the actual type, treat ‘“‘//. obesa, Burm. (? Boisd.)” as the valid name of a good species. Burmeister cities //. obesa, Boisd. (Blanch.) as being the species which he called obesa, Boisd.. but this was almost certainly without having seen the specimens so named by Blanchard. I believe, however, that the citation is correct, as, although Blanchard does not describe H. obesa, he com- pares other species with it in terms that are agreeable to its being H. obesa, Burm. Melolontha Astrolabe’, Boisd., is, in Burmeister’s opinion, probably a //aplonycha, from which genus | unhesitatingly exclude it, on the ground that its elytra are described as not geminate-striate. I believe it to be a Svs- tellonid. Melolontha ciliata, Boisd., is attributed to Hap- lonycha by both Blanchard and Burmeister, the latter stating that he considers it incapable of identification. Blanchard mentions that its antennze have only eight joints, and it is probable that that statement was founded on an inspection of the type, and therefore must not be passed over. I should say that it is very likely to be identical with //. rugosa, Burm., but as Boisduval implies that the insect has not gemi- nate-striate elytra, I think it unlikely that either he or Bur- meister was dealing with a true //aplonycha, but almost cer- tainly with a Frenchella. It will be seen, then, that I reject all Boisduval’s names from ITaplonycha, ipehew ing that only one of them applied to a real Haplonycha, and that that (obesa) cannot be identified unless the type exists and can be studied. In 1842 Hope described as Sericesthis Gouldi an insect from Port Essington, which has been attributed to Haplonycha (Colpochila), although there is little in Hope’s description to indicate its generic characters. There is, how- ever, in the South Australian Museum a Haplonycha, from the neighbourhood of Port Essington, which agrees so well with Hope’s description that I have no hesitation in consider- ing it Hope’s species. Hombre and Jacquinot, in 1842, figured, under the name tasmaniea (Voy. Pole Sud. Atl., t. 8, f. 8). a species which has been regarded as identical with ohes7. Boisd. TI regret that T have not been able to investigate the grounds of that deter- 296 mination, but may say that it seems to me unlikely to be cor- rect. The species that I have called ““/7. obesa, Burm. (? Boisd.)” does not, so far as I know, occur in Tasmania. but that which I believe to be pectoralis, Blanch., is found there, and is likely to be identical with tasmanica, H. and J., which latter is the older name. But I have not before me sufficient evi- dence to decide this point. The next author who described species of Haplonycha was Blanchard (Cat. Coll. Ent., 1850), who may be regarded as the founder of the genus, in which he placed seven species, three of which (striatella, iwridescens, and ciliata) I exclude from the genus on account of their elytra not being geminate- striate. Another of his species (obscuricornis) 1s so vaguely described that the striation of its elytra can scarcely be in- ferred, but the implication is that it is not geminate, and I have not much doubt of the insect being a Frenchella. I take it, therefore, that Blanchard’s obesa, scutalis, and pectoralis only can stand in Haplonycha. | H. obesa, Blanch., I have already discussed above. AH. pectoralis, Blanch., I identify without much doubt with a species common in New South Wales. HH. scutalis, Blanch., is scarcely distinguished from pectoralis except by slight colour differences, and a scutellar character to which I attribute but little value. - I think I know the insect, but doubt whether it is more than a variety of pectoralis. Besides the species which he called Haplonycha, Blanchard also described two as Uolpochile (crassiventris and punctubata), which must be placed in //aplonycha as includ- ing Colpochila, Punctulata is a well-known insect from New South Wales, but crass:ventris is less easily identified. Bur. meister says that itis probably identical with his H. Roe (in which case its name has priority), and in this I agree with him. The principal aifficulty seems to be the much greater size quoted for crassiventris, but it almost disappears when it is remembered that in all Blanchard’s measurements a milli- metre requires to be taken as one-thirtieth of an inch. Bear- ing this in mind, and remembering also that the Swan River is the habitat quoted for both crassiventris and Roe, 1t seems fairly safe to treat the latter name as a synonym of the for- mer. | The next author after Blanchard to describe spe- cies of Haplonycha was Burmeister (1855), who de- scribed ten species, three of which (tasmanica, Germ.., rugosa, Burm., and ciliata, Boisd.), cannot remain in the genus, the first being a Pachygastra, and _ the other two probably identical with each other. and almost cer- tainly belonging to Prenchella. I have identified five of the 297 remaining seven with some confidence, and the other two with more doubt. I shall refer to them more particularly in the following pages. One of them, however (/oe:), I have already discussed above. After Burmeister there was a long interval, until in 1871 Macleay described a single species (H. pingwis). There are two Specimens (one of them doubtless the type) bearing this name in the Australian Museum, and they are identical with the Haplonycha that I have discussed above as “obesa, Burm. (? Boisd.)”. I may here remark that obesa, Boisd., is repre- sented in the South Australian Museum by the species that I am convinced is pectoralis, Blanch. _ In 1878 Mr. Tepper described a species of this genus under the name destructor (Tr.R.S.8.A.), which I have already discussed (Pr.L.8.N.8.W., 1890, p. 533). In 1888 (Pr.L.S.N.8.W., p. 913) Sir W. Macleay describ- ed //. testacerpennis. In 1890 I described a number of new species (l.c.) in a paper that I have already referred to in the present memoir, and I added other species in 1892 and 1895, all of which are treated in the following pages. In 1891 H. nitidicollis was described (D.E.Z., p. 263) by Nonfried. As the description is so vague as not to mention even the number of joints in the antennz, or, indeed, any other character that would enable me to place the insect in my tabulation, I am obliged to disregard it altogether. IT have now referred to all the names (to the best of my belief) that have been up to the present time proposed for species that are, in my opinion, or have been treated by their authors as members of tnis genus (including Colpochila). O* those (43 in number) I have indicated 7 as representing species that cannot remain in //aplonycha, 3 as synonyms, and 2 concerning which I have not sufficient data for forming any decided opinion. There consequently remain 31 names which I regard as representing valid species of Haplonycha. I have now to add the descriptions of 29 new species, bringing the total of this genus to the formidable number 60, the dis- tinctive characters of which are displayed in the following tabulations : — Group I. ; [Antenne consisting of only eight joints.] A. Pronotum not having a fringe of long pilosity immediately within the basal and apical rmhargins. B. Head very finelv and closely (con- fluently) punctulate. Sides of pro- thorax not sinuate behind middle... ruficeps, Burm. 298 B. Head much less finely, and _ not nearly confluently, punctured. Sides of prothorax sinuate behind mid- dle ! .. neglecta, Blackb. AA. Pronotum having a fringe of long pilosity immediately within the basal and apical margins ihe -. erinita, Burm. Group II. [Antenne of nine joints. Lateral gutter of pronotum (especi- ally round hind angles) filled with closely packed seti- ferous punctures or granules. | A. Antennal club, with more than 3 lamelle in both sexes. B. 3rd joint of antenne longer than 2nd joint. C. Dise of pronotum and of pygidium non-pilose. D. Punctures of elytra much finer and more sparse than in the next two species ... antennalis, Blackb. DD. Punctures of elytra. much ase es Joint 3 of male antenna den- tate near apex, Joint 1 of fe- male flabellum little shorter Gham: 2 oe : laminata, Blackb. HK. Jomt. oo of male antenna simple; joint 1 of female fla- bellum ‘searcely more than hail eee dubia, Blackb. CC. Dise of pronotum ‘and of pyg oj- dium pilose ... pilosa, Blackb. BB. 3rd joint of antennze not ‘longer than 2nd joint. C. Pygidium carinate, but little con- vex, and conspicuously punctu- late... carinata, Blackb. CC. Pygidium non-carinate, ‘strongly convex, and scarcely punctulate. iD Pygidium very strongly gibbous; joint 1 of female flabellum about half-leneth of 3. campestris, Blackb. DD. Pygidium _ scarcely cibbous ; joint 1 of female flabellum searcely shorter than 8 ... ... fortis, Blackb. AA. Antennal club in both sexes, with only 3 lamelle. B. Base arid apex of pronotum fringed with long hairs immediately within the marginal edging. C. Joint .4 of antenne notably longer than joint 3.. ... latebricola, Blackb. CC. Joint 4 of antenne not ‘longer than joint 3... D. Disc of pronotum “glabrous and very sparsely punctulate ... trichopyga,Blackb. 299 DD. Disc of pronotum pilose, and, in parts, more closely punctu- late ... erassiventris, Blanch. BB. Base and apex of ‘pronotum not fringed with long hairs within the marginal edging ate bs A ... punetulata, Blanch. Group III. [Antenne of nine joints. Lateral gutter of pronotum normal. Apical joint of maxillary palpi impressed with a con- spicuous fovea (which is margined by a fine raised edg- ing. | A. Pronotum not fringed with long erect hairs immediately in front of its basal edging. B. Lateral edging of elytra normal. G. Pronotum lobed in middle of base (best seen from in front oblique- ly), and closely and strongly punc- tulate. D. Pronotum strongly gibbous; ely- tral punctures isolated, on an even surface e ey ... gibbosicollis, Blackb. DD. Pronotum much less convex; elytral punctures run together and mixed with confused rugu- losity setosa, Blackb. CC. Pronotum not lobed at base, more finely and less closely punctulate spadix, Blackb. BB. Lateral edging of elytra very strong and thick ... --- marginata, Blackb. AA. Pronotum fringed with long, erect hairs immediately in front of its basal edging. longior, Blackb. Group LV. [Antennz of nine joints. Lateral gutter of pronotum normal. Apical joint of maxillary palpi not foveate. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi longer than antepenultimate, this character being dcubtful only in some iridescent species. ] A. Hind angles of pronotum well defined, strongly dilated, and reflexed -... badia, Burm. (?) AA. Hind angles of pronotum scarcely di- lated. B. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi notably longer than apical joint . solida, Blackb. BB. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi not longer than apical joint. C. Penultimate joint of mavnillary palpi much longer than antepe- nultimate joint. D. Pronotum not continuously fringed with long, erect hairs immediately in front of its basal edging. 300 E. Dorsal surface of head not both strongly rugulose and clothed with long, erect hairs. F. Perpendicular front face of clypeus, with plentiful punctures, more or less ob- scuring the transverse row of setiferous punctures. G. Antennal club, with 4 joints in both sexes .. * GG. Antennal club, with only 3 joints, at any rate in the female. H. Puncturation of elytra less close, similar to that of bella, Blackb., and pectoralis, Blanch. I. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi very little shorter than apical Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi very much shorter than apical HH. Puncturation ‘of ely- tra much more close. I. Joints 3 and 4 of an- II. tenne somewhat elongate (4, esneci- ally, much ee than wide) . Il. Joints 3 and A. of an- tennze very short, subtransverse FF. Perpendicular front face of clypeus nitid, with only very fine sparse punctures, except the very large trans- verse series (antennal club ; 4-jointed) vy, A EE. Dorsal surface of head strongly rugulose, and cloth- ed with long, erect hairs. F. Form very robust; pronotum strongly declivous at base (as in H. solida, Blackb.)... FF. Form much less robust; pronotum normal (as in H. bella, Blackb.) 7 : DD. Pronotum continuously fring- ed, with very long hajrs im- mediately in front of its basal edging sed Med punctiventris, Blackb. deceptor, Blackb. Sloanei,. Blackb. _accepta, Blackb. punctatissima, Blackb. paradoxa, Blackb. firma, Blackb. clypealis, Blackb. amabilis, Blackb. * I feel no doubt that this is those males which are not known. the case also in respect of 3U1 CC. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi but little (or _ scarcely) longer than antepenultimate. [Iridescent species. ] D. Hind angles of prothorax en- tirely rounded off Gouldi, Hope DD. Hind angles of prothorax well defined. E. Species not having joints 3 and 4 of antenne, both of them very short and subtrans- verse. F. Joint 4 of antenne longer than joint 3. Size very large (about ‘long. 14 1.) nobilis Blackb. GG. Size much smaller (long. 9 1. or less). [Antennal club of male 4-jointed.] bella, Blackb. FF. Joint 4 of antenne slight- ly shorter than joint 3. [Antennal club of male with only 3 joints. ] amoena, Blackb. EE. Joints 3 and 4 of antenne very short, subtransverse ... pulchella, Blackb. Group V. | Antenne of nine joints. Lateral gutter of pronotum normal. Apical joint of maxillary palpi not foveate. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi shorter than antepenultimate, or sub-equal to it. In the latter case the dorsal surface not iridescent. Antennal club composed of more than three joints in both sexes.* | A. Large iridescent species. [Joint 3 of maxillary palpi much shorter than joint 2.] B. Pygidium but little nitid, closely sculptured, especially near base ... gigantea, Burm. (?) BB. Pygidium brilliantly nitid, its puncturation extremely sparse --- lucifera, Blackb. AA. Non-iridescent species; almost in- variably of much smaller size. B. Puncturation of head sparse.. gracilis, Blackb. BB. Puncturation of head very close, more or less confluent. C. Sides and base of pronotum (with- in the margin) and also base of elytra fringed with pe fone erect hairs ... Mauricei, Blackb. *T am quite confident that this is the case in the species (of this aggregate), of which only one sex is known to me. See the aes on this subject under the description of H. lucifera, Blackb 302 CC. Pilosity not as in H. Maurvcet. D. Basal edging of pronotum fine, and equal all across base; hind angles not dilated. EB. Laminee of antennal club very long (in male scarcely shorter than the head) AO EE. Lamine_ of antennal club much shorter. F. Base of pronotum strongly sinuate, middle part quite conspicuously lobate FF. Base of pronotum only feebly sinuate. G. Pronotum strongly Lee tulate GG. Pronotum “finely | ae tulate ue DD. Basal edging of pronotum becomes notably more elevated laterally, with ‘hind angles dis- tinctly dilated. E. Scutellum concolorous with elytra. F. Antennal laminee more elongate (especially in fe- male); pronotum notably more strongly punctulate... FF. Antennal lamine shorter ; pronotum notably more finely punctulate .. EE. Scutellum black in contrast to the red-brown elytra Group VI. ecregia, Blackb. sinuaticollis, Blackb. rustica, Blackb. arvicola, Blackb. electa, Blackb. fraterna, Blackb. sabulicola, Blackh. [Antenne of nine joints. Lateral gutter of pronotum normal. Apical joint of maxillary palpi not foveate. joint of maxillary palpi shorter than antepenultimate, or sub-equal to it. Jn the latter case the dorsal surface not iridescent. Antennal club composed of only three joints. Pronotum not black. Perpendicular front face of cly- peus with plentiful, more or less rugulose, punctures, more or less obscuring the transverse setiferous series. | A. Pygidium somewhat densely clothed with long, soft, pallid hairs ... AA. Pygidium not as in A. B. The lateral gutter of the pronotum punctulate ‘conspicuously and con- tinuously to the hind angles. C. Base of pronotum not fringed in front of its edging with erect hairs. D. Apical 2 joints of maxillary palpi of equal length (at any rate in female). Size large (long. 121) bats oe palpalis, Blackb. equaliceps, Blackb. Penultimate 303 DD. Apical joint of maxillary palpi distinctly longer than penulti- mate joint. E. Lateral outline of prothorax straight or sinuate in front of middle. F. Puncturation of elytra somewhat close (much like Ghat oj, orns Ee fraterna, Blackb., obesa, Burm. (?), ClLGs uate ~ oe FF. Puncturation of elytra much less close. EE. Lateral outline of prothorax a continuous even curve €C. Base of pronotum fringed in front of its edging with long erect hairs ... BB. Lateral gutter of pronotum in its hinder part and round the basal angle smooth and more or less di- lated. C. Club of antenne pallid in strong contrast to the preceding joints ; clypeus very strongly reflexed CC. Antenne unicolorous; ey much less strongly reflexed Group VII. pectoralis, Blanch. (?) pygmea, Blackb. thoracica, Blackb. clara, Blackb. destructor, Tepper obesa, Burm. | Antenne of nine joints. Lateral gutter of pronotum normal. Apical joint of maxillary palpi not foveate. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi shorter than antepenultimate, or sub-equal to it. In the latter case the dorsal surface of the insect not iridescent. Antennal club of only three joints. Pronotum not black. Perpendicular front face of clypeus nitid, bearing only a few very fine punctures and a single series of very large setiferous punctures. | A. Lateral outline of prothorax very strongly rounded. B. Pronotum finely and closely punctu- late = 4a i BB. Pronotum strongly ‘and consider- ably less closely punctulate if ; AA. Lateral outline of eae feebly arched i Group VIII. testaceipennis, Mael. faceta, Blackb. Jungi, Blackb. | Antenne of nine joints. Lateral gutter of pronotum normal. Apical joint of maxillary palpi not foveate. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi shorter than antepenultimate, or sub-equal to it. In the latter case the dorsal surface not iridescent. Antennal club of only three joints. Prono- tum black. | 304 A. Pronotum opaque. B. Elytra closely punctulate, piceous, or black 3 «, fagatina,, Burm. BB. Elytra sparsely punctulate, pale testaceous, with a narrow black margin ... : es teA ... bicolor, Blackb. AA. Pronotum nitid mt ie ..- 4, MIMeCTGS,, btg@ekor H. neglecta, sp. nov. Mas. Ovata; minus brevis; minus ni- tida; rufescens, elytris pallide testaceo-brunneis, irides- centinus ; corpore subtus pedibusque longe fulvo-pilosis ; palpis maxillariis testaceis, articulis 2° 3° que longitu- dine sat zqualibus (4° paullo longior1) ; antennis testa- ceis, 8-articulatis, clava 3-articulata sat elongata; clypeo sapien. fortiter reflexo, cum fronte sat fortiter minus confertim punctulato; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori antice sat fortiter angustato sparsim obsoletius minus subtiliter punctulato, lateribus rotundatis, anguste marginatis, ante basin leviter sinuatis, angulis posticis obtusis; elytris leviter geminato-striatis, sparsim minus subtiliter sat equaliter punctulatis ; pygidio nitido, crebre subtilius punctulato ; tarsorum posticorum articulis basa- libus 2 longitudine inter se sat equalibus. Long., 8 l., lat., 44 1. Fem. latet. Near 77. ruficeps, Burm., but differing considerably from that species in puncturation—the head much more strongly and sparsely punctulate (in rwficeps the punctures are fine and confluent), and the pronotum much more closely. The prothorax is gently sinuate at the sides behind the middle, which it is not in ruficeps. South Australia. In the South Australian Museum, from Wilmington (Burgess). H. antennalis, sp. nov. Ovata ;. nitida; rufo-brunnea, nec iridescens ; corpore subtus pedibus et prothoracis lateri- bus intra marginem fulvo-pilosis; palporum maxillarium articulo 3° quam 2"° et quam 4™ longiori; capite sat crebre vix fortiter sat rugulose, prothorace subtilius minus crebre subobsolete, elytris (his manifeste geminato-stria- tis) fere ut prothorax sed sat magis distincte, pygidio (hoc pernitido) haud perspicue, punctulatis ; antennis 9-arti- culatis; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, postice retrorsum vix perspicue declivi, lateribus (et basis lateri- bus) sulco marginali (hoc eranulis piliferis conferto) im- pressis, basi minus perspicue sinuata; elytris ad apicem suturalem haud vel vix acutis. Maris antennarum flabello 6-articulato, quam articuli omnes precedentes conjuncti sublongiori. 305 Femine antennarum flabello 6-articulato, quam maris multo breviorl, articulo flabelli 1° quam 38" circiter duplo bre- viorl; pygidio gibbo nullo modo carinato. Long, 12-14 l.; lat., 64-7 1. An extremely distinct species, the only one known to me (of the genus) having a well-developed lateral sulcus on the prothorax, and the flabellum of the female antenna 6-jointed. The male has its antennal flabellum notably longer than in any other //aplonycha of the same group (known to me) except pilosa, Blackb., from which species it is easily separable, inter alia, by its pygidium, impunctulate, much more nitid, glabrous, somewhat tumid, and much more widely truncate (and not triangularly impressed) at the apex. The prothorax and elytra in both sexes are notably more nitid and finely and sparsely punctured than in the other species having a flabel- lum with more than three joints. The geminate striation of the elytra is very feeble, scarcely indicated except by the inter- stices between stria and stria of each pair being evidently con- vex and much narrower than the interstices between pair and pair. Western Australia; Swan River, etc. H. pilosa, sp. nov. Ovata, longior; subnitida; rufobrunnea, elytris subiridescentibus ; corpore subtus pedibusque ful- vo-pilosis, capite prothorace elytrorum basi pygidioque pilis elongatis erectis subtilibus vestitis; capite crebre rugulose, prothorace obsolete subcrebre, elytris (his gemi- nato-striatis) sat crebre minus subtiliter, pygidio sparsim perspicue, punctulatis; antennis 9-articulatis ; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, postice retrorsum sat late declivi, lateribus (et basis lateribus) suleo marginali (hoe granulis piliferis conferto) impressis, basi minus perspicue sinuata; elytris ad apicem suturalem sat fortiter denti- formibus. Maris antennarum flabello 6-articulato, quam articuli omnes precedentes conjuncti sat longiori, arcuato; pygidio minus convexo, ad apicem profunde triangulariter im- presso. Fem. latet. Long., 114 1.; lat., 54 1. The antennal structure at once separates this species strongly from all its known allies except H. antennalis, from which it differs as indicated under the heading of that species. The flabellum of its antennz is even longer than in the corres- ponding sex of antennalis. The sparse, erect, very fine, and inconspicuous hairs on its head disc of prothorax and base of elytra are a valuable specific character. Australia. I am not certain of the exact locality, but believe it to be Eyre Peninsula. 306 1. trichopyga, sp. nov. Ovata; longior; sat nitida; rufo- brunnea, supra sat iridescens ; corpore subtus pedibusque fulvo-pilosis, prothorace pilis erectis elongatis fimbriato, abdomine supra (pygidio incluso) pubescenti; capite crebre sat fortiter, prothorace sparsim subtiliter, elytris (his perspicue geminato-striatis) sat fortiter minus crebre (fere ut CC. punctulate, Blanch., sed minus crebre), pygidio sparsim subtiliter (hujus_ pune- turis cum granulis minutis setas sat breves erectas graciles ferentibus sparsim commixtis), punc- tulatis ; antennis 9-articulatis, articulo 4° quam 3° sub- brevior1 ; prothorace quam longiori plus quam duplo lati- ori, postice retrorsum sat late declivi, lateribus (et basis lateribus) sulco submarginali (hoc granulis piliferis con- ferto) impressis, basi modice sinuata, lateribus fortiter rotundato-ampliatis ; elytris ad apicem suturalem inerm1- bus. Maris antennarum flabello 3-articulato, quam articuli 5 pre- cedentes conjuncti parum longiori; pygidio sat convexo, antice in medio longitudinaliter obsolete (vix perspicue) carinato. Fem. latet. Long., 12 1.; lat., 52 1. Among the species of Haplonycha having a well-defined lateral prothoracic sulcus and antenne with a 3-jointed fla- bellum, this species is distinguished by its pilose pygidium in combination with the prothoracic disc non-pilose and its pro- thorax strongly declivous behind. Western Australia ; Coolgardie. H. latebricola, sp. nov. Ovata; minus nitida, rufo-brunnea, vix iridescens ; corpore subtus pedibusque fulvo-vel cine- reo-pilosis, prothorace pilis erectis elongatis fimbriato ; capite crebre rugulose, prothorace sparsim subtiliter, elytris (his geminato-striatis) crebre sat fortiter, pygidio (hoc sat nitido) crebre duplhiciter (/7.¢., subtiliter et minus subtiliter), punctulatis; antennis 9-articulatis; articulo 4° quam 3", sat longior1; prothorace quam longiori vix plus quam duplo latiori, postice retrorsum sat late de- clivi, lateribus (et basis lateribus) sulco submarginali (hoe granulis piliferis conferto) impressis, basi leviter sinuata, lateribus quam precedentis (C. trichopyge) minus for- titer rotundato-ampliatis; elytris ad apicem suturalem inermibus. Maris antennarum flabello 3-articulato, quam articuli 5 pre- cedentes conjuncti parum longiori; pygidio modice con- vexo. 307 Feminz antennarum flabello 3-articulato, quam articuli 5 pre- cedentes conjuncti sat breviori; pygidio quam maris magis convexo, antice in medio longitudinaliter obtuse sat perspicue carinato. Long.. 115-15 L.; lat., 6-74 1. Near the preceding /(//. tmichopyga:), but differing from it by its glabrous and differently sculptured pygidium, its more closely punctured elytra, more convex pronotum, differ- ently proportioned antennal joints, ete. Western Australia. In my own collection; also from Mr. Lea (Champion Bay). H. spadix, sp. nov. Fem.? Ovata, minus brevis; sat nitida ; rufo-brunnea, elytris clare brunneis, antennis palpisque dilutioribus ; corpore subtus femoribusque longe pilosis ; palpis maxillaribus sat crassis, articulis 2° 3° que longi- tudine inter se sat equalibus, 4° quam hi longiori fovea magna impresso ; antennis 9-articulatis, articulis 3° 4° que longitudine inter se sat equalibus, clava 4-articulata quam articuli 2-5 conjuncti vix breviori; clypeo sat brevi, antice sat reflexo, minus crebre sat fortiter punctulato ; fronte confertim subtilius punctulata: protnorace quam longiori ut 17 ad 9 latiori, antice minus angustato, supra subtilius minus crebre punctulato, lateribus sat arcuatis sat anguste marginatis, basi vix sinuata, angulis posticis rotunaato-obtusis ; elytris leviter geminato-striatis, fortius sat crebre punctulatis ; pygidio nitido, sparsim subtiliter punctulato; tarsorum posticorum articulis basalibus 2 inter se sat equalibus. Long., 93 1.; lat., 41. A more robust and dark-coloured species than its allies in the third group ; easily distinguishable by the characters cited in the tabulation. Its sex is doubtful, but I think it a fe- male, as the male is likely to have a longer antennal flabel- lum. North-west Australia (Murchison district). H. marginata, sp. nov. Fem.? Elongato-ovata; sat nitida ; testacea, capite pedibusque rufescentibus ; corpore subtus femorinusque longe pilosis: palpis mawxillaribus ut pre- cedentis (//. spadicis); antennis fere ut precedentis, sed articulo 3° quam 4" manifeste longiori; cap- ite fere ut precedentis, sed clypeo minus elongato; prothorace fere ut precedentis sed quam longiori duplo latiori, paullo magis_ subtiliter punctulato, basi paullo magis perspicue sinuata; elytris fere ut precedentis sed (presertim postice) magis sub- tiliter punctulatis, margine laterali fortiter incrassato ; pygidio ad apicem subacuminato, minus nitido, subtiliter coriaceo et leviter sparsim punctulato: tarsis posticis ut precedentis. lLong., 84 l.; lat., 43 I. 308 Easily distinguishable from all the other species of its group by the very strongly thickened margin of its elytra. It is near H. spadix, but differs from it by numerous minor char- acters indicated in the diagnosis above, as well as-by the re- markable lateral border of its elytra. North Queensland (Mr. R. C. L. Perkins). H. longior, sp. nov. Mas. Elongato-subovata; sat nitida; testacea, capite pedipusque rufescentibus; corpore sub- tus femoribusque longe pilosis ; palporum maxillarium arti- culo 3° quam 2" paullo (quam 4° multo hoc fovea magna impresso) breviorl; antennis 9-articulatis, articulis 3° 4° que inter se sat zqualibus, clava 4-articulata quam articuli 2-5 conjuncti sat longiori; clypeo minus lato, antice subtruncato, fortiter reflexo, sparsim punctulato ; fronte confertim subtilius punctulata; prothorace quam longiori, ut 15 ad 9 latiori, antice sat angustato, supra subtilius vix crebre punctulato, lateribus minus arcuatis anguste marginatis, basi manifeste sinuata, pilis erectis fimbriata, angulis posticis obtusis; elytris fourtius gemi- nato-striatis, fortius vix crebre punctulatis ; pygidio minus nitido, subtiliter subcoriaceo, sparsim subtiliter punctu- lato; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2" multo breviori. Long., 8 1.; Jat., 34 1. Narrower and less dilated hindward than its allies, its clypeus more sparsely punctulate, its pronotum fringed with erect hairs immediately in front of the basal edging, etc., ete. North-west Australia; Roebuck Bay (Mr. F. Bishop). H. Sloanei, sp. nov. Ovata, sat lata; minus nitida; rufo- brunnea; iridescens; corpore subtus pedibusque longe pilosis; palporum wmaxillarium articulo 3° quam 2" multo longior1 quam 4" multo breviori; antennis 9- articulatis, articulo 4° quam 3" sat longiori, clava 3-ar- ticulata; clypeo sat brevi, modice reflexo, cum fronte crebre rugulose punctulato; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, antice sat angustato, supra crebrius nec profunde punctulato, lateribus sat fortiter rotundatis anguste marginatis, basi leviter sinuata, angulis posticis rotundato-obtusis; elytris leviter geminato-striatis, for- tius minus crebre punctulatis; pygidio minus nitido, sub- tiliter subcoriaceo, leviter sat crebre punctulato, setis per- brevibus erectis vestito ; tarsorum posticorum articulo bas- ali quam 2"° sat breviori. Maris antennarum flabellis articulis 2-6 conjunctis longitudine sat equalibus, feminz paullo brevioribus. Long., 9 1.; lat., 44 1. 309 This is the insect which I mentioned (Pr.L.S.N.S.W., 1890, p. 529), as very close to deceptor, Blackb., but probably distinct. I had not at that time noticed the great difference in the proportions of the apical two joints of the maxillary palpi, and this character in combination with those men- tioned in the note cited above satisfies me that the two are valid species. New South Wales ; Mulwala (Mr. Sloane). H. accepta, sp. nov. Fem.? Elongato-subovata; subnitida ; rufo-brunnea, elytris rufis; iridescens; corpore subtus pedibusque longe pilosis; palporum maxillarium articulo 3° quam 2° multo longiori, quam 4"° vix breviorl; an- tennis 9-articulatis, articulo 4° quam 3" sat longiori, clava 3-articulata articulis 3-6 conjunctis longitudine sat equali; clypeo sat elongato, fortiter reflexo, crebre vix rugulose punctulato; fronte crebre rugulose punctulata ; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori1, antice sat angus- tato, supra crebre fortius punctulato, lateribus sat for- titer rotundatis anguste marginatis, basi sinuata, angulis posticis rotundato-obtusis; elytris fortius geminato- striatis, crebre fortius (fere subrugulose) punctulatis ; py- gidio nitido, antice crebrius fortius punctulato in media parte longitudinaliter subgibbo, postice subcoriaceo spar- sim punctulato; tarsorum posticorum articulo_ basali quam 2” sat breviori. Long., 10 1.; lat., 54 1. Resembles H. Sloanez, Blackb., in colouring, but is red- der and somewhat more nitid and iridescent. Longer and narrower than Sloane:, with the clypeus notably longer, the joints of the palpi differently proportioned, the stipes of the antenne longer, the elytra and pygidium differently punc- tured. The pygidium of the unique type bears a few very short, erect sete, which suggest the probability of its being abraded. Western Australia: Coolgardie. Hf. punctatissima, sp. nov. Fem.? Ovata; sat brevis; sub- nitida ; rufo-brunnea; iridescens; corpore subtus pedi- busque longe pilosis; palporum maxillarium articulo 3° quam 2" multo longiori quam 4"* vix breviori; antennis 9-articulatis, articulis 3° 4° que brevibus inter se sat eequalibus, clava 3-articulata, quam articuli 2-6 conjuncti paullo breviori; clypeo minus elongato, modice reflexo, crebre fortiter punctulato: fronte confertim sat rugulose punctulata ; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, antice sat angustato, supra crebre subtilius punctulato, lateri- bus fortiter rotundatis anguste marginatis, basi parum sinuata, angulis posticis late obtusis vix rotundatis ; elytris 310 minus fortiter geminato-striatis, crebre minus fortiter punctulatis ; pygidio minus nitido crebre subtilius granu- lato-punctulato et setis perbrevibus erectis vestito; tar- sorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2“* multo breviori. Long., 8 1.; lat., 42 1. e Resembles the preceding (//. accepta) in respect of its puncturation, but differs much by its antennal structure, as well as by its shorter clypeus, much more shortly ovate form, etc. Judging by the length of its antennal lamelle I take the unique type to be a female. The length of those joints is about as in accepta, but owing to the shortness of the stipes the lamellae are longer than the four joints preceding them. North Queensland ; given to me by Mr. French. I], paradoxa, sp.nov. Mas. Ovata; modice elongata ; nitida ; rufa, elytris (his iridescentibus) palpis antennisque dilutioribus ; sternis temoribusque longe fulvo pilosis, prothorace (exemph typici forsitan abrasi) haud pils fimbriato; capite crebrius subfortiter (postice magis subtiliter), prothorace crebrius leviter, elytris (his geminato-striatis) sparsim minus fortiter, pygidio (hoc glabro coriaceo) subtiliter sat crebre, propygidio (hoc sparsim setoso) sparsim subtor- titer, punctulatis ; antennis 9-articulatis, flabello 4-articu- lato (hujus articulis quam precedentes 5 conjuncti sat longioribus) ; palporum maxillarium articulo penultimo (hoc modice elongato plurisetoso ad apicem dilatato) quam antepenultimus (hoc sat robusto) multo longiori ; prothorace quam longiori fere duplo latiori, antice minus angustato, transversim sat convexo, sat anguste margin- ato, angulis posticis obtusis, lateribus paullo pone medium leviter dilatato-rotundatis ; scutello fere levi; elytris ad apicem muticis ; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 24"* manifeste nec multo breviori. Long., 8 1.; lat., 441. An isolated species, somewhat difficult to place in the genus. Its facres, colouring, and sculpture are suggestive of testacerpennis, Macl. and its allies, but its maxillary palpi re- semble those of the preceding species, with the penultimate joint, however, less cylindric and with more numerous sete ; its antennal club seems to associate it with gigantea and allied species. J know no species really close to it structurally. When both sexes of all the species of Haplonycha are known it may well be that this insect may have to be treated as generically distinct from them. Western Australia; I have no record of the exact locality, but probably it was taken by my son, near Coolgardie. 311 H. firma, sp. nov. Fem. Robusta; sat breviter ovata; sat nitida ; obscure rufobrunnea; corpore subtus pedibusque longe pilosis; palporum maxillarium articulo 3° quam 2" multo longiori quam 4” parum breviorl; antennis 9-articulatis, articulis 3° 2° que longitudine inter se sat eequalibus, clava 3-articulata (laminis articulis 2-6 con- junctis longitudine sat equalibus); clypeo minus elon- gato, sat fortiter reflexo, crebre rugulose punctulato ; fronte fortiter rugulosa, longe setosa; prothorace quam Jongiori ut 9 ad 5 latiori, antice fortiter angustato, supra sat crebre minus fortiter punctulato lateribus fortiter ro- tundatis sat anguste marginatis, basi sat fortiter sinuata ad latera ante marginem setosa, angulis posticis (superne visis) obtusis sat bene determinatis; elytris subfortiter geminato-striatis, fortiter crebrius punctulatis; pygidio nitido, leviter minus crebre punctulato; tarsorum posti: corum articulo basali quam 2" paullo breviori. —Long., 9405 lat.; 5. 1. Though falling, in the preceding tabulation, beside //. cly pealis, Blackb., this species is not allied to it so closely as to H. solida, Blackb., being of much more robust form than cly pealis, with its pronotum strongly declivous at the base, so as to appear (viewed from the side) strongly convex. From solida (besides its differently sculptured head) it differs by its smaller size, much more strongly punctulate elytra, and pro- notum with a setose fringe (very widely interrupted in the middle) immediately in front of the basal edging. Western Australia; sent to me by Mr. Jung. H. clypealis, sp. nov. Mas. Ovata; modice elongata; sat nitida; rufa vel rufobrunnea, iridescens, tiblis tarsisque infuscatis, antennis palpisque dilutioribus; corpore sub- tus femoribusqyie longe fulvo-pilosis, capite pilis elon- gatis erectis sparsim vestito, prothoracis marginibus om- nibus et elytrorum marginibus lateralibus pilis elongatis erectis fimbriatis; capite crebre ruguloso (clypeo minus ruguloso); prothorace elytrisque (his geminato-striatis) subfortiter minus crebre, pygidio (hoc minus nitido setis perbrevibus erectis vestito) minus crebre sat subtiliter, punctulatis; antennis 9-articulatis, flabello 3-articulato (hujus articulis quam precedentes 5 conjuncti haud brevioribus) ; palporuin maxillarium articulo penultimo (hoe elongato quam apicalis haud breviori) quam ante- penultimus fere duplo longiori ; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, antice sat angustato, transversim parum convexo, sat anguste marginato, angulis posticis obtusis, lateribus pone medium valde rotundato-ampliatis; scu- 312 tello sparsim punctulato; elytris ad apicem sat muticis , propygidio opaco creberrime punctulato; tarsorum posti- corum articulo basail quam 2“* multo breviori. Long., 91 slatrok A pretty species, with somewhat brilliant iridescence. I have a specimen from the same locality as the type which I believe to be its female; it is very much damaged and crush- ed, and differs from the male in the somewhat shorter flabellum of its antenne, its pygidium gibbous near the base, and its puncturation in general somewhat closer and stronger. The most noticeable specific characters of this species seem to be its clypeus more elongate, and in front more narrowly rounded than in allied species, and the extremely strong, rounded dila- tation of the sides of its prothorax behind the middle. It is rather close to 7. deceptor, Blackb. (from Central and South Australia), but differs from that insect by, inter alia, its longer and anteriorly narrower clypeus, its prothorax less convex (transversely), and with sides much more strongly rotundate- amplhiate, and the different proportions of its tarsal joints. Western Australia; Coolgardie district. H. amabilis, sp. nov. Mas. Modice elongata; nitida; rufa vel rufotestacea, iridescens ; corpore subtus femoribusque longe fulvo-pilosis, prothoracis marginibus omnibus et elytrorum marginibus lateralibus pilis elongatis erectis fimbriatis ; capite crebre subfortiter nec rugulose, prothor- ace subfortiter minus crebre, elytris (his geminato-stria- tis) minus crebre vix subfortiter, pygidio (hoc nitido setis elongatis erectis sparsim vestito) sparsius dupliciter (se. puncturis sat magnis setiferis et alteris sat subtilibus),. propygidio (hoc breviter setoso) sat crebre nec creber- rime, punctulatis; antennis 9-articulatis, flabello 3-arti- culato (hujus articulis quam precedentes 5 conjuncti haud brevioribus) ; palporum maxillarium articulo pen- ultimo (hoc elongato quam apicalis sublongiori) quam antepenultimus (hoc sat gracili) multo longiori1; pro- thorace quam longiori ut 12 ad 1 latiori, antice fortiter angustato, transversim parum convexo, sat anguste mar- ginato, angulis posticis rotundatis, lateribus haud pone medium rotundato-ampliatis; scutello. sparsim punctu- lato ; elytris ad apicem sat muticis; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2" multo breviori. Long., 94 1.; lat. Kasily distinguishable from all its near allies by the sides of its prothorax not being rotundate-ampliate. This segment is very little convex /7.e., not in any marked degree declivous hindward near the base). In colouring resembles H. bella, Blackb. I have not seen a female example. 313 Western Australia; taken by Mr. Lea near Bridgetown. H. nobilis, sp. nov. Fem.? Ovata; sat elongata; subnitida ; rufobrunnea; modice iridescens; corpore subtus pedi- busque longe pilosis; palporum maxillarium articulo 3° quam 2" fere longiori, quam 4" parum breviorl; an- tennis 9-articulatis, articulo 4° cum 3"° sat longiori, clava 4-articulata quam articuli 2-5 conjuncti vix Gre viori clave articulo basali valde abbreviato ; clypeo mod- ice elongato, fortiter reflexo, sat crebre punctulato ; fronte crebre punctulata; prothorace quam _ longiori duplo latiori, antice sat angustato, supra sparsius sub- tilius punctulato, lateribus minus arcuatis sat anguste marginatis, basi parum sinuata, angulis posticis obtusis (bene definitis) ; elytris subfortiter geminato-striatis, sat crebre subfortiter punctulatis; pygidio nitido, obsolete sparsim punctulato: tarsorum posticorum Ne basali quam 2"° multo breviori. Long., 14 1.; lat.., +]. This remarkably fine species furnishes an Hien of the difficulty that occurs, in almost all large genera, of tabu- lating the species through the existence of one here and there that does not seem to fit in anywhere satisfactorily. Its natu- ral place is quite clearly among the species that form my fourth group, but its maxillary palpi certainly present a difficulty in so classifying it, as the 3rd joint is decidedly not longer than the 2nd. I am not justified in breaking off a palpus for measurement, but I suspect the 2nd joint would prove to be slightly longer than the 3rd. There is, however, in the fifth group not one species known to me which cannot be at once separated from the present insect by not present- ing in combination an iridescent dorsal surface and palpi with joints 2 and 3 subequal in length. I have little doubt of the unique type being a female, or of the male having a much more elongate antennal club consisting of 4 subequal lamelle. Western Australia; in the South Australian Museum (Muir). H. amena, sp. nov. Mas. Elongata; leviter ovata; subni- tida; rufa, elytris antennis palpisque testaceo-bruaneis : iridescens ; corpore subtus pedibusque longe pilosis; pal- porum maxillarium articulo 3° quam 2™ parum longiori, quam 4" sat breviori; antennis 9-articulatis, articulo 4° quam 3" subbreviori, clava 3-articulata quam arti- culi 2-6 conjuncti sat longiori; clypeo minus elongato, fortiter reflexo, cum fronte crebre fortius punctulato: prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, antice modice angustato, supra sparsim leviter punctulato, lateribus sat fortiter rotundatis, anguste marginatis, pone me- 314 dium sat fortiter sinuatis, basi subfortiter sinuata, angu- lis posticis bene definitis subdentiformibus; elytris for- tius geminato-striatis, fortius sat crebre punctulatis; py- gidio sat nitido crebrius dupliciter (subtiliter et minus subtiliter) leviter punctulatis; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2"° sat breviorl. Long., 84 1.; lat., a. The strong sinuation of the sides of the prothorax be- hind the middle readily distinguishes this species from //. Gouldi, Hope, and H. nobilis, Blackb. Its antennal club with only three lamelle separates it from //. bella, Blackb., and the very much longer stipes of its antennze from H. puwl- chella, Blackb. I have no doubt the female differs from the male by the much shorter lamelle of its antenne. Victoria ; given to me by Mr. French. H. lucifera, sp. nov. Fem.(?) Breviter ovata; minus ni- tida; rufa, antennis palpis elytrisque testaceo-brunnelis ; iridescens ; corpore subtus femoribusque longe pilosis ; pal- porum maxillarium articulo 3° quam 2"* multo (quam 4"* sat) breviori; antennis 9-articulatis, articulo 3° 2° longitudine subzquali, clava 4-articulata quam articuli 2-5 conjuncti vix breviorl, clave articulo basali quam 2° circiter dimidio brevior1; clypeo modice elongato, for- titer reflexo, nitido, cum fronte sat crebre punctulato ; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, antice fortiter angustato, supra sparsim subtilissime punctulato, lateri- bus sat arcuatis sat anguste marginatis, basi sat fortiter sinuata, angulis posticis rotundatis; elytris modice gem1- nato-striatis, leviter dupliciter (subtiliter et minus sub- tiliter) sat crebre punctulatis; pygidio pernitido, punc- turis subtilissimis sparsissimis setiferis impresso; tar- sorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2"° multo bre- WaOrd.), Wome... Wile: Vat, -o= |: A species of very widely ovate form, very close to the insect that I take to be H. gigantea, Burm., but differing from it strongly by the structure of its antenne and the sculpture of its pygidium. I do not think I can be mis- taken in my identification of gigantea with a species (of which there is a male in my collection and a female in Mr. Lea’s), from Perth, W.A., agreeing well with the description except in respect of the antennze. Burmeister says that the antennal flabellum of the female is 3-jointed, and that of the male 4-jointed, while I regard the flabellum as 4-jointed in both sexes. As a fact, I do not think that there is any Haplonycha in which it is correct to regard the number of joints in the flabellum as different in the sexes; and that, in 315 spite of my having myself attributed that difference to a species (//. bella), which I described in 1890, and before | had had the opportunity of observing any large proportion of the species now before me. It seems to be invariably the case that if there are 4 lamine in the antenne of the male the 6th joint of the antenne of the female is produced into a lamella representing (not the last joint of the male stipes, but) the basal joint of the male flabellum. In most of these species the 6th joint is so lamelliform in the female that there is no doubt whatever of its being part of the flabellum, but in a few species it is only feebly produced. In the species that I take to be gigantea it 1s scarcely one-third of the 7th joint in length, and in Jde//a it is still shorter (scarcely one- fifth) ; but the males of the species in which it is not produced at all in the female I invariably find to have only 3 la- mine. Under these circumstances I feel justified in think- ing that Burmeister was not strictly correct in his state- ment that the flabellum has a different number of joints in the two sexes of H. gigantea. JT am doubtful as to the sex of the unique type of H/. lucifera. The laminz of its flabellum are notably shorter than in the male, and slightly longer than in the female of the species I regard as gigantea, the basal lamella (the 6th joint of the antenne) being a little more than half the next joint in length. The probability, however, is strongly in favour of its being a female. Western Australia; Swan River; in the collection of Mr. Lea. H. Mauricei, sp. nov. Mas. Subovata: minus lata: sub- nitida; rufa, antennis dilutioribus; corpore subtus pedi- busque dense longissime pilosis; palporum maxillarium articulo 3° 2° sat equali, quam 4™ sat breviori; an- tennis 9-articulatis, articulis 2° 3° que sat brevibus inter se sat equalibus, clava 5-articulata, hujus lamina basali perbrevi quam 2* tribus partibus breviori (laminis 2-5 valde elongatis quam antennarum articuli 1-4 conjuncti multo longioribus, quam caput vix brevioribus): oculis manifeste granulatis ; clypeo sat elongato, ad basin mani- feste angustato, sat crebre punctulato, antice fortiter reflexo; fronte confertim punctulata; prothorace quam longiori ut 13 ad 7 latiori, antice fortiter angustato, supra sparsius subfortiter punctulato, lateribus sat arcu- atis sat anguste marginatis (his cum basi pilis elongatis fimbriatis), basi sat fortiter sinuata, angulis posticis rotundato-obtusis; elytris ad basin longe pilosis, sat fortiter geminato-striatis, fortiter minus crebre punctu- latis; pygidio puncturis sparsis (his longe piliferis) im- 316 presso; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2" sat breviori. Long., 64 1.; lat., 32 1. A very remarkable species; the extremely long laminze of its antenne and the basal narrowing of its clypeus sug- gest a doubt whether it ought not to be treated as the type of a new genus. The antennal character, however, 1s repro- duced in another species (//. egregia, Backb.), which has a normal clypeus, and so connects 1t with Haplonycha. The long pilosity of the sides and base of its pronotum is sugges- tive of the species of my second group, but its pronotum has not the wide lateral gutter of those species. The granula- tion of the eyes is more distinct in this species than in most of its congeners. It may be noted that in this species and all the others of the Group V., in which I have indicated the antennal club as having more than three joints, the club might almost be called 5-jointed, as the 5th joint is slightly lamelliform on its inner side, but so slightly that it seems more convenient to regard it as appertaining to the stipes. Ouldea; Central Australia; taken by Mr. Maurice. H. egregia, sp. nov. Sat ovata; minus elongata; sat nitida; rufo-brunnea, antennis dilutioribus ; corpore subtus pedi- busque longe pilosis; palporum maxillarium articulo 3° 2° sat equali, quam 4" gat breviori; antennis 9- articulatis, articulis 3° 4° que brevioribus inter se sat equalinus, clava 5-articulata (maris fere ut precedentis, H. Mauricei, sed articulo basali paullo longiori; feminz articulo basali vix laminato, 2° quam 3" paullo minus longe laminato, laminis 3-5 quam antennarum articuli 1-4 conjuncti vix brevioripus) ; clypeo sat elongato, cum fronte crebre subrugulose punctulato; prothorace quam longiori vix duplo latiori, antice minus angustato, supra sat crebre subleviter punctulato, lateribus modice rotundatis sat anguste marginatis pone medium manifeste sinuatis, basi manifeste sinuatis subtiliter qualiter marginata, angulis posticis ob- tusis haud dilatatis; elytris perspicue geminato-striatis, crebre sat fortiter punctulatis; pygidio nitido, sparsius leviter punctulato; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2“ manifeste breviori. Long., 64 1.; lat., 341. Agrees with H. Mauricer, Blackb., in the extremely long laminz of its antennal club, but otherwise more resembling H. sinuaticollis, Blackb., from which it differs by its much smaller size, prothorax less strongly sinuate at the base, etc. South Australia; Troubridge, etc. H. rustica, sp. nov. Fem. Elongato-ovata; sat nitida; rufo- brunnea, capite pronoto pygidioque nigris, antennis pal- 317 pisque dilutioribus ; corpore subtus pedibusque longe pil- osis; palporum maxillarium articulo 3° quam 2” vix (quam 4™ sat multo) breviori; antennis 9-articulatis, articulo 4° quam 3% paullo longiori (ambobus brevi- bus), clava 4-articulata (hujus lamina basali quam 2 fere dimidia parte breviori, ceteris quam antennarum articuli 2-5 conjuncti sat longioribus) ; clypeo sat elon- gato, modice reflexo, cum fronte crebre rugulose nec grosse punctulato; prothorace quam longiori fere duplo latiori, antice modice angustato supra crebre sat for- titer punctulato, lateribus modice rotundatis sat anguste marginatis pone medium subfortiter sinuatis, basi modice sinuata subtiliter equaliter marginata, angulis posticis haud dilatatis fere rectis subprominulis (superne Visis) ; elytris leviter geminato-striatis, crebre subfortiter punc- tulatis; pygiaio sat nitido, leviter punctulato, brevis- sime setoso; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2"* sat breviori. Maris antennarum laminis quam feminz longioribus ; pygidio magis nitido, glabro, magis fortiter punctulato. Long., Biles lat.;) 42 1. Easily recognized among its immediate congeners by its black head, pronotum, and pygidium, also from Maurice: and egregia by the very much shorter laminz of its antenne, and from sinuaticollis by, inter alia, the much less strongly sinu- ate base of its prothorax, and the considerably closer punctu- ration of its elytra. JI have founded the description on one of two female examples in the South Australian Museum rather than on the unique specimen (male), in my own col- lection, because the latter is a broken specimen, with only the basal lamella remaining of its antennal flabella, and there- fore I cannot describe its antenne satisfactorily. There is a difference between the two females in the Museum in respect of the pygidium, the surface in one of them being somewhat dull and coriaceous, but I regard this as a mere accidental variation. South Australia; Murray Bridge. H. arvicola, sp. nov. Fem. Elongato-ovata: sat nitida: rufo-brunnea, antennis dilutioribus, capite nonnihil ob- scuro; corpore subtus pedibusque longe pilosis; capite (antennis palpisque inclusis) fere ut precedentis (H. rustice) sed fronte minus crebre punctulato; prothorace fere ut precedentis, sed supra multo magis subtiliter punctulato, ad basin parum sinuato; elytris quam pre- cedentis minus fortiter minus crebre punctulatis: py- gidio sat nitido quam precedentis minus leviter punctu- 318 lato; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2"* parum breviori. Long., 84 1.; lat., 42 1. Somewhat close to H. rustica, but very differently col- oured, with the pronotum very much more finely punctulate, etc. It is unlikely that the male differs much from the fe- male except by the longer lamine of its antenne. As the unique type of this insect has already lost one of its maxillary palpi, I have not been able to risk a satisfactory examination of a palpus; but I can see (without unsafe manipulation) that, although the second joint is partially concealed, there 1s at least not much difference from the palpi of H. rustica. South Australia; Gawler (taken by the late Mr. Rothe). H. electa, sp. nov. Sat late ovata: sat nitida; rufo-brunnea, antennis palpisque dilutioribus; corpore subtus pedi- busque longe pilosis; palporum maxillarium articulo 3° quam 2" vix (quam 4" multo) breviori; antennis J-articulatis articulo 4° quam 3" longiori (ambobus sat brevibus), clava 4-articulata (hujus lamina basali quam 2* maris quinta parte, femina septem partibus, bre- vior1) ; clypeo sat elongato, sat fortiter reflexo, confertim rugulose punctulato; fronte magis subtiliter vix confer- tim punctulata ; prothorace quam longiori fere duplo lati- orl, antice modice angustato, supra minus subtiliter pune- tulato, lateribus modice rotundatis sat anguste (parte postica minus anguste) marginatis pone medium sub- fortiter sinuatis, basi subfortiter sinuata. margine basali latera versus magis elevato, angulis posticis manifeste dilatatis fere rectis supprominulis (superne visis) ; elytris sat foruter geminato-striatis, crebre sat fortiter punctu- latis; pygidio nitido subtilius sparsissime punctulato ; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2" manifeste breviori. Long.,, 94 1. ;-lat., 4% 1. Very close to //. fraterna, Blackb., and differing chiefly by sexual characters. In the male the antennal lamine are scarcely shorter than the clypeus (in fraterna notably short- er). In the female the antennal Jaminz are very little shorter than in male fraterna, but the basal lamina (7.e., that of the 6th antennal joint) equals only about one-seventh of the 2nd lamina in length (in fraterna the longer lamine are not- ably shorter than in electa, but the basal one equals in length nearly half the 2nd). In ¢/ecta the male pronotum is less strongly punctured than the female, but in fraterna the pronotum of both sexes is punctured like that of male electa. Western Australia. 319 H. sabulicola, sp. nov. Mas. Sat late ovata; sat nitida: rufo-brunnea, capite pronoto scutello pygidio et segmento ventrali apicali nigris; corpore subtus et pedibus longe pilosis; palporum maxillarium articulo 3° quam 2” vix (quam 4" multo) breviori ; antennis 9-articulatis, articu- lis 3° 4° que sat zqualibus, clava 4-articulata (vel quasi 5-articulata, articulo antennarum 5° breviter sed man1- feste lamelliformi); clypeo modice elongato, sat crebre punctulato; fronte crebre punctulata; prothorace quam longiori ut 7 ad 4 latiori, antice sat angustato, supra sparsius subtilius punctulato, lateribus modice arcuatis sat anguste (parte postica minus anguste) marginatis pone medium subfortiter sinuatis, basi sat fortiter sinu- ata (parte mediana subfortiter lobata), margine basali latera versus magis elevato, angulis posticis manifeste dilatatis fere rectis subprominulis (superne visis) ; elytris leviter geminato-striatis, crebrius sat fortiter punctu- latis: pygidio nitido sparsim leviter punctulato; tar- sorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2” paullo bre- viori. Long., 8 |.; lat., 44 1. Easily distinguishable, by its colouring, from its nearest allies, also by the tiner and less close puncturation of its pro- notum. The lamelle of its antennze are not much different from those of the male of //. e/ecta, Blackb., but that of the 5th antennal joint is very evidently more developed. I have seen nine specimens of this insect, all from the sandy regions about Eucla, and other parts of south-west Australia (some of them taken by Mr. Graham), and find only very feebly indicated sexual character. The examples which I take to be females are a little smaller than the described type, with the antennal lamine a little shorter, the 5th antennal joint scarcely lamelliform, and the puncturation of the frons and the pronotum a little finer and less close. It is just possible that these specimens are feebly developed males, and that I have not seen the female. South-west Australia (Eucla, etc.). AH. aqualiceps, sp. nov. Fem. Robusta; ovata; minus lata; sat nitida: obscure rufo-brunnea: corpore subtus pedi- busque longe pilosis: palporum maxillarium articulis 2-4 inter se longitudine sat equalibus; antennis 9-articu- latis, articulo 4° quam 3" nonnihil longiori, clava 3- articulata (laminis quam antennarum articuli 2-6 con- juncti sat brevioribus) : clypeo modice elongato, sat for- titer reflexo, cum fronte confertim sat rugulose punctu- lato; prothorace quam longiori fere duplo latiori, antice sat angustato, supra crebre subfortiter punctulato, lateri- 320 bus minus fortiter rotundatis sat anguste marginatis, sulco laterali equaliter ut discus punctulato, basi sat fortiter sinuata, angulis posticis rotundatis; elytris sat fortiter geminato-striatis, crebrius sat fortiter punctulatis; pygidio sat nitido minus crebre sub- fortiter punctulato, parte mediana sublevi; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam, 2"* multo breviori. Long., 12 1.; lat., 64 1. Its large size is acon to distinguish this species from all its immediate allies. It bears much general resemblance to the species which I take to be 7. badia, Burm., but differs from it widely by the structure of its maxillary palpi, also by the very much closer puncturation of its pronotum, and by the hind angles of that segment being rounded off and not dilated. Australia start habitat uncertain; probably Western Australia). H. thoracica, sp. nov. Fem. Sat late ovata; sat nitida; rufo- brunnea, antennis palpisque dilutioribus; corpore subtus pedibusque longe pilosis; palporum maxillarium articulo 3° quam 2"° vix (quam 4" manifeste) breviori; an- tennis 9-articulatis, articulo 4° quam 3" sublongiori, clava 3-articulata (laminis quam articuli 3-6 conjuncti vix longioribus) ; clypeo minus elongato, fortiter reflexo, confertim rugulose punctulato ; fronte crebre punctulata ; prothorace quam longiori ut 17 ad 8 latiori, antice sat an- gustato, supra fortius minus crebre punctulato lateribus equaliter sat fortiter arcuatis sat anguste marginatis, sulco laterali sat equaliter ut discus punctulato, basi minus fortiter sinuata, angulis posticis (superne visis) obtusis sat bene determinatis; elytris sat fortiter gemi- nato-striatis, sat crebre sat fortiter punctulatis; pygidio sub-nitido, leviter sat crebre punctulato ; tarsorum posti- corum articulo basali quam 2™° paullo breviori. Long., B= les lat. 44 1 Somewhat closely allied to the species that I take to be H. pectoralis, Blanch., but very distinct on account of its pro- notum less closely punctulate and with its lateral outline forming an even curve, the greatest width being very little behind the middle. New South Wales. C. clara, sp. nov. Mas.(?) Ovata; modice elongata; sat : nitida; rufo-brunnea, sternis infuscatis: corpore subtus pedibusque cinereo-pilosis, prothcracis marginibus pilis elongatis erectis fimbriatis; capite crebre rugulose, prothorace minus crebre minus fortiter, elytris (his 321 geminato - striatis) sat crebre minus _ subtiliter, pygidio sparsius subtilius sat equaliter, punc- tulatis ; antennis 9-articulatis, flabello 3-arti- culato (hujus articulis quam precedentes 5-con- juncti vix brevioribus); palporum maxillarium articulo penultimo (hoc subcylindrico ad apicem setis brevibus minus perspicuis instructo) quam antepenultimus vix longiori; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, antice sat angustato, postice retrorsum sat late declivi, sat anguste marginato, angulis posticis rotundato-obtusis, basi modice sinuata ; scutello acervatim punctulato; elytris ad apicem muticis; propygidio apicem versus crebre aspere minus subtiliter punctulato; tarsorum posticorum arti- culo basali quam 2"° vix breviori. Long., 9 1.; lat., 32 1. From the comparatively long lamelle of the antennal flabellum and the feebly and evenly convex pygidium I take my unique example of this insect to be a male. It is very distinct from most of the species that resemble it super- ficially, by the structure of its maxillary palp.. South-west Australia. H. faceta, sp. nov. Fem.(?) Ovata; minus brevis; nitida ; rufo-brunnea, antennis palpis elytrisque dilutioribus (his exempli vypici anguste fusco-marginatis) ; corpore sub- tus pedibusque longe pilosis; palporum maxillarium arti- culo 3° quam 2" parum (quam 4" paullo) breviori ; antennis 9-articulatis, articulo 3° quam 4°* vix longiori, 6° introrsum acuto; clava 3-articulata (laminis articulis 2-6 conjunctis longitudine vix zqualibus) ; clypeo brevi, sat fortiter reflexo, cum fronte sat grosse vix crebre punctulato, parte antica perpendiculari pernitida vix punctulata (serie puncturarum magnarum setiferarum excepta) ; prothorace quam longiori fere duplo latiori, an- tice sat angustato, supra inequaliter sat fortiter punctu- lato, lateribus fortiter rotundatis sat anguste margin- atis, basi sat fortiter sinuata, angulis posticis obtusis sat bene determinatis nonnihil dilatatis; elytris leviter gem1- nato-striatis, minus fortiter sat crebre punctulatis; py- gidio nitido, inequaliter subgrosse punctulato, longitudi- naliter obtuse carinato; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2" paullo breviori. Long., 8 1.; lat., 4 1. A nitid species, of clear bright colour, the fuscous edging of the elytra probably not constant, as it is more conspicuous in some parts than in others. I think the type a female, but probably there is very little external difference between the sexes, as in the allied 7. testacecpennis, Macl. The antennal L o22 lamine, although rather elongate for a female, would be un- usually short if the type were a male. Western Australia (exact locality uncertain). H. Jungi, sp. nov. Mas.(?) Ovata; sat elongata; nitida; rufo-brunnea, capite obscuriori, antennis palpisque testa- cels; corpore subtus pedibusque sat longe pilosis; pal- porum maxillarium articulo 3° quam 2™ vix (quam 4" perspicue) breviori; antennis 9-articulatis, articulis 3° 4° que inter se longitudine sat squalibus, 5° 6° que introrsum acutis; clava 3-articulata (laminis articulis 2-6 conjunctis longitudine equalibus) ; clypeo sat brevi, forti- ter reflexo, crebre minus fortiter punctulato, parte antica perpendiculari pernitida vix punctulata (serie puncturarum magnarum setiferarum excepta); fronte sparsius subtilius punctulata; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, antioe minus fortiter angustato, supra sparsim subtilissime punctulato, lateribus minus fortiter arcuatis sat anguste marginatis, basi modice sinuata, angulis posticis fere rectis nonnihil dilatatis; elytris sat leviter geminato-striatis, fortius minus crebre punctu- latis; pygidio sat nitido, sparsissime subtilissime punctu- lato ; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2" multo breviori. Long., 7 1.; lat, 32 1. The sexual differences in the species of this group (the 7th) appear to be very slight; but from its antennal lamine being slightly longer than in //. faceta, Blackb., and the 5th antennal joint, as well as the 6th, being angular on the inner side I judge the type of H. Jungi to be probably a male. It is specifically extremely distinct from //. faceta by the very different puncturation of all its dorsal segments and from both that species and festaceipennis, Macl., by the shape of its prothorax. Western Australia: given to me by Mr. Jung. CLERID . NATALIS. V. Lea, Blackb. This species has a somewhat involved history. I described it in Tr.R.S.S.A., 1899, and pointed out that it must be superficially extremely like Opilo floccosus, Schenk. (described in Deutsch. Ent. Zeit., of the preceding year). In 1903 Schenkling stated (J.c.) that he had found his species to be a Natalis, and that it was identical with N. Lem, Blackb. In the same year, Tr.R.8.8.A., p. 308, I reported Schenkling’s announcement, and assented to _ it. Subsequently Herr Schenkling has been so good as to send me a specimen of his floccosyvs, with the result that on a re- 323 cent re-examination of the specimens of Vafalis in my col- lection, I find that after all the two names appear to repre- sent two distinct, though closely allied, species, which can be readily distinguished from each other by the puncturation of the sterna (especially the metasternum), which in floccosus is very close and asperate; while in Leaz it is entirely different, the prosternum and mesosternum being almost punctureless, and the metasternum being along the median part strongly transversely rugate and elsewhere extremely sparsely punc- tulate. On the dorsal surface there are also evident differ- ences, the pronotum of floccosus being notably more punctu- late, and the wnite hairs on the elytra of Lea: being disposed in perfectly well-defined fascicles. Of floccosus I have two examples (one of which is from Sydney, the exact locality of the other uncertain). Of eat there are three examples in my collection, one of which is from Richmond River, and two from North Queensland (Mr. R. C. T. Perkins). CURCULIONIDA. TITINIA. imteia, Blackb. Mr: “ea (Tr.R-8.8-A.,° 1905," p? 219) makes this name synonymous with 7. ignaria, Pasc. (sic.). He is, however, mistaken in this opinion. In the unique type (in. my collection) of /eta, inter alia, the rostrum is very much narrower between the insertions of the antenne than in 7. ignaria, Pasc. LONGICORNES. PAPHORA. The following two species must be referred to this genus, though both very much larger than the type of this genus, very different in colouring, and of much more robust ap- pearance. I cannot, however, find any structural character in them on which to founda a new genus. P. pulchra. sp. nov. Robusta; ferruginea, capite postice elytrorum basi et in his fascia postmediana lata chalybeo- nigris; breviter sparsius pubescens; antennis elytrorum apicem haud vel vix attingentibus, articulo 3° quam basalis vix (4° manifeste) brevioribus, articulis 5°- 9° gradatim longioribus, 10° 11° que parum_ brevioribus ; capite longitudinaliter leviter concavo, crebre rugulose punctulato: prothorace ut caput punctulato, linea brevi longitudinali postmediana nitida minus perspicue in- structo, longitudine latitudini equali, lateribus leviter rotundatis ; elytris minus crebre (a basi retrorsum grada- tim minus fortiter) vix rugulose punctulatis, ad apicem late rotundatis. L2 324 Probably the smaller of the two examples before me is a male. Apart from size, it differs little from the other speci- men, but its antennez are a trifle longer and less robust, with their apical two joints hardly perceptibly shorter than the 9th joint. Long., 64-8 1.; lat, 2-22 1. Western Australia (Murchison) ; sent by Mr. C. French. P. miles, sp. nov. Robusta ; piceo-nigra, palpis antennis pedi- busque obscure ferrugineis; breviter sparsius pubescens : antennis elytrorum apicem vix attingentibus, articulo 3° quam basalis sat longiori (quam 4" sublongiori), arti- culis 5°-11° quam 4™ sat longioribus (inter se grada- tim vix longioribus) ; capite longitudinaliter leviter con- cavo, crebre rugulose punctulato ; prothorace supra crebre rugulose fere subgrosse punctulato, longitudine latitu- dini zquali, lateribus sat fortiter rotundatis; elytris ad apicem oblique truncatis, ad basin ut pronotum (hine re- trorsum gradatim minus fortiter, in parte apicali leviter sat sparsim) punctulatis. Long., 64 [.; lat., 2 1. Of its previously described congeners, P. robustior, Blackb., is the nearest to the present species, but differs from it by ie more parallel form, puncturation much less coarse and rugulose, basal joint of antennz shorter in proportion to 3rd joint, elytra rounded at apex, prothorax much less rounded laterally, etc. ~ Central Australia (Oodnadatta). The following table shows the distinctive characters of the four species that have now been attributed to this genus : — A. Elytra unicolorous. B. Puncturation of elytra not (or scarcely) rugulose. C. Apex of elytra narrowly rounded modesta, Pase. CC. Apex of elytra mek widely rounded ey .-- robustior, Blackb. BB. Elytra very strongly stugalote in their front half es ... miles, Blackb. AA. Elytra bicolorous ats = --- pulechra, Bluckb. 325 A NOTE ON SOME MODIFICATIONS IN THE MORPHOLOGICAL STRUCTURE OF THE MAMMALIAN VERTEBRAE. By A. GZietz, F.L.S., C.M.Z.S. [Read September 4, 1906. | The morphological changes which the vertebre present when we compare certain modifications in the apophyses, right through the whole of the mammalian series, appear almost as a blank, even in more recent publications. I selected for comparison of these transformations the vertebre of the lum- bar series, for the reason of their simplicity in structure, in preference to the dorsal series, which are subject to many com- plications. In human anatomy the lumbars show the usual forms of apophyses, with the exception of one of these, which is only indicated and known as the tubercle; this is the ana- pophysis. A step further downwards in the mammalian order shows that the tubercle becomes more or less pronounced, till we arrive at the marsupialia, where in some instances they ap- pear as a rather conspicuous element. So far, these changes do not seem to affect the diapophyses, except in one instance, recorded by Professor Owen. This is in Osphranter rufus,* in which they are marked by the reduction to a small rudi- ment, but only in the first lumbar. As we step still further back to the apparently ancient type, the Diprotodon of Owen, the lumbars at a first glance strikingly resemble the lumbars of man, except in one point; this is the entire absence of the tubercle. A more detailed investigation, however, re- veals the fact that what at a first glance appeared to be the diapophyses are in reality the anapophyses, which in this case are transformed into the long, flat, lateral expansions which in other mammalia characterize the diapophyses, but the latter are either absent or occur as a rudiment con- nected with the anapophyses, which would be just the re- verse to what happened in the lumbars of man. * Professor Owen: On the Osteology of the Marsupialia. Trans. Zool. Soc. L., vol. ix., part viii., page 429, pl. Ixxv., fig. 11. 326 ABSTRACT’ OP PROCEED OF THE Royal Society of South Australia (Incorporated) FOR 1905-6. LLLP PLP EP PPP BELA PIPL LOD PPP ORDINARY MEETING, NOVEMBER 7, 1905. THE PReEsipent (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.) im the chair. Exuisits.—J. G. O. Tepper, F.L.8., a prece of rock from near Paratoo, said to be a phosphate and nitrate of potassium and iron. THE PRESIDENT read a paper on the trapdoor spider of the Adelaide Plains, of which the following is an abstract : —1n- terested in this remarkable animal from boyhood, Dr. Verco had at various times taken pains to discover its habits. ‘The burrow or nest of the female spider is a circular and nearly vertical hole, hned for a short distance from the entrance with silk webbing. The entrance is closed with a door con- sisting of layers of webbing and earth, lined on the edges and lower surface with silk webbing. In plan the door is sem1- circular, and lightly bevelled on the lower side to fit exactly the aperture, which is funnel-shaped. The hinge is formed of webbing along the straight side, curved inwards a little towards the ends, so preventing the door opening widely. This modification of the hinge, together with the weight of the door—the centre of gravity of which is always over the opening—causes it to close automatically. Such a door must afford considerable security against enemies:—(1) Is not readily seen, being flush with the surrounding ground; (2) is not easily opened ; (3) is well supported against outside pres- sure.’ The President, having described the occupant, as far as necessary for a clear conception of how it secures its nest against an intruder, proceeded : —‘“‘If the wall of our spider's tube be carefully examined under a lens, a small area will be found just below the bevelled edge, opposite the hinge, which is studded with pin-pricks, slightly elongated vertically. These are made by the spines of the falces. The spider when alarmed rushes to the door, fixes the two fangs into the door, and 327 pushes the dorsal surface of its falces against the wall of the tube, immediately below, thrusting the foremost spines into the silken lining, and so effectually locks the door. Again, as to the disposition of the legs and claws. There are two punc- tate areas, one on each side of the tube, a little behind the transverse diameter. The areas show the pin-pricks, which indicate the holding-ground of the creature’s claws. By this means the strain on the tube is distributed at three equi- distant points, manifestly with advantage and safety to the spider.” Mr. A. H. C. Zrerz, F.L.S., mentioned that the spider with wafer operculum was found in the sandhills at Henley Beach and elsewhere. Mr. GrirritHs showed a very interesting specimen from Western Australia, with a window of silk webbing in the middle of the door. Mr. W. Howcuin, F.G.S.. exhibited examples of the mineral wavellite, a hydrous phosphate of alumina, in two forms. One of these, in the form of small spheres with a radial structure, from the phosphate claims at Pekina. The phosphate mineral occurred in belts and pockets in a decom- posing slate. The other form of the mineral was in mammil- lary nodules, up to six inches in diameter, obtained at Angas- ton. These specimens are interesting from a mineralogical standpoint, but as they are difficult to treat for extraction of phosphoric acid they are not of much commercial value. In Mr. H. Y. L. Brown’s printed list of South Australian mine- rals the only locality for wavellite noted 1s Gawler River, in gneiss. Mr. Howchin also exhibited rock specimens and microscopic sections of an interesting nullipore limestone which occurred over many square miles on Yorke Peninsula, in the neighbourhood of Wallaroo Bay, Alford, Boors Plains, and Tickera. The rock for a thickness of 15 ft. is almost en- tirely composed of calcareous alge, belonging to the genus Inthothamnium, a genus, specimens of which can often be picked up on the beach on South Australian shores. ORDINARY MEETING, APRIL 3, 1906. THE PreEsipEenT (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.) in the chair. Exuisirs.—Mr. W. Howcain, F.G.S., placed before the meeting a Monograph of the Foraminifera of the Permo-Car- boniferous limestones of New South Wales, recently published by the New South Wales Department of Mines and Agricul- ture, and of which Mr. F. Chapman, of Melbourne Univer- sity, and he (Mr. Howchin) were the joint authors. Mr. 328 Howchin passed under review the history of the discovery of foraminifera in the rocks of the Permo-Carboniferous age in Australia, and then described the results recorded in the monograph submitted to the meeting. In this work 35 species were described and figured, 9 of which were new to science. Several species that occurred in rocks of a similar age in Europe and America were found in the New South Wales material. The localities which yielded the foraminiferal forms were Wollong and Pokolbin, the former in the Upper Marine series, and the latter in the Lower Marine series, sepa- rated by 4,000 ft. of strata. The material was supplied by Professor David and Mr. Dun of the Mines Department. Mr. A. H. C..Zretrz, F.L.S.,. Assistant Directoreor auc Museum, informed the meeting that he had successfully finish- ed the restoration of the skeleton of the Diprotodon. Mr. Zietz also exhibited portions of two alge, one Macracystis pyrifera, remarkable for its size, which, according to Harvey, grows to 500 and 1,500 ft. in deep water. This alga is com- mon in the South-East, at Beachport, and elsewhere. The other alga, D’urvillaca potatorum, when fully grown, is from 12 to 24 ft. long, and nearly + in. thick. The seg- ments, strap-shaped, of great length, and 6 to 12 inches broad. This alga is also found at Beachport. — Another exhibit by Mr. Zietz was a piece of tertiary rock containing fossil shells, obtained at a depth of 60 ft. below the surface, from a well at Klemzig, on the River Torrens ; and glauconite, from the same locality; also specimens of black flint, obtained from a large deposit of this mineral on the sea beach, Port MacDonnell, in the South-East. Mr. Epwin Asupsy, bird-skins from the bush, Queens- land, which, with those previously shown, completed the series. Among these were the rifle bird (Craspedophora mag- nifica), male and female, from New Guinea; C. albertz, male, from Cape York; Ptilorhis victoria, male and female, from Cardwell; Prionodura newtoniana, male and female, from Herberton ; Sericulus melinus, Regent bird, male, from Black- all; Scenopeus dentirostris, male, from Cardwell. Mr. J. G. O. Tepprr, F.LS., a Chione from Kangaroo Is- land, and a specimen of chiastolite, from Bimbowrie. Mr. Tepper also showed some flower-like galls on the leaf of a stringybark-tree. THe Britisn Sctencr Guitp.—It was proposed and car- ried that the Society should become a life member of this Guild. Paprers.—‘“On the Ionisation of Various Gases by the 329 Alpha Particles of Radium,” and the “Alpha Rays of Uran- ium and Thorium,” by Professor W. H. Brace, M.A. “Descriptions of Australian Tineina,” by Ep. Meyrick, B.A., F.R.S. ORDINARY MEETING, May 1, 1906. THE PRESIDENT-(J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.) in the chair. Batitot.—Harry Taylor, sharebroker, Adelaide, was elect- ed a Fellow. Mr. Howcuin then proposed: —"That the Royal Society of South Australia respectfully call the attention of the Go- vernment to the desirability of erecting a seismograph at the Adelaide Observatory, by which scientific data of very great interest and of practical importance may be obtained.’ Car- ried. lt was agreed that the Secretary should forward a copy of the above resolution to the Astronomical Society, at the same time asking if any of the members would join a depu- tation from the Royal Society and wait on the Premier, to urge the necessity there exists for having some form of seis- mographical instrument set up in Adelaide. The meeting fur- ther empowered the Council of this Society to bring the mat- ter before the Government. Exuisits.—Mr. W. B. Poole read a paper describing a new Hydroid, found in the Patawalonga Creek, and Mr. E. J. Brapiey described the various phases through which the animal passed while under observation, illustrating these on the blackboard. THE PRESIDENT (Dr. Verco) showed an alga from Beach- port, which had been brought under his notice by Mr. Zietz. Mr. McAlpine, to whom it had been shown, pronounced it an alga new to science. The specimen on view at the larger end was flattened, and about 7 in. in circumference, with no root or base. The thallus, or stem, grows dichotomously, at cer- tain points dividing into two equal arms, and these again di- viding into two, but not always regularly. When dry the colour is brown, but when moist olive green and glutinous to the touch. Examined closely, the surface has a honeycomb- like appearance. In section it is cellular, with a thin outer cuticle. Mr. A. H. C. ZiEtz, a small, green pebble, dredged up from 150 fathoms, supposed to be olivine. Parers.—“Notes on Marine Mollusca of South Austra- lia,” by J. C. Verco, M.D. “Remarks on the Occurrence of Cambrian Glacial Till Beds in the Willouran Ranges, East of Hergott,”’ by W. Howcutn, F.G.S. “Mineralogical Notes 330 —(a) Fetid Felspar (Vecronite) and Quartz, from Umbera- tana; (b) Atucamite, from Bimbowrie,” by Douctas Maw-_ son, B.E., B.Sc. Mr. Howcuin, F.G.8,, gave a short descrip- tion of a visit he had recently made to Hergott during which he had discovered the existence of Cambrian glacial till beds in the Willouran Ranges, similar in all respects to those which occur in the Sturt Valley, near Adelaide. Geological sections ~ were drawn on the blackboard to show the similar strati- graphical features in each case. One observation made was of special interest as offering an explanation of the occur- rence of erratics scattered over some of the plains of the Lake Eyre basin. Mr. Howchin had noted these at Stuart Creek Station, and the Government Geologist had referred to them in a recent report on that district. About six miles from Hergott, eastward, there was a gradual rise to the Willouran Ranges, at the base of which the till beds, with erratics, out- crop. These erratics were found all along the low slope, for at least a mile in breadth, resting on the clay of the plains, and far removed from their source. These may either have directly weathered out of the till beds which occupy the low rises ; or, possibly, dispersed by denudation of the desert sand- stone, in which they have been included as derived material. Mr. Howchin exhibited erratics from the hardened till and glaciated stones from the same locality. ORDINARY MEETING, JUNE 5, 1906. THe “PRESIDENT (J. ‘C: Verco, M.D., FE R-C'S. eee chair. Batiot.—F. H. Snow, merchant, Adelaide, was elected a Fellow. Exuisits.—Mr. A. H. C. Zietz, F.L.S8., a Gecko, a fine specimen, from Umberatana (Gymnodactylus milensw), has sucking discs at extremities of its five toes and claws. This reptile is found in New South Wales and Victoria. Named from the sound it emits. Mr. Zierz also exhibited a Batrachian (Helesporus pie- tus), found by Mr. F. R. Zirrz, on September 1, 1891, at Henley Beach, in the sand at a depth of 3 ft. When found, the animal was very much distended with water and of a pale colour. In this state it had a close resemblance to speci- mens of frogs dug out of the sandy bed of Callabonna Creek by Mr. Zrerz, locally known as water-frogs, on account of the water they contain. A mass of olivine, or chrysolite, from Mount Gambier. volexli., No. 1. The Rumford) Pune Berkeley—University of California Publications, Register, Summer Session, and Announcement of Courses. Se University of California, Pubs. Zoology, vol. 1., No. 9, pp. 287-306, plates 26-28; vol. 11., Nos. l, ° 2,:-4-8, pp. 1-51, 113-368, plates 1, 4-19, figs. 1-62; vol. in:, No.1, pp.,1-12, plates 15 -233do. do., Botany, vol. 1., Nos. 3-11, pp. 91-236. Cambridge—Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard Col- lege, the Report, 1904-5; Geol. Series, Bulle- tin, vol. vili., Nos. 1-3; Bulletins, vol. xlvi., Nos. 5-14; «vol. xiivai..t.Nos.. 1, 2, 3.)oleee Noga 2 ar Chicago—Field Columbian Museum, Report, vol. i1., Nos. 4, 5; Zoological Series, vols. v., vi., and vii., No. 1; Botanical Series, vol. i1., No. 3; Geological Series, vol. 11., Nos. 6 and 7; vol. it1., Nos. 1, 2; Anthropological Series, vol. vi., Nos. 2, 3; vol. vil., Nos .vol.wint.sivolisix.. .Nieguplie ae Cincinnatti—Society of Natural History, Journal, vol xx., Nos. 4.-7. Granville—Denison University Scientific, Laboratories, Bulle- tin, vol.exiii,, arta :ovol. ans arti <2: Massachusetts—Tufts College Studies, vol. ii., No. 1. ———+—_——— The Phys. Geog., Geol., Min., and Palezonto- logy of, 1905. Michigan—Academy of Science, Reports, No. 5. New York—Public Library, Bulletin, vol. viii., No. 3, vol. ix., Nos. 4-13; vol. x., Nos. 1-8. ae Experimental Medicine, the Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research, Studies, vols. iii. and Iv., Journal, vol. vil., No. 2. 355 New York—American Museum of Natural History, Journal, vol. iv., No. 2, pp. 49-60; Bulletin, vol. xvii., Nos. 3, 4, pp. 231-347. oe American Museum of Nat. Hist., Philippine Types; Memoirs, vol. ix., parts 1, 2, 3; An- nual Report of the President, 1904-5. a Academy of Sciences, Annals, vols. xiv., xv., part 3, and vol. xvi., part 2. — ———— International Congress of Americans, 1902. ————— American Geog. Soc., The Grande Soufriere of Guadeloupe, Sept., 1904. —_———-—— The Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences, vol. i., No. 7; vols. i11., iv., and v. wes see Cold Spring Harbour Monographs, Nos. 4, 5. ———— Carnegie Institution of Washington, Zool. Ex- perimental do. do., Nos. 1, 2, 3; do. do., Yearbooks, Nos. 3 and 4. —_————— Biological Chemistry, Journal, vol. 1., Nos. 1, 2, 3. Oberlin—College Library, Wilson Bulletin, Nos. 50, 52-55, Index. Philadelphia—Zoological Society, Annual Report, No. 34. SE EEEEEEnIEEEEEeeee Academy of Natural Sciences, Proceedings, vol. liv., part 2, vol lvii., Nos. 2, 3. SSS American Philosophical Society, Proceedings, Vol xhinwNas eL79)s vol. dive, Nos: 160; 181; Transactions, vol. xxi, part 2. St. Louis—The Academy of Science, vol. xiv., No. 7; vol. xv., Nos. 2-5; Classified List, vols. 1.-xiv. Sacramento—University of California, Pubs. of College of Agriculture, Bulletins Nos. 149-176: Circu- lars Nos. 5-13; Historical and General, part 1. San Francisco—California Academy of Science, Geology, Re- port of the State Earthquake Investigation Commission ; Zoology, Proceedings, vol i., No. 6. ——— ——— University of California, The Morphology of the Hupa Language, vol. i11. Washington—Smithsonian Institution, U.S. Nat. Museum, Bulletins, No. 53, part 1, Nos. 54 and 55. Proceedings, vols. xxviii. and xxix. Con- tributions, vol. x., parts 1, 2; Annual Re- port, 1904. ——-——-—— Annual Report of Board of Regents, 1904. —_—————— Annual Report of Bureau of American Ethno- logy, Bulletins Nos. 28, 29. 356 Washington—United States Geological Survey, Monographs, vol) -xivil:,'): xlviii.,, “parts 1,- 2GeePretes- fessional Papers, Series B, Geology (Des- criptive), Nos. 44, 34. Department of the Interior, Annual Report, No. 26; Mineral Resources, 1904, do. do., Bulletin, Nos. 243-7, 251, 254, 256, 257, 262, 263, 265-6, 268-274, 276. Water Supply and Irrigation, Nos. 119-154, 157-165, 169-171. ————— — United States, Department of Agriculture, Yearbook, 1905. Academy of Sciences, Proceedings vol. vil., pp. 1-188, 251-402; vol. viii., pp. 1-166. National Academy of Science, Memoirs, vol. 1x., Philippine Islands, Manila Department of Interior Ethnol. Survey, Pubs. vols. i. and 1i., part 1; do. do., Bureau of Govern- ment Laboratories, No. xxi, 1905. Urbana—Tllinois State Laboratory of Nat. Hist., Bulletin, VOlevils, varte +): 357 PbS. OF. FELLOW S: MEMBERS, octet 1906. Those marked (1) are Life Fellows. Those marked with an asterisk have contributed papers published in the Society’s Transactions. ' Any change in the address should be notified to the Secretary. Date of rc wisction Honorkary FELLows. 1893. “Cossman, M., Rue de Maubeuge, 95, Paris. 1897. *Davip, T. W. EpeEworva, B. Ay, FR. S.sbGis:, . Perot. Geol., Sydney University. 1888. *DENNANT, Joun, F.G.S., F.C.S. , Inspector of Schools, Cam- ber well, Victoria. 1876. ELuery, Rul Te J., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Gov. Astron., the Observatory, Melbourne, Victoria. 1890. *Erueriper, Rosert, Director of the Australian Museum of New South pH) ales, Sydney. 1905. Gini, THomas, 1.8.0: aera -Treasurer, Adelaide. 1905. *HEpDLEY, Cras. Fi... Naturalist, Australian Museum, Syd- ney. 1892. *MarpeEn, J. Ee F.L.S., F.C.S., Director Botanic Gardens, Sydney. New South Wales. 1898. *Mryrick, E. T., B.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S., Thornhanger, Marl- borough, WwW ilts, England. 1876, "Russen, HH. C:; Baal F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Gov. Astron., Sydney, New South Wales. 1894. *Wiuson, J. T., M.D., Prof. of Anatomy, Sydney University. CoRRESPONDING MEMBERS. 1881. Barry, F. M., F.L.S., Colonial’ Botanist; Brisbane, Queensland. 1880. *FortscHr, Paun, Inspector of Police, Palmerston, N.T. 1893. Srretrron, W. Ga Palmerston, N.T. 1905. Tuomson, G. M., F.L.S., F.C. ig! Dunedin, New Zealand. FELLOWS. 1895. *Asnpy, Epwin, Royal Exchange, Adelaide. 1902. *Baxer, W. H., Glen Osmond Road, Parkside. 1901. *BAsEpow, Hersert, Kent Town. 1887. * BLACKBURN, Rey. THomas, B.A., Woodville. 1886. *Brace, W. H., M.A., Prof. of Mathematics, University of Adelaide, S.A. 1905. Brooxman, GEORGE, North Gilberton. 1883. *Brown, H. Y. L., F.G.S., Gov. Geologist, Adelaide. 1899. Browne, Reta DFS Marlborough Chambers, Adelaide. 1893. BrRUuMMITT, Roser, M.R.C.S., Gilberton. 1904. BRUNKSKILL, GrorcE, Semaphore, S.A. 1906. Bunpry. Miss ELLEN Mine, 148, Molesworth Street, North Adelaide. 1904. 1S7O: 1895. 1876. 1887 1902. 1886. 1904. 1904. 1880. 1896. 1904, 1896. 1899. "1891. 1883. 1902. 1893. 1902. 1900. 1897. 1884. 1856. 1888. 1905. 1874. 1897. 1884. 1859. 1883. 1886. 1904. 1885. 1905. 1869. 1891. 1893. 1857. 1900. 1871. 1881. 1906. 358 CHRISTIE, WILLIAM, Adelaide. *CLELAND, W. L., M.B., Ch.M., J.P., Colonial Surgeon, Resident Medical Officer Parkside Lunatic Asylum, Leo turer in Materia Medica, University of Adelaide. CLELAND, JouHn B., M.D., Perth, Western Australia. (L) CooKE, EBENnrzEr, Commissioner of Audit, Adelaide. *DIxon, SAMUEL, Bath Street, New Glenelg. Epaquist, A. Gi: Hindmarsh. Fiemine, Davin, Barnard Street, North Adelaide. GARTRELL, JAS., Burnside. GORDON, DAvip, Gawler Place, Adelaide. sa cee GEORGE, A.M., F.C.S., Analyst and Assayer, Ade- aide. GREENWAY, THos. J., Adelaide. GRIFFITH, H.. Hurtle Square, Adelaide. Hawker, EK. W., F.C.S., Adelaide. *Hiecin, A. J., F.1.C., Assistant Lecturer on Chemistry, School of Mines, Adelaide. yams Mavrics, F.L.S., Director Botanic Gardens, Ade- aide. *Howcnin, Water, F.G.S., Lecturer on Geology and Paleontology, University. Adelaide. Inirre, Jas. Drinkwater, B.Sc., Prince Alfred Collega, Kent Town. JAMES, THomAS, M.R.C.S., Moonta, JEFFREYS, GEO., Gilbert Place, Adelaide. * JOHNCOCK, Cuas. F. Morphett Vale. *Lea, A. M., Gov. Entomologist, Hobart, Tasmania. Lenpon, A. A., M.D. (Lond.), M.R.C.S., Lecturer on For- ensic Medicine and on Chemical Medicine, University and Hon. Physician, Children’s Hospital, North Ter- race, Adelaide. *Luoyp, J. S., Alma Chambers, Adelaide. *LOWER, Oswatp B., Broken Hill, New South Wales. Mawson, Doveras, B.Sc., B.E., Lecturer on Mineralogy and Petrology, University, Adelaide. Mayo, Gro., G., C.E., Hon. Secretary, 116, Franklin St., Adelaide. *Morean, A. M., M.B., Ch.B., Angas Street, Adelaide. Mounton, H. S.. North Terrace, Adelaide. (L) Murray, Davin. Adelaide. Puitiiees, W. H., Adelaide. Poo.z, W. B. . Savings Bank, Adelaide, REISSMANN, CHARLES, M. AY! M.D. (Cantab.),- B.Ss. (Lond.), etc., Adelaide. *RENNIE, Epwarp H., M.A., D.Se. (Lond.), F.C.S., Profes- sor of Chemistry, University of Adelaide. *Rocrrs, R. S., M.A., M.D., Flinders Street, Adelaide. *RurT, WALTER, Chief Assistant Engineer, Adelaide. SELWAY, W. H. Treasury, Adelaide. SIMSON, Avcustus, Launceston, Tasmania. * SMEATON, Tuomas D., Mount Lofty. SMEATON, STIRLING, B. A., C.E., Engineer-in-Chief's Office. Adelaide. SmitH, Ropert Barr, Adelaide. * STIRLING, Epwarp ©., C.M.G.,° M.A. M:D.,) FURs., F.R.C.8., Professor of Physiology, University of Aare! laide, Director of S.A. Museum. Snow, F. H., Mutual Chambers, Adelaide. 1904. 1906. 1886. 1897. 1894. 1902. 1889. 1878. 1883. 1878. 1859. 1904. 1902. 1886. 1901. 1904. 359 TAYLor, WILLIAM, St, Andrews, North Adelaide. TAYLOR, Harry, Robe Terrace, Medindie. *TrEpper, J. G. O., BLS; Entomologist, S.A. Museum. [Corresponding Member, 1878. ] *Torr, W.G., LU.D., M.A., B.C.L., Brighton, S.A, “TURNER, A. ‘JEFFERIS, M.D., Wickham Terrace, Brisbane, Queensland. VANDENBERGH, W. J., F.R.S.L., F.R.S.E., F.R.M.S., J.P., Barrister and Solicitor, Pirie Street, Adelaide. VaRDON, JosepH, J.P., Gresham Street, Adelaide. *VERCO, JOSEPH CP hr. ive F.R.C.S., Lecturer on the Prin- ciples and Practice of Medicine and Therapeutics, Uni- versity of Adelaide. Wainweicut, EK. H., B.Sc. (Lond.), Wellington Road, Maylands. Ware, W.L., J.P., Adelaide. Way, Right Hon. Sir Samvurn James, Bart., P.C.. D.C.b., Chief Justice and Lieutenant-Governor of South Aus- tralia, Adelaide. WHITBREAD, Howarp, Currie Street, Adelaide. *WooLNouGH, Water GerorGE, D.Sc., F.G.S., University, Sydney, New South Wales. *Ziprz, A. . C., F.L.S., C.M.Z.S., Assistant Director, South Australian Museum, Adelaide. ASSOCIATES. Cottison, Miss Epirn, B.Sc., Flinders Street, Adelaide. Se eae Mrs. Ee RS bas Conchas,’ Largs. South Aus- tralia 360 APPENDICES. FIELD NATURALISTS’ SECTION OF THE Royal Society of South Australia (Incorporated). TWENTY-THIRD ANNUAL REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE For THE YEAR ENDING SEPTEMBER 30, 1906. When reviewing the work of the Section during the past twelve months, there is no doubt that a good class of work is being done by the members in the various branches of scientific interest. It may seem difficult to estimate the cha- racter of the work, and report that there is an improvement, but this judgment is based upon the keener interest shown by members at the evening meetings, and their general desire tor | information on field days. The evening meetings were as follows : — 1905. October 17. Chairman’s Annual Address, “The Dead Months of our Orchid Year,’ Dr. R. 8S. Rogers, M.A. November 13. Meeting in Mr. Berrett’s Woolshed during the three days’ excursion at Barossa. November 21. Notes on the Barossa excursion, by Mr. Doug- las Mawson and Mr. J. W. Mellor. 1906. May 15. Paper, “Trapdoor Spiders,’ Dr. J. C. Verco. June 19. Papers, Mr. T. D. Smeaton on “Insect Life,” and by Mr. E. J. Bradley, on “The New Hydroid”’ discovered by Mr. R. Barringer. July 17. Paper on ‘“‘Eucalyptus,” by Mr. J. M. Black. August 21. Discussion on the proposed Kangaroo Island Reserve. At these meetings there was an average attendance, and interest in the proceedings was well maintained. The following excursions have been held : — 1905. Oct. 7. Coromandel Valley. Oct. 21. Upper Sturt to Belair and Blackwood. Nov. 11, 12, 13. Barossa, three days’ excursion. Nov. 25. Uraidla. ; Dec. 9. Annual picnic, Bridgewater. 361 1906. Jan. 27. Outer Harbour, and dredging in the Port River. Feb. 10. Outer Harbour and dredging in the Port River. May 19. Railway Viaducts. June 2. Pine Forest, Plympton. June 16. Black Hill, Athelstone. July 14. Slape’s Gully. July 28. Fifth Creek, Black Hill. August 18. Fourth Creek, Morialta. Sept. 1, 2, 3. Port Willunga, three-days’ excursion. The attendance at the excursions has been above the average of previous years, although the weather has on several occasions been uninviting. The work at the excur- sions has been recorded in the press reports. Field Work is where the constitution of the Society demands that we should be strongest, and there is no doubt that in the field a good deal of private collecting and observation goes on that dces not appear in the reports. The Society is under obliga- tion to friends who afforded hospitality and permission to visit their properties. The exhibits gathered during the ex- cursions and collected by members have been of the usual interesting and instructive character. Eleven new members were elected, bringing the mem- bership up to 104. The balance-sheet presented shows a balance of 3s. 3d. to credit in the General Fund, and of £4 14s. 7d. in the Excur- sion Fund. The unusual balance in this account accrued through the popularity of two dredging trips. R. S. Rocers, Chairman. EH. Heo beck Hon: See: EIGHTEENTH ANNUAL REPORT OF THE NATIVE FAUNA AND FLORA PROTECTION COMMITTEE OF THE FIELD NATURALISTS’ SECTION OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA, FOR THE YEAR ENDING SEPTEMBER, 1906. The Committee’s last report referred to their letter to the Commissioner of Crown Lands regarding the destruction of penguins and mutton birds and other petrels. In October last the following communication was received in reply : —“‘The Hon. Commissioner directs me to inform you that he has, as suggested by you, asked the keepers of lighthouses to endeavour to have the provisions of the Birds Protection Act, 1900, enforced in their respective localities, to prevent the destruction of penguins, mutton birds, and other petrels.” 362 The chief work of the Committee in the past year has been in connection with the establishment of a large National Reserve for the native fauna and flora on the western portion of Kangaroo Island. In April they met and appointed a sub-committee to obtain information and take the necessary steps for bringing the matter before the authorities. In July a plan of action was decided upon, and on the 25th of that month, at a well-attended meeting in the Mayor’s Parlour, the following resolutions were carried : — On the motion of Dr. Verco, seconded by Professor Stir- ling, C.M.G.: “That this meeting is of opinion that the large area at the western end of Kangaroo Island should be set apart as a national reserve for the native fauna and flora.” Proposed by Dr. R. 8. Rogers, seconded by Mr. Samuel Dixon: “That provision should be made for a health resort being established on the area.” Proposed by Professor Rennie, seconded by Mr. W. H. Selway: “That a deputation wait upon the Government as early as possible to present these resolutions.” On 7th August, in response to about one hundred and fifty circulars and post cards, sent out on behalf of the Com- mittee, a large deputation waited upon the Premier (the Hon. Thomas Price), and brought the matter before him, with the reesult that he promised that the Lighthouse Reserve, containing 60 square mies, should be reserved for the pur- pose, and that, if it could be done without dipping too deeply into the coffers of the Treasury, the increased area asked for should be given. (The area of the whole block asked for was about 300 square miles.) | Under instructions from the Committee, their Secre- tary, on 15th August, wrote to the Premier sending him a plan of Kangaroo Island, on which was shown the bound- ary of the proposed reserve, marked by a red line along the eastern boundaries of the leaseholds Nos. 725, 1004, and 1121, expressing the hope that all the area might be dedicated as a reserve as early as possible, and suggesting that eight gentlemen should be appointed trustees. four on the nomina- tion of the University, each of whom should have special knowledge of one of the following branches of Natural His- tory, namely, animals, birds, fishes, and plants, and four similarly qualified, on the nomination of the Royal Society. The Committee hope they may receive a reply before long. Sami. Drxon, Chairman of Committee. M. Syvmonps Crarx, Hon. Sec. to Committee. Adelaide, September 18, 1906. Aivjatoeg ‘uoFY “MOOT (H “UL oe .9 & & a 0 6 9 9 9 2 ‘D's 96F 0 aouRleg ree * So5v4S0g LB Surquiig j SUISTILOAPV IL GO6L ‘A4}et00g [eAOY 09 pred suotgdtiosqug Ue ‘AM ALIGNGdA XY 8° 9 966 Draaaa G (0) Call Greil | Ds F ‘906L “BT tequiegdeg ‘aprejepy SOUR V's V Tt -Ga0tTs BP ‘yooll0d punoy pur pojipny 9-GO6L OF suotydisosqng *‘ GO6[ 1OF AjJotD0g |eVAOY wor query *‘ GOBL ‘Og Jequieqgdeg ‘puvy ul voUuLleg OF, “‘SLd1MOay “Iq ol VITIVULSOV HLAOS AO ALHINOS 'IVAOU AHL AO NOLLOUS SLSIIVUOLYN G1a1d 364 MALAGOLOGICAL SECTION OF THE Ropal Society of South Australia (gna ANNUAL REPORT FOR 1905-6. During the year 1905-6 the Section continued the revision of the census of the marine mollusca of South Australia, and the familhes Vaticida, Amnicolide, Rissoide, Turritellidea, Scala- ride, Vermetide, and Cerithuda were passed in review. It was then considered advisable, on account of the large amount of new and undescribed material dredged during a recent vacation trip by the Chairman (Dr. Verco), to reconsider the list of gastropoda already reviewed. The result was that seve- ral known species new to South Australia were added to the list, and new species were described. Following Zittel’s order the new revision now covers the families Patellidea, Acmaide, Haliotide, Scissurelide, Cocculinda, and Fissurellide. The following list, which forms the first of a series, gives the South Australian species, with the original reference, and some of the synonyms : — Family PATELLIDA. 1. HELCIONISCUS TRAMOSERICUS, Martyn. Universal Conchology, vol.1., pl. xvi. ~P. diemenensis, Phivlippiaeee varvegata, Reeve. 2. HELCIONISCUS ILLIBRATUS, Verco.’ Trans. Roy. Soc. 8 Aust.,. 1906, vol. xxx., p. 20, pl.x., f. 6 to 14. 3. PATELLA USTULATA, Reeve. Conch. Icon., Reeve, 1855, vol. viii., pl. xxx1., f. 88, a, b. P. tasmanica, Ten.-Woods. 4. PATELLA ACULEATA, Reeve. Conch. Icon., Reeve, 1855, vol, vill., pl. xxxii., f. 90. P. squamifera. Reeve. 5. PaTELLA HEPATICA, Pritchard & Cee Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 1902 (1903), voll SOW 40 (S2))3 ae 2, p31 04a striata, Pilsbry (non Quoy & G.). 6. ParELLA Cyapmani, Ten.-Woods. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1875 (1876), p. 157. Acmca alba, Ten.-Woods. 7. NacELLA PaRvA, Angas. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1878, p-2862;, ple live t..12: 8. NACELLA COMPRESSA, Verco. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust, 1906, vol: xxx., p208, pl. -vi., f. 11-12. 365 9. NACELLA CREBRESTRIATA, Verco. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1904, vol. xxvili., p. 144, pl. xxvi., f. 20, 21. 10. NacELLA Stow#, Verco. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 1906, vol. xxx., p. 209, pl. x., f. 4, 5. Family ACM 441 D 4, 11. Acmaa ocrorapiaTa, Hutton. Cat. Marine Moll. of New Zealand, 1873, p. 44. A. perplevsa, Pilsbry. 12. AcmM#Ha aLTicostata, Angas. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., Peop-speoo, pl. i, f.' EL. 13. AcmM#A MARMORATA, Ten.-Woods. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1875 (1876), p. 156. A. latistrigata, Angas. 14. Acmaa caLtamvus, Crosse & Fischer. Jour. de Conch., re64, p. 348, and 1865, p. 42, pl. 11., f. 7, 8. 15. AcM#A FLAMMEA, Quoy & Gaimard. Voy. Astrolabe, Pomevel: iid. p.-dd4, pl. lexi, f. 1b, fo. A. crucis, Ten:- Woods ; jacksoniensis, Rve.; Gealei, Angas. 16. Acm#a conoipEA, Quoy & Gaimard. Voy. Astrolabe, Fogle valeii., p.-a05, t. 71, £1951. 17. Acm#a supunpuLaTa, Angas. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1865,,p. 155. 18. Acm#a puNcTATA, Quoy & Gaimard, Voy. Astrolabe, Zool., vol. iii., p. 365, pl. Ixxi., f. 40, 42. 19. AcmM#A SEPTIFORMIS, Quoy & Gaimard. Voy. Astro- lnigemecoale, vol.. ni, p. 502, pl: Ixx., £: 43, 44, 1634. cA. scabrilirata, Angas: petterdi, Ten.-Woods. 20. AcM#A CANTHARUS, Reeve. Conch. Icon., Reeve, vol. Titel. £. Pol, 18d. Family HALIOTID. 21. HaLiotis aLBicans, Quoy & Gaimard. Voy. Astro- lakbepAcols) vol. iii:; p. Siiaty 68:if. b.2. 22. HaALIOTIS CYCLOBATES, Peron. Voy. Terr. Aust., vol. 11., 1816, p. 80. H. excavata, Lamarck. 23. Hatiotis roeI, Gray. King’s Voy., vol. 11., appendix, p- 493. 24. Hatioris nz#vosa, Martyn. Univ.--Conch,*h 11, f. 63. 25. HaLioris GRANTI, Pritchard & Gatliff. Proc. Roy. Soe. Vict., vol. xiv., n.s., part 2, p..183, pl. x...(?) H. contco- pora, Peron. 26. HaLioTIS EMM#, Reeve. Gray, MSS. Brit. Mus. Cat. Conch., Icon., Reeve, vol. iii., pl. x., f. 29. 27. HatioTis rupicuNDUS, Montfort. Conch. Syst., p. 114, 115. A. tricostalis, Lamarck. 366 Family FISSURELLID A. 28. FISSURELLA omicRON, Crosse & Fischer. Jour. de Conch., 1864, p. 348; 1865, p. 41, pl. i., f. 4, 6. 29. MEGATEBENNUS CONCATENATA, Crosse & Fischer. Jour. de Conch., 1864; p. 348, pl. i1., f. 4, 6; 1865, pias jones ies isl pe 30. MEGATEBENNUS TRAPEZINA, Sowerby. Proc. Gool. Soc. Lond., 1834, p. 126. F. scutella, Sowerby ; javaniensis, Lamarck ; tasmaniensis, Bonnet. 31. LUCAPINELLA NIGRITA, Sowerby. Proc. Zool. Soe. Lond., 1834, p. 127. F. crucis, Beddome. 32. LuCAPINELLA OBLONGA, Menke. Moll. Novy. Hall. p. 33. LPritchardi, Hedley. oo. MacrocHisMA PRoDUCTA, A. Adams, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1850, p. 202. 34. MACROCHISMA TASMANIZ, Sowerby. Conch. Illus. 1841, p. 5, No. 45, pl. Ixxii., f. 39. ~- Fessurella macro- chisma, Chemnitz; tasmanica, Ten.-Woods; Il’ eldw, Ten.- Woods. 35. GLYPHIS JUKESII, Reeve. Conch. Icon., Reeve, 1849, f. 45. G. fimbriata, Reeve. 36. ZIDORA TASMANICA, Beddome. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1883, p. 169. Z. legrandi, Tate. 37. EMARGINULA CANDIDA, A. Adams. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1851, p. 85, No. 30. ? 38. EMARGINULA DILECTA, A. Adams. Proc. Zool. Soc. hond), 1sols p65, Nes 28: 39. EMARGINULA SUPERBA, Hedley. Records, Aust. Mus., voli, (parhio,. pdb), plixxxvids tee: 40. HMARGINULA, Sp. nov. 41. Aff. Rimuua, gen. nov. 42. SUBEMARGINULA EMARGINATA, Blainville. Malac., 1825, p. 501, pl. xlvi., bis, f. 3. #. Australis, Quoy & Gaim- ard. 43. SUBEMARGINULA RUGOSA, Quoy & Gaimard. Voy. Astrolabe,..Zool., vol. iu., p:' 331, pl. Ixvui., f: 17-185 #: conoidea, Reeve; candida, Adams; tasmania,y Sowerby. 44. ScuTus ANATINUS, Donovan. Rees, Encycl., vol, v., Nat. Hist. Plates, Conchology, pl. xvi. P. e/ongatus, Blain- ville; australis, Lamarck; converus, Quoy & Gaimard; un- quis, A, Adams. 45. TUGALIA PARMOPHOIDEA, Quoy & Gaimard. Voy. As- trolabe, Zool., vol. i1., p. 325, pl. Ixvin., f. 15, 16. TZ. wmter- medius, Reeve: elegans, Gray: ossea, Adams: cinerea, Adams and Sowerby /non Gould): tasmanica, Ten.-Woods; australts, Ten.-Woods. 367 Family SCUTELLINID. 46. ScuTELLINA CALVA, Verco. Trans. Roy. Soc., 8. Austr.) 1906, vol. xxx., p. 217, pl. viti., f. 9, 10. 47. SCUTELLINA ALBORADIATA, Verco. Trans. Roy. Soc. eect. 1906, vol. xxx*;p. 217; pl. viil.,. fies; 1,,.2. Family SCISSURELLID &. 48. ScISSURELLA AUSTRALIS, Hedley. Mem. of Aust. Mus: Vol. iv., part 6, 1903, 'p. 329, f£.-63. 49. ScHISMOPE BEDDOMEI, Petterd. Quarterly Journ. Conch., 1884, vol. iv, p. 139. 50. ScHISMOPE ATKINSONI, Ten.-Woods. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1876 (1877), p. 149. S. carinata, Watson. 51. ScotsMoPE puLcHRA, Petterd. Quarterly Jour. Conch., vol. iv., 1884, p. 139. Family COCCULINIDA. 52. CoccuLiNa TASMANICA, Tate & May. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., vol. xxiv., 1900, p. 102. MNacella tasmanica, Tate & May; \. parva, var. tasmanica, Pilsbry; C. meridio- nalis, Hedley. The Section has elected Dr. J. C. Verco as Chairman, and Mr. R. J. M. Clucas as Secretary for the coming year. The balance-sheet is given herewith :— Recerets aND EXPENDITURE FOR 1905-6. Dr. Receipts. . Shi. iat To Balance brought forward bey ay fis bg (ZZ , Subscriptions, 1905-6 _... oe ea a LEG . Debit Balance E62 50 LAO LG Cr. Expenditure, Sabre Nat | By Gratuity to Caretaker, 1905-6 He re O10; 0 Postages a: OS ee 0 Subscriptions, paid to Treasurer of the Roy al Society— For 1904-5 43 a is she £1070 For 1905-6 meh ai =F Se | a ee © a VGUIG Rosr. J. M. Crucas, Hon. Secretary and Treasurer. MICROSCOPICAL’ SECTION OF THE Roval Soctety of South Australia (Incorporated). ANNUAL REPORT, 1905-6. CHainmMan—Mr. W. FUuLuer. CommiTtTtEE—Messrs. D. Fiemine, D. Mawson, B.E., B.Sc., D. Gorpon. Hon. SEcRETARY.—Mr. E. J. BRADLEY, Dover Street, Malvern. MInvuTE SECRETARY—Mr. H. A. WHITEHILL. AupITtorS—Messrs. T. GoODLEE, 8S. SMEATON, B.A. The present month, September, 1906, marks the comple- tion of the third session of the Section since its resuscita- tion in 1903. The interest and attendance of the mem- bers during the year have been well maintained, the average attendance at all engagements held in the Royal Society’s rooms being seventeen, with a total membership at present of 50. Only one resignation was received during the year, whilst seven new members have been elected. Marked pro- gress has been made in several directions, mainly through several members having devoted their energies to special lines of investigation, whilst the initiation by the Section of a movement for securing an epidiscope, for the use of the various societies affiliated with the Royal Society, the Society of Arts, the Royal Geographical and other Societies, is parti- cularly noteworthy. The value of this instrument as an edu- cational medium and means by which a more general inter- est may be aroused in the work of the various scientific and art societies can scarcely be over-estimated. The class for the Study of Microscopie Technique, held at the Adelaide University, continues to do good work in affording opportunity of acquiring up-to-date knowledge in anatomy, biology, and the art of manipulation of objects of microscopical interest. 369 Meetings and excursions have been held as follows :— September 26, 1905—Annual general meeting. October 21—Excursions to creeks near North Arm. October 24—Paper by Mr. D. Mawson, B.E., B.Sc., on “The Application of Polarized Light in Microscopy,’ and exhibition of stereographs by Mr. W. P. Dollman. November 28—Lecture by Dr. Angas Johnson on “‘Some Parasites of Man,” illustrated by a large collection of slides. January 27, 1906—Dredging Excursion to Port River and Outer Harbour, in conjunction with Field Naturalists’ and Boys’ Field Club. March 10--Dredging Excursion to North Arm and Outer Harbour. March 27—Examination of material obtained as result of excursion to Grange, and discussion of new Hydroid discovered on weed from Patawalonga Creek. April 24—Mr. E. J. Bradley: reported on the successful nature of his studies of the new Hydroid from the Patawa- longa Creek. May 22—Exhibition of various types of modern micro- scopes, and explanation by Mr. D. Mawson on the use of the petrological microscope, and the optical nature of the acces- sores. June 26—Mr. W. P. Poole gave a display of micro- photographic lantern slides prepared by himself, and ex- plained the chief points of interest of each object shown upon the screen. July 24—Lecture and display of preparations of series illustrating life history of the star-fish, Pentagonaster, by Mr. E. J. Bradley. August 28—Mr. W. Fuller showed specimens of skio- graphic work stereoscopically: Mr. W. P. Dollman exhibited photographic enlargements, etc., and Mr. Bradley gave a chat on Chirodota, with exhibits. Epear J. Brapiey, Hon. Secretary. September 25, 1906. 370 MICROSCOPICAL SECTION OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA. BALANCE SHEET, SrEsston 1905-6. Receipts. fe Subscriptions, 1905-6 — 9° 2. 56 Refund from Field Naturalists’ Dredging Excur- sion, Postal Expenses, and Stationery ... Oh gst «a Balance in hand at beginning of Session Ly 4358 Grant from Royal Society get oes £17 15~ 4 Expenditure. Be Sale Subscriptions, 1905-6, paid to Treasurer of ba hee Society : 3 90 EG Postage and Duty Stamps fas 2:4 °9 Stationery be Oy Dt Printing 1 to Attendance (Caretaker) bE ac Cash in hands of Treasurer of Royal Society 2h nS Balance in hands of Hon. Secretary ys ges) Ci Tes et Enaar J. Brapiey, Hon, Secretary. Audited and found correct, S. SMEATON ‘ os eae ae a ? Auditors. THro. GoDLER, se October 22, 1906. GENBRAL™ INDEX: [Generic and specific names printed in italics are described as new.] Acantholipes, coniochroa, 121. Acibdela, 130. ‘Aclees porosus, 73. Acmea alticostata, 209: calamus, 211: cantharus, 215; conoidea, 214; flammea, 212: marmorata, 210; octoradiata, 209: punctata, 214; septiformis, 215; subundu- lata, 214. Acythopeus aterrimus, 101. Adeixis, 130. Holocosma, 37; A. cycloxantha, 38. Aldgate (Camb.), Grits and Con- glomerates, 249. Alge from Beachport, 328, 329. Alpha Particles of Uranium and Thorium, 16. Amphiclasta, 132; A. lygea, 182. Annual Meeting, 363. Annual Report, 343. Anstey’s Hill, Quartzite of, 242. Anthela uniformis, 127. Anthropological Notes on the North- western Coastal Tribes, N.T., 334. Archean Rocks of Mount Lofty Ranges, 257. Ashby, E., Exhibits of Bird-skins, 528, 530, 332. Atacamite from Bimbowrie, 68. Automolus, 276; tabulation of species, 279; -EURYNOME GRANULOSA. ee aD ~~ 7 \ : : am fy ’ : Dt ee H beau ; 7 e ne eee See eee <>. .239/TAL 2UJOMYTARAT=S ) BEUEU i eee ~ REOIUMARD ANONT i : i ae ee “% Dnt ma ee — raat 4 W.H.B. DEL, Hussey & GILLINGHAM I- LITOCHE!IRA GLABRA. 2- ELAMENA TRUNCATA. 7) ~ od VOL, XXX PLATE !I! Pr) c e W.H.B, DEL. HuSSEY & GILLiINGHAM.LITH l- TRICHIA AUSTRALIS. 2;HYMENOSOMA ROSTRATUM. 3%LITOCHEIRA GLABRA. Ls 7 | } £ -: - d cilisndplnle 5 cigitghn eS tS ee , AABAID AFIGHIOTIE .MUTAATZOR AMOZGMIMYH:S: oe , a ios 5 aa ra Vol. XXX., Plate IV. vo) Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide. Vol. XXX Plate V. R.Wendel, del et lith. ad nat: Troedel & C° Print ere ne ~~ ‘ * i om , 7 i 1 ops @ ae ab he aap af ae "Fae R. Wendel, del et lith. ad nat. Vol. XXX Plate VI Troedel & C° Print ; : ' ‘ g 7 . i ‘ ‘ = ‘ = ‘ 1 i i t j P ' id i - . ' . se , * ry it ! ' a 4 es . a ° , ? * r # . Vol. XXX., Plate VII. BATTERY & > {a D = i I YOUN: mae] AM R | | R 9 a T ns y MW bail ot a, UTC ATAT MTT ATTTT r iH anny I a] | : = | | =O) | Ee, = | © | fill = LW , i ll |= = = | i if E | MUI TT a liz a ic] Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide. Vol. XXX., Plate VITI. ff Me a A / ul i CUE: WY \ WH Hy WO Vin MII: A\\ AMMAN ae rae ee es ear Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide. Vol. XXX., Plate IX. if (AE yh Z/ (Can ia A Ahiipin | Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide. Vol. XX-X., Plate Xx, Pb Ly NNR ee bed «Sain gees peppy TA Y pf on tl Trev mee Wea WS Ls Kesteven, del. \ Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide. Vol. XXX., Plate XI. eee Bradley Del > 0« %o- eo -— ; . . ‘ : - , 4 2 . : a wo 7 , [ ’ ‘ _ . RA + t 8 45 = .. — ‘ oS ‘ , a en ee a Ce aie iy “hen ro - = — * — actos nr oe eT Sie a aA = “ ws 7, ’ 4 * ri d on, we P » : > Sirs ii : an { _ ‘ ; ~ = e ~ " : ‘ - | “ " \ = — = —“e - in, i — = ie “ — oe a tian | > | OP. = ——— ? ; - 2 Seana | ‘ oe bo f oe _ > a a . j _ ‘ — 4 - es : a 3 - le er “ A _ A> stl? - FUT “ oW: - Peo es Vol. Ane Plate LL ‘€ “Bi e “Ayo? junow “AYO T yunow “239 ‘SapIZJIENH ‘sapeys ajdung | ‘guo}sawi] uoyybisg -y “‘SIUOJSOWI SNOad|IS¢ aunduy f “S9zR1S IIH SAajdey 1 ‘spag yei9e|9 'y ‘BPZPIEND WEYDIIW puke puowsD uajy ayy “6 ‘aJEIS (puowsg vajy9 40) YOY By ¥ ‘auoysawiy ,, |2,0W OMG, YL 8 “OPIZWENY YOY BY) “P —‘auoySawi] (Suasso) JOAIY 40) JOMO7 BYL “9 = “SayesaWO;Gu0D pue syZH JeSeg ‘gq —“uURIsque)-o1g “e ‘SNOZINOH §=1V9I901039 OL S39N3H3439Y ‘WAS GH1 OL SN3XYOL YAAIY 3H WOU4 ‘S3IN3S NVINSWY9 3HL 40 S038 Y3MO7 3H1 4O NOILDIS DILVWWYH9OVIG—1 ‘Big ©) Y "SyJOM juoWway uo} yBisg WH 8 Agydey WH 49e)g Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide. s _ ; A : ins = *? | ; : > ee saa aft ; ; : A ; - oa i sirr Li 0 ~\ ae a oat? ee c - 2a E _wat a Tr : \ wei a oneal ~. rawr oe Lt ae 4 CONTENTS. Braae, Prof. W. H.: On the Ionisation of Various Gases by the a Particles of Radium Braga, Prof. W. H.: The a Particles of Uranium aude an Thorium ‘Meyrick, H.: Descriptions of Australian Tineina ape \ Mawson, Di: Mineralogical Notes—Fetid Felspar. and f Quartz from Umberatana. Atacamite from Bim- bowrie Lea, ArtHuR M.: Descriptions of Australian | Curcutionide, ‘with Notes on Previously Described Species. Part iv. Baker, W. H.: Notes on South Australian Decapod Crus- tacea. Part iv. Plates i. to iii. TurNnER, Dr. A. Jerreris: New Australian - Lepidoptera, with Synonymic and other Notes Verco, Dr. J. C.: Notes on South Australian! Marine Mol- . lusea, with Descriptions of New Species. Part iii. Plate iv. DENNANT, JOHN: Madreporaria from ‘the ‘Australian and : New Zealand Coasts. Plates v. and vi. Braee, Prof. W. H.: On the Ionisation of Various Ga by the a Particles of Radium. No. 2. Plate vii. Mawson, D.: On Certain New Mineral Species Associated with Carnotite in the Radio-active Ore Body near ary : RenniE, Dr. aes © Mae ss “and Dr. W. T. CGooxe: Preliminary Analytical Notes on Hie Minerals Described in the Pre- ceding Paper... Turner, Dr. A. JEFFERIS: “A Note on the Localities Adee buted to Australian Lepidoptera by Mr. Oswald Lower, Rapcurrr, 8. (communicated by Prof. W. H. Brage, M.3.): Radium at Moonta Mines, South Australia Verco; Dr. J. C.: Notes on South Australian MaraieuNie sae lusca, with Descriptions of New Species. Part iv. Plates viii. to x. Rogers, Dr. R. S.: Deseription of a New Caladenia. _ Plate